PUBLIC

Document Version: Draft – 2020-05-11

Business Process Operations

© 2020 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

THE BEST RUN

Content

1 Business Process Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

2 Business Process Operations Launchpad Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

3 Business Process and Interface Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

3.1 Business Process Monitoring Launchpad Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.2 Setting Up Alerting and Analytics Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.3 Business Process Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.4 Alert Inbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.5 Configuration - Dashboard Builder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.6 Object Adminstration - Business Process Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.7 SAP Operations Control Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
SAP Operations Control Center Alert Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.8 Simplified Process Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

4 Business Process Improvement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

4.1 Business Process Improvement Launchpad Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
4.2 Business Process Analytics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Creating Key Figure Groups, Visibility Groups, and Authorization Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
4.3 Business Process Analytics - Classic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
SAP Business Process Analytics for SAP HANA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
SAP Business Process Analytics for Cross-Database Comparison. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Assigning Roles and Authorizations As an Administrator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Creating an Analysis Variant As a Configuration User. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Automatic Pattern Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Performing an Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Defining Virtual Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
4.4 Maintaining Variant Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.5 Business Process Operations Dashboards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Technical Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
BPO Dashboards Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Roles and Authorizations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Working with Business Process Operations Dashboards as End User. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4.6 Maintaining Exchange Currency Rates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
4.7 Dependency Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4.8 Progress Management Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Creating Customer-Defined Authorization Areas for Progress Management Board. . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Creating Data Sources for Progress KPIs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Business Process Operations

2 PUBLIC Content
 Configuring Progress KPIs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Configuring Progress Management Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Using Progress Management Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
4.9 BPO Reporting Infrastructure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
TwinCubes in Business Process Analytics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Usage Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Log for Data Collection and Cube Upload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Maintaining a Connector Instance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Define Data Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Execute AKF Repository Update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

5 Data Consistency Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

5.1 Data Consistency Management Launchpad Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
5.2 Cross-Database Comparison. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Performing Cross-Database Comparison. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Comparison. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Data Sources in Cross-Database Comparison. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Mass Processing Functions in Cross-Database Comparison. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Filters in Cross-Database Comparison. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Comparison Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Evaluating Comparisons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Creating Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Duplicate Checker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Drill-down comparisons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
5.3 Transactional Correctness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Evaluating Transaction Correctness in a Managed System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Evaluating Transactional Correctness Using SAP Solution Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Handling Transaction Correctness Warning Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
5.4 GSS: Data Consistency Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
5.5 Internal Database Comparison. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
5.6 Business Process Completeness Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Configuring Business Process Completeness Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Instrumenting the Business Process Completeness Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Analyzing Business Process Steps with Business Process Completeness Check. . . . . . . . . . . . .154
5.7 Integration Repository. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Import of SAP Cloud Platform Integration Flows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Documenting Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Integration Repository - Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Interface Search and Mass Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

6 Job Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

6.1 Job Management Launchpad Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Business Process Operations

Content PUBLIC 3
6.2 Job Management Administration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
6.3 Requesting Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Requesting Jobs via a Job Request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Requesting Jobs via a Job Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Processing Job Requests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
6.4 Job Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Integration with Solution Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Creating and Editing Job Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Importing Job Data into Job Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Working with Job Documentation Templates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Managing Job Documents According to Validity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
6.5 Job Scheduling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Scheduling Jobs with Job Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Scheduling Jobs Directly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Using the Job Scheduling Assistant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Job Control for Managed Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Scheduling Recommended Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
6.6 Job Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Central Job Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Simple Job Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
SAP Scheduler Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
External Scheduler Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
6.7 Job Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Job Schedule Gantt Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Background Job Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
6.8 Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
ABAP Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Job Management Health Check Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247

Business Process Operations

4 PUBLIC Content
1 Business Process Operations

Use

In this component, you find tools and functions that help you support the productive operation of your core
business processes across your systems and components.

You can make sure that core business processes run according to the priorities of your company and that the
costs for operating a solution remain at a reasonable level in the following areas:

● Business Process and Interface Monitoring

You use business process and interface monitoring to get alerted about critical situations disrupting the
flow of your business processes and the processing of your interfaces.
● Business Process Improvement
Business Process Improvement enables you to analyze and optimize the throughput through your business
processes and reduce the backlog within the business process executions.
● Data Consistency Management
Data consistency management allows you to avoid, detect, analyze, and solve inconsistencies in your
business process execution.
● Job Management
Job management enables you to automate business processes while considering time and hardware
restrictions. You can request, document, and schedule background jobs in your system environment from
a central location, with a standardized workflow.

Business Process Operations

Business Process Operations PUBLIC 5
2 Business Process Operations Launchpad
Group

Use

This Launchpad group is the central access point to apply and configure business process operations
functionalities.

Business Process Monitoring and business process improvement have their own respective launchpad groups.
For more information, see Business Process Monitoring Launchpad Group [page 9] and Business Process
Improvement Launchpad Group [page 32].

Features

The group consists of the following tiles that are displayed depending on authorization:

Tile Description

Applications

Data Consistency Management You can access the alert inbox and all available checks and tools.

For more information, see Data Consistency Management [page 89].

Cross-Database Comparison You can check data consistency between two sources with complex structure and or hi­
erarchy.

For more information, see Cross-Database Comparison [page 92].

CDC Comparison: Compare ERP - You can explore the dynamic tile for the demo comparison CDC_DEMO_BUSINESS-
ID: CDC_DEMO_BUSINESS- PARTNER_72 in cross-database comparison.
PARTNER_72

Transactional Correctness You can check ABAP programs for transactional correctness.

For more Information, see Transactional Correctness [page 137].

Alert Inbox - Data Consistency You can access the alert inbox for context data consistency management which in­
Management cludes all relevant alerts.

Business Process Operations

6 PUBLIC Business Process Operations Launchpad Group
Tile Description

Business Process Analytics You can monitor and graphically analyze key performance indicators (KPIs) in an SA­
PUI5-based analytical application .

For more information, see Business Process Analytics [page 34].

Progress Management Board You can track the organizational progress made for KPIs within business process im­
provement initiatives.

For more information, see Progress Management Board [page 70].

Business Process Analytics - You can monitor and graphically analyze KPIs.
Classic
For more information, see Business Process Analytics - Classic [page 38].

Dependency Diagrams You can display diagrams to show the dependencies of KPIs.

For more information, see Dependency Diagrams [page 69].

Business Process Monitoring You can display collected metrics for your business processes, steps or interfaces.

For more information, see Business Process Monitoring [page 15].

Alert Inbox - Business Process You can display alert information for the operations control center.
Operations
For more information, see Alert Inbox [page 17].

Business Process Completeness You can identify interrupted executions of critical parts in a business process.
Check
For more information, see Business Process Completeness Check [page 148].

Configuration and Settings

Configuration - Dependency You can create diagrams to display the dependencies of KPIs.
Diagrams
For more information, see Dependency Diagrams [page 69].

Configuration - Virtual You can define virtual characteristics to map them to real characteristics.
Characteristics
For more information, see Defining Virtual Characteristics [page 50].

Business Process Improvement - You can apply various administrator tools such as BP Analytics BW, Data Source Mas­
Administration ter, or Master Data.

Configuration - Business Process You can access the business process completeness check configuration of SAP Solu­
Completeness Check tion Manager.

For more information, see Configuring Business Process Completeness Check [page
149].

Business Process Operations

Business Process Operations Launchpad Group PUBLIC 7
3 Business Process and Interface
Monitoring

Use

Use Business Process and Interface Monitoring with SAP Solution Manager to detect and solve problems
before critical situations arise. Avoid costly system or business process downtimes and reduce the risk of data
inconsistencies.

Graphical displays provide an overview of entire business processes and provide access to details of
automatically collected application-specific key figures.

The business process and interface monitoring applications can be called directly from the SAP Solution
Manager launchpad as well as from the monitoring setup in Solution Documentation, where you can add
alerting objects to business processes and interfaces.

 Note

Business process monitoring (including interface monitoring) in SAP Solution Manager uses the
Monitoring and Alerting Infrastructure (MAI).

 Note

You can also use business process monitoring as a data source type for dashboards that you create in the
Dashboard Builder framework. By selecting Business Process Monitoring data sources, you can configure
dashboards for monitoring specific business process key figures. For more information about the
Dashboard Builder, see Dashboard Builder.

Prerequisites

● Administration has performed all relevant steps for business process monitoring in the SAP Solution
Manager Configuration.
● In Solution Documentation you have defined business processes, with steps that are linked to logical
components to which production systems are assigned.
● You are authorized to set up business process monitoring. For more information, see the Application-
Specific Security Guide at https://help.sap.com/viewer/p/SAP_Solution_Manager.

Business Process Operations

8 PUBLIC Business Process and Interface Monitoring
Activities

To use business process and interface monitoring, proceed as follows:

1. Create a monitoring concept. In doing so, you define the required technical information for business critical
steps or interfaces. You specify which criteria are decisive and which threshold values must be reached or
must not be exceeded.
2. To implement your technical requirements, select a key figure from a catalog of key figures and create
alerting objects at the level of business process step and interface you want to monitor.
For more information, see Setting Up Alerting and Analytics Objects [page 11].
3. Monitor the status of the key figures collected by the alerting objects in the alert inbox or the monitoring
application. You can create auto notifications (for example, by e-mail or SMS) when you set up the
individual alerting objects. That way, you don’t need to regularly check the Alert Inbox for new alerts.
For more information, see Alert Inbox [page 17].
4. Extract the data recorded in business process monitoring to an SAP NetWeaver BW system. Once you have
done that, you can use the data to determine the trends of the last few weeks or months. You can identify
problem situations early and take appropriate measures.
For more information, see Reports: Business Processes Operations [page 249]
5. The data recorded in business process monitoring can be extracted to a SAP NetWeaver Business
Warehouse system (BW system), if you configure this for an alerting object. Thus, you can use the data to
determine the trends of the last few weeks or months. You can identify problem situations early and take
appropriate measures.
For more information, see Business Process Operations Dashboard [page 52].
6. Use SAP Operations Control Center alert reporting to monitor and improve the efficiency of your business
process and interface monitoring activities.
For more information, see SAP Operations Control Center Alert Reporting [page 24].

More Information

For more information, see the SAP Solution Manager Support Portal at https://support.sap.com under
Application Lifecycle Management SAP Solution Manager Processes Business Process Operations .

3.1 Business Process Monitoring Launchpad Group

Use

This Launchpad group is the central access point to implement business process monitoring functionalities.

Business Process Operations

Business Process and Interface Monitoring PUBLIC 9
Features

The group consists of the following tiles that are displayed depending on authorization:

Tile Description

Applications

Business Process You can display collected metrics for your business processes, steps or interfaces.
Monitoring
For more information, see Business Process Monitoring [page 15].

Alert Inbox - Business You can display alert information for the SAP Operations Control Center.
Process Operations
For more information, see Alert Inbox [page 17].

Object Administration - You can reload monitor definitions from the managed system, execute mass maintenance of mon­
Business Project itoring objects and download monitoring configuration.
Monitoring and
For more information, see Object Adminstration - Business Process Monitoring [page 21].
Analytics

Guided Procedures - You can create and change guided procedures to be used for solving alerts in Business Process
Business Process Monitoring.
Monitoring

OCC Alert Reporting - You can determine the workload for the SAP Operations Control Center during a certain time span.
Business Process
For more information, see SAP Operations Control Center Alert Reporting [page 24].
Monitoring

Simplified Process Simplified Process Monitoring provides a simplified and not site-specific presentation of the busi­
Monitoring ness processes. With the app, you can display all kinds of metrics that you have configured in the
Monitoring and Alerting infrastructure.

For more information, see Simplified Process Monitoring [page 28].

Configuration and Settings

Configuration - You can create dashboards for your alerting and monitoring information.
Dashboard Builder

Solution You can access Solution Documentation to create, change, activate, and deactivate your Business
Documentation - Process Monitoring configuration from this tile.
Monitoring
Configuration

Business Process Operations

10 PUBLIC Business Process and Interface Monitoring
3.2 Setting Up Alerting and Analytics Objects

Use

You use Business Process Analytics or Monitoring and Alerting to monitor systems that are relevant for core
business processes. To do so you create and configure analytics or alerting objects in Solution Documentation.
You link the alerting objects to business process steps or interfaces. The related monitoring objects collect data
periodically in the production system and then report the data or alerts into the SAP NetWeaver Business
Information Warehouse. Business Process Monitoring allows you to define alerts based on this data.

For background information and examples, see SAP Support Portal at https://support.sap.com
Application Lifecycle Management SAP Solution Manager Overview Business Process Operations .

Prerequisites

● In Solution Documentation you have defined business processes, with steps that are linked to logical
components to which production systems are assigned. In Solution Documentation you have set the
system role to Production System (analogously you can also monitor test systems). For more information,
see Solution Documentation.

 Note

If you want to use Business Process Analytics only, you do not have need to create business processes.

● The latest release of software component ST-A/PI is installed in the managed systems.
● You have authorization for Business Process Operations.
● Optional: You have created a monitoring concept and defined the business requirements for the monitoring
of business process steps or interfaces.

Preparation

 Caution

The collection of data may affect the performance of production systems.

To keep the system load of the managed systems as low as possible, specify which key figures to analyze,
and which must not necessarily be analyzed.

1. On the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, start Solution Documentation.

2. Check the solution documentation content and ensure the following:
○ To use Business Process Analytics, assign the relevant system via a logical component group to the
solution.
○ To use Monitoring and Alerting, assign the relevant system via a logical component group to the
solution and create at least one scenario containing a business process with at least one process step.

Business Process Operations

Business Process and Interface Monitoring PUBLIC 11
Creating and Configuring Alerting or Analytics Objects

 Note

Even though the setup of analytics objects is similar to the setup of alerting objects, there are some
differences:

● For analytics objects thresholds cannot be maintained and notifications cannot be configured.
● For some of the selection criteria of analytics objects, a so-called group-by option is available.

Configuring Objects for Business Process Analytics

To use Business Process Analytics, you have to create an analytics object in the Solution Documentation
Analytics Library. Proceed as follows:

1. Select a folder in the Analytics Library and place your mouse into the elements section below.
2. Right-click and choose New Analytics . In the creation dialog box choose option Create from Local
Catalogue or Create from Cloud Catalogue.
3. Select a key figure and configure and activate it.

Configure Objects for Monitoring and Alerting

To use Monitoring and Alerting, you have to create an alerting object in the Solution Documentation Business
Processes section at a process, step or interface level. Proceed as follows:

1. Select a process, step or interface and place your mouse into the elements section below.
2. Right-click and choose New Operations Alerting and in the creation dialog box choose option
Create new.
3. Select the monitor or key figure in the tree structure, configure and activate it.
4. Configure the parameters of the monitoring object:

 Note

The list of available application monitors depends on the ST-A/PI add-on release. If monitors are
missing, make sure that the latest ST-A/PI add-on release is installed in the managed systems and load
the monitor definitions for the system in the creation dialog box.

1. Enter the configuration UI for alerting or analytics by right-clicking on the object and choosing Display.
2. Select the key figures to be collected on the Configuration tab page.

 Caution

The number of key figures selected affects the performance of production systems.

To prevent overload, select only the key figures that are necessary for your analysis.

3. To configure key figures, create at least one parameter set.

 Example

You may want to create alerts based on various conditions. For plant A, the appropriate threshold
value for confirmed production orders might be 1000, the appropriate threshold value for the
smaller plant B might be 500. You create two parameter sets, accordingly.

Business Process Operations

12 PUBLIC Business Process and Interface Monitoring
 1. Select a key figure.
2. Specify filter parameters, for example, the shipping point or delivery type (options depend on the
selected key figure).

 Caution

The granularity of the data affects the performance of production systems.

To keep the system load of the managed systems as low as possible, you can, for example,
exclude countries that are not relevant for your analysis.

 Note

If you want to use Business Process Analytics, consider the following:

○ If you analyze throughput data, select Active in the Data from previous day field.
To provide relevant throughput data, you must collect the data from the previous day to
make sure that the data covers the complete business day
○ Depending on the selected key figure, to specify the dimensions of the data collection
runs, you can select Group by check boxes. You must select at least one dimension.
An analysis of the distribution is possible only for those fields, for which the Group by
checkbox is selected.
If you want to analyze, for example, the distribution of overdue outbound deliveries across
shipping points, the Group by checkbox must be selected for the Shipping Point field.
In the analysis, such fields are available as so-called dimensions.

 Caution

The granularity of the data affects the performance of production systems.

To keep the system load of the managed systems as low as possible, carry out one-
dimensional data collection runs.

3. If you want to use Monitoring and Alerting, enter threshold values.

5. Specify the execution time of the data collection

 Note

Data collection for business process monitoring puts load on the monitored system. Consider how
often a data collection (monitoring, for example) makes sense. For technical monitors or critical jobs, a
frequency of 5 minutes might be reasonable, but for backlog key figures, even weekly schedules might
be sufficient.

The scheduling options depend on the object as follows:

○ Simple schedule
You define on which week days, with which frequency and in which time window (start time and end
time), the monitoring is to take place.
○ Extended schedule
You define on which work days the monitoring is to take place. You can refer to a factory calendar (on
the SAP Solution Manager system or on the monitored system).

Business Process Operations

Business Process and Interface Monitoring PUBLIC 13
6. Optional: If the data collection is supposed to take a lot of time, select the Data Collection in Background
field. In the following cases, choose this option:
○ The alerts generated are not time-critical.
○ You use the monitoring object for throughput and backlog key figures.

 Note

It cannot be guaranteed that the background job (BPM_DATA_COLLECTION*) is executed on time,

according to the schedule.

7. If you use monitoring and alerting and want the object to raise an alert if threshold values have been
violated, on the Further Settings tab page, select Alerting Active.

 Note

If you want to configure monitoring without alerting, deselect the Alerting Active check box.

8. If you use monitoring and alerting, you can carry out the following optional steps:
○ To be informed about alerts via e-mail or SMS, for example, configure an automatic notification.
○ On the Further Settings tab page, adapt the default Alert Inbox parameters to define the retention time
of alerts in the Alert Inbox, the language of messages, or the alert severity from 1 to 10.
○ In the Further Settings tab page, you can configure automatic alert confirmation.
With automatic alert confirmation, the alert group will not only be technically closed, but also
confirmed if the rating for the monitoring object is green. The automatically confimed alert group will
then disappear from the alert inbox.
9. Save your settings. Generate or, if you want to start the data collection, generate and activate the
monitoring objects.

Activating Monitoring and Alerting

The activation is required for the data collection (subsequently the monitoring and alerting) to start. You can
activate single or multiple monitoring objects.

1. In Solution Documentation, select the monitoring object or objects you want to activate.
2. Right-click and select option Change Monitoring Status, then choose Activate.

Loading the SAP Solution Manager BW Master Data

To see texts and not only IDs in the Analytics UI, you need to load the SAP Solution Manager BW master data:

1. On the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, choose Business Process Improvement - Administration to open
the BPO Reporting Infrastructure Maintenance.
2. Select the Master Data tab and in the table you see a list of semantic IDs for which master data is required
to use the Analytics function.
3. You can manually load the master data or schedule regular loadings.

Business Process Operations

14 PUBLIC Business Process and Interface Monitoring
Result

You have created and activated an analytics or alerting object and the system collects the key figures and loads
the measured values into SAP NetWeaver BW. Alerts are displayed in the Alert Inbox. Business Process
Analytics can access the key figures and you can perform analyses.

To list all objects for a process including the steps, you need to select the process and click List in the Solution
Documention UI. You can apply to same pattern to any folder structure in Solution Documentation, i.e. for
deep-retrieval use the List function.

To carry out mass changes (of threshold values, parameters or monitoring schedules, for example) you can
select multiple objects and right-click Display, which starts a mass maintenance application.

3.3 Business Process Monitoring

Use

The Business Process Monitoring application shows all metrics collected for your monitored processes, steps,
or interfaces. You can switch between business processes. The application displays the processes with active
Business Process Monitoring, with the highest rating in the alert categories, and the alerts.

Prerequisites

● You have created at least one solution with business processes.

● You have configured monitoring for a business process.

Features

● Scope Selection and Variant Management

To start with Business Process Monitoring, proceed as follows:

1. Select  (Scope Selection)to open the scope selection area.

2. Select the solution branch.
3. Select the solution role.
4. Select the solution site.
5. Via forward navigation, select the business process context for which you want to display the monitoring
data.
6. Press Select.

Business Process Operations

Business Process and Interface Monitoring PUBLIC 15
You can save a set of selections as a variant to retrieve it in a later session. You can set a variant as default and
next time the application loads, the data of the set variant is loaded.

You also have the option to delete a variant. Note that variants are user specific. The variants created by you
are not visible to other users.

The Business Process Monitoring application consists of different areas.

● Overview: There are three sections.

○ Status Overview: You can view an overall count of monitoring objects and various statuses in a chart
view or a tabular view.
○ Process Overview: You can view the following data.
○ Details of the business process in a tabular view or in a chart view
○ Business processes (), process steps (), or interfaces of the selected scope
○ Rating of each business process step or interface, by alert category. Clicking on the ratings
navigates you to the metric details.
○ Number of alerts. Clicking on the alerts navigates you to the Alert Inbox.
○ Alert Ticker: You can find a short preview of alerts with current rating as Red (Critical) or Yellow
(Warning). By clicking any alert you can view its details.
● Process Diagram: Here, you can do the following:
○ You can view the process diagram or a graphical representation of the business process steps and
technical interfaces. The graphic also displays the name of the logical component to which the solution
is assigned. If you choose one of the category icons at the top of the process graphic, you can view the
metric details of individual metrics.
○ Search and select any process steps of the business process by choosing  and view the process
diagram of the selected process.
○ Increase or decrease the size of the diagram by clicking the  and  icon respectively.
● Metrics: Here, you can do the following:
○ View the process hierarchy
○ View the rating information and other data such as trend, value, or system of all monitored objects for
the selected node
○ View the metric trend of the monitoring object by clicking  (Click to launch Trend) of the respective
metric
○ View the details of the last measured metric value
○ Filter, sort, and group the data by using  (View Settings).
○ Search and select any process steps of the business process by choosing  and view the metric
details of the selected process.
○ Navigate to Job Monitoring and Interface Channel Monitoring.

Other features are as follows:

● You can personalize the view of Business Process Monitoring by clicking  (User Menu)
Personalization . You can drag and drop the required view on the screen and choose Save. A new page
gets added. You can rename, hide, copy, or delete the newly added page.
● You can create incidents for support, or send an e-mail or text message to system users, business partners
or external recipients.
● You can set auto refresh, and the details will be refreshed at the specified interval. You can also pause and
restart the refresh.
● You can refresh the details immediately by clicking  (Refresh).

Business Process Operations

16 PUBLIC Business Process and Interface Monitoring
● You can check your notifications by clicking  (Show Notifications).
● You can toggle the side navigation by clicking  (Toggle Side Navigation).

3.4 Alert Inbox

The alert inbox displays alert information. The alert inbox lists all alerts for which there are unconfirmed alert
groups.

Use

The alert inbox gives an overview of all open alert groups in Business Process Monitoring for your monitored
business processes. Objects for which all data collections had a green rating, or for which all alert groups have
been confirmed, are not displayed.

Alerts can have the following ratings:

Rating Meaning

Red Alarm/very critical alerts

Yellow Warning/critical alerts

Gray Inactive/undefined alerts

 Note
Alerts are inactive if an agent can no longer report them, for example in case of a system failure.

Green OK

The queries table displays the current and the worst rating, the last change, and the status of the open alert
groups.

When you select an alert in the queries table, the system displays detailed information about the alert, in the
Alert Details section.

When you have analyzed the cause of the alert, you can confirm that it has been handled.

Prerequisites

● You are authorized to send incident messages, and to confirm the processing of alerts. For more
information, see the Application-Specific Security Guide at https://help.sap.com/viewer/p/
SAP_Solution_Manager.

Business Process Operations

Business Process and Interface Monitoring PUBLIC 17
● You have created a solution and set up business process monitoring. For more information, see Business
Process and Interface Monitoring [page 8].

Features

The alert inbox can be started by selecting Alert Inbox - Business Process Operations on the SAP Solution
Manager launchpad.

Alternatively, you can access the alert inbox from the Business Processes Monitoring application by choosing
an alert icon or a link.

The alert inbox comprises the following areas:

● Scope selection
Select  (Scope Selection) to open the scope selection area, where you can select the solution context or
alerting objects for which you want to display alerts. First select the solution branch, the solution role, and
the solution site. Then select a business process or process step or an alerting object from the alerting
library of Solution Documentation.
You can save filter variants and you can specify a default variant.
● Solution context
The current context is displayed on top of the inbox.
● Auto refresh
In this area, you choose the auto-refresh time interval. For example, you can choose how frequently the
system refreshes the query tables. The query tables of the business process monitoring on MAI are
refreshed according to this time interval.
● Active queries
In this area, you manage your Alert Inbox and can adjust the display to your requirements. You select the
business context.
There are queries to display the alerts, one query per alert category. The standard alert categories are:
○ Throughput & Backlog
○ Job
○ Interface
○ Consistency
○ Exceptions
○ Performance
The number behind the query name indicates the number of alerts currently available in this query. You
can define your own queries that can include any type of alerts (even system alerts).
● Where-used list
The where-used list allows you to understand the related business process and to navigate to the solution
context in Solution Documentation.
● Alert details section
Go to a query and select an alert to display detailed information about the alert in the alert details section.
In the alert details section, you can analyze and process the alert.
● Settings
You can edit the standard view selecting  (Open Settings Dialog).

Business Process Operations

18 PUBLIC Business Process and Interface Monitoring
To start working with the alert inbox, proceed as follows:

1. Select  (Scope Selection)to open the scope selection area.

2. Select the solution branch.
3. Select the solution role.
4. Select the solution site.
5. Via forward navigation, select the business process context for which you want to display the monitoring
data.
6. Press Select.

Alert Details Section

The alert details section has the following subsections:

● Alert Header: Alert name and alert time stamps

● Alert Processing and Guided Procedures: Information about the alert processing and guided procedures
that have been executed to handle the error
● Alert Description and Analysis: Description of the monitoring function
● Alert Details:
○ Measured values and alert text
○ For access to metric reporting, select .
○ Access to detail info list (if available for the monitoring object)

The functions available in the alert details section depend on the business context, your authorization, and
your settings. The following functions are available to all users:

Confirming Alerts
You can confirm the processing of an alert by selecting Confirm. Your confirmation is automatically put in the
alert list. You can enter a comment.

Assigning a Processor
You can assign the alert to a processor who is responsible for the alert handling by choosing Assign. The
processor is displayed, for example, in the Alert Processing and Guided Procedures section and in the action
log.

Creating Incident Messages

You create incident messages to report a problem to support by selecting Create Incident. You can create
incident messages in the following roles:

● As a user or customer
● As a support employee, on behalf of a user

See Create Message for further information.

Creating Notifications
You can create and send notifications about alerts to recipients by selecting Create Notfication.

Business Process Operations

Business Process and Interface Monitoring PUBLIC 19
Executing Guided Procedures

You can search for guided procedures by selecting Search Guided Procedures that help you to resolve the alert.
If a guided procedure has been executed for the alert, this is displayed in the Alert Processing and Guided
Procedures subsection.

3.5 Configuration - Dashboard Builder

Use

The Dashboard Builder application is a cross-application dashboard framework. You can use it to create
dashboards for various applications. You can use it to create more high-level dashboards for your alerting and
monitoring information from Business Process Monitoring.

Features

There are the following options:

● You can access dashboards in display mode using  (view mode)

○ In the display mode, you can zoom in on individual tiles to display the legend for the graphic using 
(Zoom in).
● To create a new dashboard, proceed as follows:
1. Select  (New Dashboard).
2. Provide a dashboard name and assign a category.
3. Assign a transport request or create the dashboard as a local object.
● You can edit dashboards by clicking  (Edit Dashboard).
● You can copy dashboards by clicking  (Copy Dashboard).
● You can delete dashboards by clicking  (Delete Dashboard).

To add a custom tile to a dashboard, proceed as follows:

1. Select  Custom Tile.

2. On the following screen, you can specify the custom tile.
3. To display information on Business Process Monitoring, assign Business Process Monitoring as data source
type.
4. To select a data source name from the list of available dashboard key figures for Business Process
Monitoring, select the value help for Data Source Name. You can use the filter and search options to find
the metrics to be displayed on the dashboard.
5. Select a metric from the catalog.

Business Process Operations

20 PUBLIC Business Process and Interface Monitoring
  Note

For each of the metrics, you can display the available values by clicking , , or  .

6. Press OK .
The section Available Fields lists all available filters and grouping fields. The fields in the Rows section are
assigned to the x-axis, the ones in the Columns section are assigned to the y-axis. The section Filters shows
filter assignments.
7. Save your configuration.

You can access the configuration of an existing tile by selecting  (Settings).

3.6 Object Adminstration - Business Process Monitoring

With this administration tool you can reload monitor definitions from a managed system, execute mass
maintenance of monitoring objects, and download monitoring configurations.

Features

There are the following options:

● You can display the object lists for selected solution contexts.

 Note

You can only navigate to logical components, not to business processes.

○ You can personalize the view of tables by selecting  (Personalize).

○ On each tab, you can export data to a spreadsheet by selecting  (Export to Spreadsheet).

 Note

Each tab needs to be downloaded seperately.

 Note

The downloaded sheet only contains the content displayed in the Object List.

○ You can search object lists by selecting  (Search (Ctrl+F)).

○ You can edit the standard view of Current Context by selecting  (Open Settings Dialog).
● To reload monitor definitions from a managed system, proceed as follows:
1. In the navigation, choose Logical Components
2. Choose the system(s) which you would like to execute the reload for
3. Press Load Monitor Definitions
● To execute individual maintenance of a monitoring object, proceed as follows:

Business Process Operations

Business Process and Interface Monitoring PUBLIC 21
 1. Choose a logical component.
2. Press  in the column Actions.

3.7 SAP Operations Control Center

Use

To efficiently make use of the Business Process Operations tools provided in SAP Solution Manager, SAP
recommends establishing an SAP Operations Control Center. SAP Operations Control Center is a central, on-
site IT support entity that proactively monitors the productive SAP environment (non-SAP applications can be
also included).

SAP Operations Control Center ensures highly automated and proactive operation, resulting in reduced
operation costs, improved IT services, and increased business satisfaction. SAP Operations Control Center is
closely integrated with the SAP Innovation Control Center and the SAP Mission Control Center.

Overview of SAP Operations Control Center Integration in SAP Solution Manager

The general concept of SAP Operations Control Center is as follows:

● The SAP Operations Control Center collects technical (Application Operations) and functional (Business
Process Operations) monitoring information about IT landscape components and business processes.
● The data is stored in SAP Solution Manager and is displayed on central monitors, for example, on TV
screens in the SAP Operations Control Center room or in reports and dashboards.
● Alerts are generated based on this data. A small team of IT operators processes the alerts in the event
management process. When an alert is triggered, the IT operators immediately perform an initial analysis
and take appropriate action, for example, cleaning up an SAP file system or restarting a background job.
When the alert is solved, the IT operator closes the alert. If further support is required, the IT operator

Business Process Operations

22 PUBLIC Business Process and Interface Monitoring
 creates an incident from the alert with a single mouse-click and sends the incident to the next support level
for processing.
● The continuous optimization process finds solutions for the most problematic business and IT areas. The
process is supported by data from the central monitors, for example, trending data on business throughput
or backlog data, such as sales orders without deliveries or deliveries without invoice.
● SAP Operations Control Center is closely integrated with IT Service Management (ITSM) processes,
namely incident management, problem management, and change management.

Implementation Considerations

SAP Operations Control Center is not available by default. The implementation of an SAP Operations Control
Center is part of a “Run SAP like a Factory” implementation and includes the following activities:

● Installing SAP Solution Manager 7.2

● Setting up and configure the central technical and functional monitors and dashboards
● Defining the IT support processes for Event Management and Continuous Improvement and integrating
them into the existing IT Support processes (especially with Incident Management).

SAP has documented the implementation and setup activities in detail in SAP Solution Manager, under
Roadmaps (transaction RMMAIN). The relevant roadmaps are available as part of SAP software component ST-
ICO. SAP Support Pack 35 for ST-ICO provides roadmap updates.

There are the following relevant roadmaps:

● ESRV RSLaF Appl. Operations describes the setup activities for technical monitors.
● ESRV RSLaF Business Proc. Oper. describes the setup activities for functional monitors.
● ESRV RSLaF Operations Control Center describes the setup activities for Event Management and
Continuous Improvement.

Features

SAP Operations Control Center performs the following functions:

● Immediately processes alerts from the productive SAP environment

● Supports finding the root cause of problems
● Provides transparency about the operational state of the SAP environment by using automated reports
and dashboards
● Constantly identifies and improves problem areas for business and IT services

Multilingual Support

SAP Operations Control Center can operate in multiple languages.

Business Process Operations

Business Process and Interface Monitoring PUBLIC 23
More Information

● For more information about SAP Innovation Control Center, see the SAP Library for Innovation Control
Center on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/icc Application Help <release>
<language> .
● For more information about reporting and optimizing your SAP Operations Control Center activities, see
SAP Operations Control Center Alert Reporting [page 24].

3.7.1 SAP Operations Control Center Alert Reporting

As an SAP Operations Control Center manager, you use SAP Operations Control Center Alert Reporting to
report the control center workload and performance.

Using SAP Operations Control Center Alert Reporting, you check KPIs per managed object to optimize the alert
resolution process for both Business Process Operations, and Application Operations.

SAP Operations Control Center Alert Reporting is available for alerts from Business Process Monitoring and
technical monitoring:

● Business Process Operations alert reporting contains information about alerts assigned to a business
process in Solution Documentation. This can include technical alerts from shared use cases, for example
interface monitoring or job monitoring.
● Application Operations alert reporting contains information about the alerts related to Application
Operations.

 Note

The key figures of SAP Operations Control Center Alert Reporting are only relevant if you have an event
management process and if alerting for Applications Operations and Business Process Operations is
configured and operational. The key figures regarding incidents are only relevant if you use SAP Solution
Manager Service Desk for Incident Management. The number of incidents or the ratio of confirmed alerts
without incidents, for example, only make sense if the operations control center staff confirms alerts
promptly (otherwise the duration until alert confirmation is exaggerated).

Using SAP Operations Control Center Alert Reporting

Starting SAP Operations Control Center Alert Reporting

You start the SAP Operations Control Center Alert Reporting application from the SAP Solution Manager
launchpad.

Selecting the Scope

1. Select  (Scope Selection)

2. In the scope selection window, specify the alert information that you want to display:

Business Process Operations

24 PUBLIC Business Process and Interface Monitoring
 ○ For Business Process Operations alert reporting, choose the Solution Context tab and select the
system role, the site, and the Solution Documentation structure element. You can select business
processes or alerting objects from the alerting library.
○ For Application Operations alert reporting, choose the Technical Context tab and select the managed
object type and the alert category.

Your selection is saved for your next use of the application.

Selecting the Data Source

To select the data source, go to the Configuration pane. The following data sources are available:

● SAP Business Warehouse

● Alert Store

Selecting the Time Frame

By default, the application displays the alerts that have been created today. To select a different time frame in
which the alerts have been created, choose the time frame selection icon. In the time frame selection window,
you can specify a period between two specific dates or select a relative time frame, such as the current week or
the last 30 days.

 Note

In the time frame selection, you specify the time when the alerts have been created. The application always
displays the current status of the alerts.

Overview Page

The Overview page provides an overview of the alerts for the selected scope. Pie chart views display the
following information:

● Number of alerts per alert status

Depending on the data source, the alert statuses have the following definitions:
○ BW data:

Status Definition

Open The alert hasn't been assigned to a processor yet.

In Process The alert has been assigned to a processor.

Automatically Confirmed The alert has been confirmed without having been as­
signed to a processor.

Manually Confirmed The alert has been confirmed and the alert was as­
signed to a processor.

○ For alert store data:

Business Process Operations

Business Process and Interface Monitoring PUBLIC 25
 Status Definition

Open No action has been taken yet.

In Process An IT operator is working to resolve the alert.

Confirmed The alert has been resolved.

Transferred An incident has been created for the alert. The incident
and the alert are not resolved yet.

● Number of alerts per alert processor

● Number of confirmed alerts
Depending on the data source, this chart displays the proportions of the following:
○ For BW data:
○ Confirmed alerts without incidents
○ Confirmed alerts with incidents
○ For alert store data:
○ Confirmed alerts without incidents
○ Confirmed alerts with automatically created incidents
○ Confirmed alerts with manually created incidents
● Number of alerts per alert confirmor
● Number of alerts per confirmation classification (only for alert store data)
● Number of alerts per confirmation category (only for alert store data)

 Tip

You can print each chart by clicking  .

Details Page
The Details page displays detailed information on the following KPIs in table charts:

Key Performance Indicator Possible Use Case

Number of Alerts and Number of Alert Identify managed objects that cause a significantly higher number of alerts.
Instances (Events)
An alert (group) aggregates alert instances (events depending on the data
collection intervals configured for the managed object).

Business Process Operations

26 PUBLIC Business Process and Interface Monitoring
Key Performance Indicator Possible Use Case

Maximum Duration Until Alert Confirmation Identify managed objects that take an unusually long time to resolve issues.
(in Minutes) for BW data
BW data
Maximum Duration Until Manual Alert
You can display the maximum duration unitil alert confirmation only for the
Confirmation (in Minutes) for alert store
last 7 days.
data
Alert store data

Since Maximum Duration Until Manual Alert Confirmation (in Minutes) evalu­
ates only the manually confirmed alerts and excludes alerts that have been
confirmed automatically by the system after a defined time span, you can
use this KPI to check the real maximum processing times.

Average Duration Until Alert Confirmation (in Identify statistical outliers with regard to the maximum duration, by checking
Minutes) for BW data the average duration of your alert resolution processes.

Average Duration Until Manual Alert Alert store data

Confirmation (in Minutes) for alert store
Since Average Duration Until Manual Alert Confirmation (in Minutes) evalu­
data
ates only the manually confirmed alerts and excludes alerts that have been
confirmed automatically by the system after a defined time span, you can
use this KPI to check the real maximum processing times.

Number of Confirmed Alerts with or Without Measure the efficiency and proactivity of your operations control center, by
Incidents identifying the percentage of alerts which you have been able to resolve on
your own, without manual or automatic incidents being created.

 Note
Depending on the data source, you can differentiate between incidents
created manually and automatically.

● The alert store differentiates between alerts without incidents,

alerts with incidents created manually, and alerts with incidents cre­
ated automatically
● The alert cube from SAP Business Warehouse differentiates be­
tween alerts with or without incidents (automatic or manual) only.

Number of Alerts with Incidents Number of alerts for which an incident has been triggered either manually or
automatically.
only for BW data

Number of alerts with manually created Use this KPI to check the quality of your standard operating procedures:
incidents
Since the operation control center should be able to resolve alerts without
only for alert store data having to create manual inicidents, a high number of manually created inci­
dents indicates that the operation procedures need to be improved.

Business Process Operations

Business Process and Interface Monitoring PUBLIC 27
Key Performance Indicator Possible Use Case

Alerts with automatically created incidents Use this KPI to check if your monitoring concept needs to be improved:

only for alert store data If incidents are created automatically, this usually means that according to
the monitoring implementation of the alerts, these alerts cannot be handled
by the operations control center. Possible reasons for this are, for example,
that expertise is required or that there is no error handling documentation
available.

Maximum Alert Response Times Check if the initial response time to alerts is acceptable. For each monitoring
object, the table indicates the time until an alert processor was assigned to
only for alert store data
an alert and the time until the alert was processed internally and externally.

For each KPI table chart, you can do the following:

● Display the distribution over time and identify trends for a managed object by double-clicking the
corresponding row in the table chart.
● Print the text in the displayed table columns and rows..

 Tip

On the Configuration pane, you can display or hide table columns and specify the information displayed
in the rows.

● Export the data as a spreadsheet file.

Configuring Table Settings

On the Configuration pane, you can configure the KPI table charts displayed on the Details page or on custom
pages with KPI table charts. You can specify settings for the information displayed on the KPI table charts, for
example, you can display or hide table columns and specify the information displayed in the rows.

Personalization
You can personalize SAP Operations Control Center Alert Reporting by adding custom pages that display
selected views. You drag and drop the required views on the screen of the custom page. You can rename, hide,
copy, or delete the newly added pages. By default, a custom page is visible only to the user that has created the
page. To share a custom page, save it as a public custom page.

3.8 Simplified Process Monitoring

With the Simplified Process Monitoring app, you can monitor throughput and backlog key figures and
exceptions in your business processes.

Simplified Process Monitoring provides a simplified and not site-specific presentation of the business
processes. For each process the following views are available:

● Throughput view

Business Process Operations

28 PUBLIC Business Process and Interface Monitoring
● Backlog view
● Exception view

In the configuration screen, you can specify which metrics are displayed in which view for which step or
interface by assigning monitoring objects. You can also assign technical metrics to get information about the
system status.

In the views, you can set filters and switch between several options for displaying information about the
metrics. You can also choose to display not only the last measured values, but aggregated values for the last
hours.

Prerequisites

● You have configured monitoring objects in the Monitoring and Alerting infrastructure.
● You have activated the monitoring by setting up Business Process Monitoring.
● You have configured a scope in the Solution Documentation. For more information, see Scope.

Configuration

1. To open the configuration, choose  Configuration on the landing page.

2. On the Scope tab, select the solution, branch, system role, and the scope that you want to display in the
app.
3. Save your settings.
4. On the Configuration tab, select the business process that you want to display in the app.
5. The process steps and interfaces are displayed in a table.
To select which of the steps or interfaces are displayed in the app, use the toggle switch in the Show
column.
6. To display the metrics of a step or interface, choose the step in the table.
The metrics assigned to the step are displayed in the Metrics table.
7. You can assign the metrics of a step to the different views of the app (Throughput, Backlog, Exception) or
hide specifics metrics:
○ To define in which view of the app a metric assigned to a step will be displayed, in the View column of
the Metrics table, select the view.
○ If you don't want a certain metric displayed in the app, in the View column of the Metrics table, select
Unassign.
8. In addition to Business Process Monitoring metrics, you can also configure other technical metrics that are
assigned to a system in the Monitoring and Alerting Infrastructure to be displayed for specific process
steps.
To display a technical metric for a step, choose the step in the Process Steps table and then, above the
Metrics table, choose Add Technical Metrics.
9. In the Select a Technical Metric dialog, specify the system ID and system type. Then, select the technical
metric.
10. To define in which view of the app the technical metric will be displayed, in the View column of the Metrics
table, select the view.

Business Process Operations

Business Process and Interface Monitoring PUBLIC 29
Overview Page

The landing page displays the alerts for the business processes. To display the alerts for a particular process,
choose the process in the Business Processes section.

To open a view for a process, choose one the following icons:

●  for the Throughput View

●  for the Backlog View
●  for the Exception View

Throughput View, Backlog View, and Exception View

In each view, a simplified flow of the selected business process is displayed. For each step or interface, you can
see the assigned metrics with their current measured value.

You have several filter and display options:

● Filters
To filter the displayed metrics by their rating or to display only technical metrics, choose .
● Display Options
To select a display option, choose .
You can choose to display the metrics by the following:

Monitor Type Display each metric by the name of the monitor for which
you configured the metric.

Monitor Name Display each metric by the name of the monitoring object
that you provided during the monitoring setup.

Key Figures Display each metric by the name of the key figure for
which you configured the metric.

Systems Display each metric by the name of the system and the
key figure for which you configured the metric.

Alerts Display each metric by the name of the system and the
name of the monitoring object that you provided during
the setup. Instead of the measured value the number of
alerts is shown.

● Time Selection
To open the time selection, choose .
In the time selection, you can configure to display not only the last measured values, but aggregated values
for the last hours.

Business Process Operations

30 PUBLIC Business Process and Interface Monitoring
Related Information

Scope

Business Process Operations

Business Process and Interface Monitoring PUBLIC 31
4 Business Process Improvement

Use

Business process improvement enables you to maximize the value of your existing SAP solution. SAP provides
a business process improvement methodology to analyze critical process milestones in a systematic 9-step
approach. Business process improvement comprises the following tools:

● Business Process Analytics

For more information, see Business Process Analytics [page 38].
● Business Process Operations dashboards
For more information, see Business Process Operations Dashboard [page 52].
● BPO reporting infrastructure
For more information, see BPO Reporting Infrastructure [page 78].
● Dependency diagrams
For more information, see Dependency Diagrams [page 69].
● Progress management boards
For more information, see Progress Management Board [page 70].

Prerequisites

For information, see SAP Note 2324106 .

4.1 Business Process Improvement Launchpad Group

Use

This Launchpad group is the central access point to apply and configure business process improvement
functionalities.

Business Process Operations

32 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
Features

The group consists of the following tiles that are displayed depending on authorization:

Tile Description

Applications

Business Process Analytics You can monitor and graphically analyze key performance indicators (KPIs) in a mod­
ernized analytical application.

For more information, see Business Process Analytics [page 34].

Business Process Analytics - You can monitor and graphically analyze key performance indicators (KPIs) in a classic
Classic Web Dynpro application.

For more information, see Business Process Analytics - Classic [page 38].

Dependency Diagrams You can display diagrams to show the dependencies of key performance indicators
(KPIs).

For more information, see Dependency Diagrams [page 69].

Progress Management Board You can track the organizational progress made for key performance indicators (KPIs)
within business process improvement initiatives.

For more information, see Progress Management Board [page 70].

Business Process Operations - You can graphically display and monitor analytical key performance indicators (KPIs) in
Dashboards various panels.

For more information, see Business Process Operations Dashboards [page 52].

KPI Catalog - Business Process You can browse through the list of available key performance indicators (KPIs).
Analytics

Configuration and Settings

Configuration - Virtual You can define virtual characteristics to map them to real characteristics.
Characteristics
For more information, see Defining Virtual Characteristics [page 50].

Business Process Improvement - You can apply various administrator tools such as BP Analytics BW, Data Source Man­
Administration ager, or Master Data.

For more information, see BPO Reporting Infrastructure [page 78].

Configuration - Dependency You can create diagrams to display the dependencies of key performance indicators
Diagrams (KPIs).

For more information, see Dependency Diagrams [page 69].

Business Process Operations

Business Process Improvement PUBLIC 33
Tile Description

Configuration - Business Process You can access the business process improvement configuration of SAP Solution Man­
Operations ager (transaction SOLMAN_SETUP). The system displays the guided procedure to con­
figure your system for business process improvement.

Configuration - Dashboard You can configure and maintain analytical key figure instances, panels, and dashboards.
Business Process Operations
For more information, see BPO Dashboards Setup [page 56].

Solution Documentation - You can access solution documentation to setup data collections as a foundation for
Monitoring Configuration Business Process Analytics as well as analytical key figure instances (AKFIs).

4.2 Business Process Analytics

Use

You can analyze and visualize key performance indicators (KPIs) from the KPI Catalog in this modernized
analytical application. The analysis runs on mobile devices as well as on personal computers.

You can analyze continuously collected data in a Continuous Analysis as well as perform ad-hoc analyses (One-
Time Analysis):

● With Continuous Analysis, you can analyze historical data, for example for a trend analysis. This data is
collected and stored continuously in the BW InfoProviders. For the data collection you must have set up
analytics objects in the Solution Documentation.
● One-Time Analysis is used for an ad hoc analysis, for which the app calls the data collectors of the key
figures online. The analysis is based on current data. Historical data cannot be analyzed.

Prerequisites

● You have defined an instance for the connector BPM_HANA_SUITE in the Business Process Improvement -
Administration app. For more information, see Maintaining a Connector Instance [page 54].
● In the Business Process Improvement - Administration app on the Data Source Manager tab, you have
defined combinations of managed system and client in the connector details of the BPM_HANA_SUITE
connector instance
● You have installed SAP Passport browser certificate for your s-user on your computer. For more
information, see article 1296615 of SAP Knowledge Base.
● To perform continuous analyses, you must have set up the data collection for the analytics objects for the
KPIs in Solution Documentation. For more information, see Setting Up Alerting and Analytics Objects
[page 11].

Business Process Operations

34 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
  Note

Key figures are highly security-critical. To restricts the access to key figures to authorized users, you create
key figure groups, visibility groups, and authorization groups. For more information, see Creating Key
Figure Groups, Visibility Groups, and Authorization Groups [page 36].

Procedure

To start a business process analysis, proceed as follows:

1. On the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, select Business Process Analytics.

2. Select the system-client combination.
3. Choose Select Key Figure to select an SAP standard key figure for Business Process Analytics in the KPI
catalog.
4. Confirm the selection.
5. You can make a one-time analysis or a continuous analysis:
○ For an analysis of continuously collected data, enter a time frame on the Continuous Analysis tab.

 Note

For a Continuous Analysis, the data collection for the analytics objects for the KPIs must be set up
in Solution Documentation.

Select one or several KPI instances, that is, analytics objects that have been set up in the Solution
Documentation, and specify the time frame for the analysis.
○ For an ad-hoc analysis, use the One-Time Analysis tab.
Depending on the KPI, specify mandatory or optional filters on the Continuous Analysis or One-Time
Analysis tab.
6. Choose Execute Analysis.

Depending on the KPI, you can use different analysis tools:

● Benchmarking
The Benchmarking analysis gives you global transparency by comparing organizational units and
document types. You use this analysis to identify organizations and process variants with potential issues,
anomalies, untypical patterns, or unexpected behaviors.
You can set filters on all characteristics that have been configured as Group-By flags for the key figure
instance.
Benchmarking is only available in a Continuous Analysis.
● Advanced Benchmarking
The Advanced Benchmarking analysis allows a more granular benchmark comparison and a deeper root-
cause analysis than Benchmarking.
You can set filters on all characteristics that appear as columns in the details list.
● Age Analysis
The Age Analysis shows the age distribution of the documents in the backlog. You have three display
options:
○ Year: The distribution of backlog documents over all years
○ Month: The distribution of backlog documents over all months

Business Process Operations

Business Process Improvement PUBLIC 35
 ○ Week: The distribution of backlog documents over all weeks
Age Analysis is only available for backlog key figures with a date field in their detail list.
● Trend Analysis
The Trend Analysis provides an overview how the values of a key figure have evolved over time. With Trend
Analysis, you can do the following:
○ Identify increasing trends to be able to react proactively.
○ Track the progress that you have made with your improvement activities:
Improvement activities for cleaning up the backlog, or for optimizing the processes can improve the
trend of the measured values significantly.
Trend Analysis is only available in a Continuous Analysis.
● Detail List
The Detail List shows the full result of the data collection down to the document level.
● Pattern Recognition
The automatic Pattern Recognition simplifies the analysis of large result lists by finding patterns, that
means significant amounts in combinations of organizational units and document types, in the result data.
The Pattern Recognition is based on the following filter selections:
○ Threshold:
Only those patterns are displayed where the measured value ratio of the respective characteristic
value combinations to the overall key figure exceeds the defined threshold value.
○ Number of Characteristics:
You can specify a maximum number of different filter characteristics from Business Process Analytics
for the pattern analysis. Reducing the number of characteristics can improve the performance but
reduces the number of possible pattern results.
The results of the automatic pattern recognition are grouped by the number of combined
characteristics. For each recognized pattern, you can expand the characteristics.
● Process Progress
This tool visualizes the business process progress for process progress KPIs. The chart shows how many
documents have reached which milestone in the business process and the status of the documents.

You can switch between the available analysis tools as well as between document and monetary values.

Related Information

KPI Catalog
Creating Key Figure Groups, Visibility Groups, and Authorization Groups [page 36]

4.2.1 Creating Key Figure Groups, Visibility Groups, and

Authorization Groups

To ensure that critical data can only be seen and accessed by authorized users in the Business Process
Analytics app, you must define user-specific authorizations for the key figures displayed in the app. To do this,
you create key figure groups, visibility groups, and authorization groups and then add these groups to the
authorization object SM_BPA_KYF of the users who should receive these authorizations.

Business Process Operations

36 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
Key Figure Groups
With key figure groups, you define which key figures and application areas are visible to the users. For example,
you can create a key figure group for sales KPIs.

To give administrators access to all key figures, you can use the SAP default group for all key figures.

Visibility Groups
With visibility groups, you define which characteristics of key figures are visible to the users. For example, you
can define if monetary values are visible to the users.

To give administrators access to all characteristics, you can use the SAP default group for all characteristics.

Authorization Groups
With authorization groups, you define which specific filter values of key figure characteristics are visible to the
users. For example, you can specify which currency units are visible.

To give administrators access to all values, you can use the SAP default group for all values.

Creating Groups
To create new key figure groups, visibility groups, and authorization groups, proceed as follows:

1. In the Business Process Improvement - Administration app (BPO Reporting Infrastructure Maintenance),
navigate to the Authorizations tab to open the Authorization Settings.
2. In the Authorization Settings, choose the type of group that you want to create:
○ Key Figure Groups
○ Visibility Groups
○ Authorization Groups
3. Choose Create.
4. Enter a name and description for the group.

Configuring Groups
To configure the groups, proceed as follows:

1. In the Authorization Settings, choose the type of group that you want to configure:
○ Key Figure Groups
○ Visibility Groups
○ Authorization Groups
2. Choose the group that you want to configure.
3. Choose Edit.

To configure key figure groups, specify which key figures or application areas should be included or excluded in
the group.

To configure visibility groups, include or exclude the semantic IDs of the characteristics.

To configure authorization groups select first the semantic IDs of the characteristics and then specify for each
characteristic which values should included or excluded.

Assigning Groups to Users

To assign the groups to users, you add them to the users' instance of the SAP authorization object
SM_BPA_KYF. You use the following fields in the authorization object:

Business Process Operations

Business Process Improvement PUBLIC 37
● KEYFGRPS for key figure groups
● VISIGRPS for visibility groups
● AUTHGRPS for authorization groups

For more information about defining roles and specifying authorization objects for Business Process Analytics
see the Application-Specific Security Guide at https://help.sap.com/viewer/p/SAP_Solution_Manager.

4.3 Business Process Analytics - Classic

Use

Business Process Analytics - Classic enables you to monitor and graphically analyze throughput, lead time,
automation rate, exception, and backlog key figures. These key figures give an overall picture of business
process operations in all systems that are required to run your core business processes. You can do the
following:

● Identify and localize current operational problems

● Optimize business processes

For more information about typical use cases, see SAP Note 1430754 .

Features

Authorization concept

Business Process Analytics - Classic allows the user to drill down to personal data such as the creator of sales
orders. A three-tier authorization concept allows you to ensure that personal or other critical data can only be
accessed by users authorized to do so:

● As a configuration user, you create analysis variants according to the business requirements of specific
users (display information about certain organizational units and/or personal data, for example).
● As a user, you perform the analysis variants that you are authorized for by the configuration user.
● As an administrator, to define configuration users and users according to the requirements of your
company, you do the following:
○ Assign the respective user roles to users
○ Assign authorization objects for solutions or application areas, for example

 Example

If you have specific solutions for the regions APAC, EMEA and so on, to define a configuration user for a
region, you assign the respective authorization object to the user.

Analyses

The configuration user sets up the relevant alerting and analytics objects, specifies the time frame, the
solution, the system, the alerting or analytics object, and the key figure of an analysis. Business Process

Business Process Operations

38 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
Analytics then allows the user to display various analytical views of the data, depending on the analysis variant
the user is authorized to use:

● Benchmarking: In a bar diagram, you can, for example, display how overdue outbound deliveries are
distributed to various shipping points or to delivery types. In this way you, can identify the physical location
of a problem or find out if the issue is related to a specific delivery type.
● Advanced Benchmarking: To analyze the root cause of a problem, you can use additional characteristics
contained in the detail list. For example, you can identify the creation date or the creator of incomplete
sales orders.
● Trend Analysis: In a line diagram, you can, for example, display how overdue outbound deliveries develop
over the specified time frame at various shipping points. In this way you can find out whether a problem
occurred suddenly or whether it developed over time, and since when the problem exists.
● Age Analysis: You can analyze, for example, how the backlog of overdue outbound deliveries is distributed
across several years or months, and you can identify outdated documents. This helps to decide whether
the root cause of the backlog is outdated data or operational bottlenecks. If outdated documents cause
the backlog, you could revise and archive the data.
● Detail Analysis: You can identify the root cause of measured backlogs by examining items in backlog. To
perform an analysis of these items, you navigate directly to the managed system.

 Note

Age analysis is only available for backlog key figures, not for throughput key figures.

Activities

1. Assigning Roles and Authorizations As an Administrator [page 41]

2. Setting Up Alerting and Analytics Objects [page 11]
3. Creating an Analysis Variant as a Configuration User [page 42]
4. Performing an Analysis as a User [page 48]
5. Maintaining Variant Categories [page 51]

See Business Process Analytics [page 34] to evaluate additional key figures in the ad hoc analysis.

4.3.1 SAP Business Process Analytics for SAP HANA

SAP HANA can be integrated with SAP Business Process Analytics in several scenarios. As SAP HANA provides
direct access to the data, some settings are omitted because they are not necessary in these scenarios.

Prerequisites

● You have configured SAP Gateway in SAP Solution Manager.

● You have defined an instance for the connector BPM_HANA_SUITE.

Business Process Operations

Business Process Improvement PUBLIC 39
● You have access to ad hoc business process analytics via business process improvement on the SAP
Solution Manager launchpad.
● For more information, see SAP Note 2105720 .

 Note

It is not possible to navigate from a detail list item to a business transaction for further analysis.

 Note

The dialog mode in which the key figure data collection is executed limits the runtime of the managed
system.

Business Process Analytics for SAP ERP on HANA

In this scenario, the data is collected on demand from an SAP HANA database.

To start Business Process Analytics for SAP ERP on HANA, add the ?platform=HANA_SUITE parameter to
the URL in the browser's address bar of the SAP Business Process Analytis - Classic screen.

This scenario differs from the standard scenario as follows:

● In the Available Key Figures tab page, you only have to set the system / client and key figure.
● In the analysis screen, a selection of HANA-optimized key figures is available, in detail, the Advanced
Benchmarking and Age Analysis analysis types, as well as Detail Analysis.

4.3.2 SAP Business Process Analytics for Cross-Database

Comparison

Use

You can integrate cross-database comparison with SAP Business Process Analytics. You can analyze
comparison results for comparison objects and instances.

Prerequisites

You have set up the Web Dynpro application AGS_AI_START for cross-database comparison analytics by
defining a favorite for this application with parameter name platform and value CDC.

Business Process Operations

40 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
Features

The analytics provide various drill-down and filter options for comparison results:

● You can drill down to, or set a filter value for, comparison object-specific context fields. For each object,
only the available context fields can be selected.
● You can define which type of inconsistency you want to analyze, for example, “entry exists in system 1
only”, or “entry identical”. The inconsistency type can be set as a category, as a filter value, or it can be
drilled down to.
● The comparison instance is available for category, drill-down and filter. If no filter is set on a comparison
instance, the results from all comparison instances of the comparison object are aggregated.

Activities

1. Start the Web Dynpro application for cross-database comparison analytics.

2. Select a timeframe.
3. The system displays comparison runs containing results for this time frame.
4. Select a comparison run and start the analysis.
5. You can restrict the display by comparison instances and objects. Depending on the selection, you have
various filter and drill-down options, and you can choose the inconsistency type you want to analyze.

4.3.3 Assigning Roles and Authorizations As an

Administrator

Use

As an administrator, you define configuration users and users according to the requirements of your company.
In this way you ensure that personal or other critical data can only be accessed by users authorized to do so.
You proceed as follows:

● You assign the respective user roles to users

● You assign authorizations objects for, for example, solutions, application areas, or categories of analysis
variants.

 Example

If you have specific solutions for the regions APAC, EMEA and so on, to define a configuration user for a
region, you assign the respective authorization object to the user.

Business Process Operations

Business Process Improvement PUBLIC 41
Procedure

In transaction PFCG, do the following:

● To define user types, you assign the following roles:

○ Configuration user
○ User who performs an analysis variant
● To define the functions a user is authorized to use, specify the following authorization objects:
○ Analytics variant
○ Analytics category:
○ Analytics Detail: Data a user is authorized to display in an analysis:
○ System and client
○ Business Process Monitoring application area (ERP_SD, for example)
○ Key figures
○ Analytics functions (Benchmarking, Adavnced Benchmarking, for example).

For more information about defining roles and specifying authorization objects for Business Process Analytics
see the Application-Specific Security Guide on at https://help.sap.com/viewer/p/SAP_Solution_Manager.

4.3.4 Creating an Analysis Variant As a Configuration User

Prerequisites

● You have identified the alerting or analytics objects and key figures that describe the process you want to
monitor and analyze.
For more information about available alerting or analytics objects and related key figures, see the SCN wiki
page for Business Process Improvement at https://wiki.scn.sap.com/wiki/x/Y4DSFw Links and
further Information KPI Catalog .

 Note

In the KPI catalog, you can filter out KPI Providers, e.g. Business Process Analytics.

● You have set up the alerting and analytics objects for your analysis. For more information, see: Setting Up
Alerting and Analytics Objects [page 11] and SAP Note 1430754 .
● You have authorization to configure analysis variants. For more information, see Assigning Roles and
Authorizations as an Administrator [page 41].
● To perform a detailed analysis and identify the root cause of operational problems, you can navigate to the
display transaction for sampling single documents (a sales order, for example). You must have display
authorization for the managed system.

Business Process Operations

42 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
Context

To allow users to identify current problems or optimize a business process, you create an analysis variant
according to the business requirements of the user.

Procedure

1. From the launchpad, choose Business Process Operations . Then choose Business Process Analytics.
2. Define the time frame of your analysis.
○ Use the default time frame (one week) to identify current problems.
○ Extend the time frame to perform long-term trend analyses to recognize historical patterns and
identify optimization possibilities.

 Recommendation

Extended time frames can affect the display of trend diagrams. The time scale of trend diagrams is
divided into days as the biggest unit.

Restrict the time frame for trend analyses to not more than two months to avoid performance issues.

1. Under Time Frame Selection, define the time frame of your analysis.
2. Choose Apply Time Frame.
The system displays all solutions for which data is available.
3. Under Filters for Key Figures Selection, specify the key figure context of your analysis:
1. Under Solution, select one or multiple solutions.

 Note

You can combine data from several solutions. For example, you have created separate solutions for
regions such as EMEA, APAC.

The alerting and analytics objects and systems assigned to the solution are displayed.
2. Under Monitoring ID, select the alerting or analytics object.
The key figures you have set up are displayed.
3. Select the system and client.
4. Select the key figure you wish to analyze.
4. Choose the Start analysis for the selected Key Figure pushbutton.

You go to the Benchmarking and Analysis screen.

5. In the Analysis Type field, select the type of view of the data, for example Benchmarking, Advanced
Benchmarking, Trend Analysis or Age Analysis.

For more information about the available features and their use, see Business Process Analytics [page 38].

The characteristics available for the key figure are displayed.

6. Specify the data to be displayed. For more information, see Defining Filter Criteria [page 44].
7. To generate a chart, choose Update.

Business Process Operations

Business Process Improvement PUBLIC 43
8. To save the filter criteria defined for the key figure, do the following:
1. Choose Save Variant.
A dialog box appears.
2. Enter a name and a description of the variant. To ensure that the analysis variant is correctly assigned
to the respective users, describe which data can be displayed with the analysis variant. If, for example,
personal data can be displayed in an advanced benchmarking analysis variant, enter this information.
3. Optional: Assign a variant category.
If you have not created a variant category yet, you can do so later and assign it to the analysis variant.
For more information, see Maintaining Variant Categories [page 51].
4. Save your entries.
9. Assign the analysis variant to a user. For more information, see Assigning Roles and Authorizations As an
Administrator [page 41].

Results

The users can display all analysis variants whose variant names and variant categories are assigned to their
respective users. For more information about analysis options, see Performing an Analysis [page 48].

4.3.4.1 Defining Filter Criteria

Procedure

1. Expand the Filter screen area.

2. Under Available Characteristics, select one or more characteristics which you want to use as a category
characteristic or as a drilldown characteristic, and choose Add to Filter.

Under Active Filter Characteristics, the values of the respective characteristics are displayed.
3. Under Active Filter Characteristics, select the values which you want to use as filter criteria.

 Example

If the characteristic is the shipping point, you can select 0002 - Shipping Point Paris and 0004 -
Shipping Point Marseille and perform a trend analysis based on those two shipping points only.

 Caution

As the configuration user, you have to select the filter criteria according to the business requirements
of the end user. Ensure, for example, that personal data is accessible only to authorized users.

4. In the Category Dimension field, select the characteristic you want to use as the category characteristic.
5. Optional: Depending on the setup, you can select a drilldown dimension in the Drilldown Dimension field.

Business Process Operations

44 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
 For more information, see Setting Up Alerting and Analytics Objects [page 11].

 Note

Drilldown dimensions are not supported for the Age Analysis.

4.3.4.2 Setting Filters

Use

You can restrict the data displayed for specific users by setting filters for analysis variants. You can set multiple
filters for an analysis variant.

Procedure

1. On the launchpad, choose Business Process Operations. Then choose Business Process Analytics.
2. On the Key Figure Variants tab, choose Manage Variant Categories and Variants.
3. On the Variant Maintenance tab, select a variant.
4. In the Filter Characteristic screen area, choose the Add Filter Element button.
5. Enter the filter characteristic which you want to filter. There are the following filter characteristic types:
○ Time characteristic, for example, Calendar day or Calendar week.
○ System characteristics, for example, System ID or Monitoring ID.
○ Analytical key figure specific characteristics, for example, sales organization. Which characteristics are
available depends on the selected key figure.
6. Select a filter type. The following filter types are available:
○ Regular filter
○ Relative filter
○ Runtime user
○ Filter for Top N characteristic values
7. Save your entries.

 Note

You can define more than one filter for a variant, but you can only use one time characteristics filter per
variant.

Regular Filter

A regular filter filters certain values of a filter characteristic directly. Regular filters can be used with all filter
characteristics.

Typical use case: You want to display data for a single sales organization only.

1. Select the filter characteristics and the Regular Filter filter type.

Business Process Operations

Business Process Improvement PUBLIC 45
2. To define a select option, enter the following data:
○ Sign (mandatory): I (Include) or E (Exclude)

 Note

For time characteristics, only I (Include) is supported.

○ Option (mandatory): EQ (Equal), BT (Between), CP (Contains Pattern)

 Note

For time characteristics, only BT (Between) is supported.

○ Low (mandatory): Enter a characteristic value you want to exclude or include in the filter.
○ If you have selected BT (Between): High (optional): If you want to exclude or include a range of
characteristic values, enter values for Low and High
3. To define more select options, choose Add and repeat steps 1 to 3.
4. Save your entries by choosing the Save Filter button.

Relative Filter

Using a relative filter, you can filter dynamically. Relative filters can only be used for time characteristics.

Typical use case: You want to display data for the last ten days.

1. Select the filter characteristics and the Relative Filter filter type.
2. To define a select option, enter the following data:
○ Sign (mandatory): I (Include)

 Note

Even though exclude can be selected, it is not supported.

○ Option (mandatory): BT (Between)

○ Low (mandatory): Enter the lowest value of a relative range.
○ High (mandatory): Enter the highest value of a relative range.
3. Save your entries by choosing the Save Filter button.

Filter for Top N Characteristic Values

With the filter for top n characteristic values, you can filter for only the highest values of the selected filter
characteristic. The top n filter cannot be used with time characteristics.

1. Select the Filter for Top N Characteristic Values filter type.

2. Define the select options.
3. Save your entries by choosing the Save Filter button.

 Note

The filters are used during data collection in the order in which they were defined. When using the filter for
top n characteristic values in combination with other filters, set the filter for top n characteristic values as
the last filter. Otherwise, data collection runtime is longer and performance is reduced.

Filter Overview

1. After saving a filter, the filter appears in the Analytical Key Figure Details screen in the Filter Characteristic
screen area.

Business Process Operations

46 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
2. To display the select options for a filter in the Select Options screen area, select a filter.
3. To delete a filter, select it and choose Remove Filter Element.
4. To add a new filter, choose Add Filter Element.

 Note

You can maintain more than one filter for one variant, but you can use only one on time characteristics
filter per variant.

5. To change the sequence of the filter elements, select a filter and choose the up or down button.

Best Practice for Filters

Set filters as specifically as possible. When you set a filter (for example, on solution and monitoring ID), you
restrict the amount of data to be evaluated. This improves the performance, so the data is displayed faster.

 Note

Filtering is especially important when using the detail list connector. The detail list connector is used
implicit for analysis types Age Analysis and Advanced Benchmarking. The detail list connector only works if
a filter is set to only a single detail list. Otherwise, an error occurs. A detail list is uniquely identified by
system, client, solution, and monitoring ID. It is sufficient to set a filter on a monitoring ID.

4.3.5 Automatic Pattern Analysis

You can use the automatic pattern analysis to detect characteristic value combinations in the data source to be
analyzed.

 Note

The automatic pattern analysis only works for backlog key figures.

This allows a quick start or can help occasional users in the analysis process.

In the automatic pattern analysis, you can do the following:

● Define thresholds for characteristic value combinations.

Increasing this value might lead to performance improvement but reduces the number of possible pattern
results.
● Define the maximum number of characteristics to be analyzed.
Reducing the maximum number of characteristics might lead to performance improvements but reduces
the number of possible pattern results.

The results of the automatic pattern analysis are grouped by the number of combined characteristics.

The results of the automatic pattern analysis are based on the selected data source (which is being defined by
the selected analysis type) and the filter characteristics applied.

Business Process Operations

Business Process Improvement PUBLIC 47
4.3.5.1 Performing an Automatic Pattern Analysis

Procedure

1.  Note

The automatic pattern analysis only works for backlog key figures.

On the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, select Business Process Analytics - Classic.

A new window opens up.

2. On the Business Process Analytics - Analysis Selection screen, choose a time frame and then click Apply
Timeframe.
If the system has identified backlog key figures, proceed as follows:
3. Under Key Figures for Selection, click on a Key Figure Name.

A new window opens up.

4. On the Business Process Analytics - Benchmarking and Analysis screen, select an Analysis Type.

If you select Analysis Type Advanced Benchmarking, the analysis will run on the detail list.

If you select Analysis Type Benchmarking, the analysis will run on the cube data.
5. On the Business Process Analytics - Benchmarking and Analysis screen, click Automatic Pattern Analysis.
6. In the new Automatic Pattern Analysis window, choose a threshold for characteristic value combinations
and a ranking for the maximum number of characteristics to be analyzed.
7. Click Start Analysis.

4.3.6 Performing an Analysis

Prerequisites

● The authorization to perform a certain analysis variant has been assigned to your user. For more
information, see Assigning Roles and Authorizations As an Administrator [page 41].
● To perform a detailed analysis and identify the root cause of operational problems, you can navigate to the
display transaction for sampling single documents (a sales order, for example). You must have display
authorization for the managed system.

Business Process Operations

48 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
Context

Performing an analysis enables you to identify current problems or optimize a business process. Depending on
the setup, you have the following options:

● If backlog or throughput key figures were set up, the following diagrams are generated:
○ Benchmarking/Advanced Benchmarking:
○ If the key figure is a backlog key figure, the most recent measurement in the selected time frame is
used for benchmarking.
○ If the key figure is a throughput key figure, the measurements in the selected time frame are
aggregated.
○ Trend Analysis: You can see how the measured value for a key figure has developed in the selected time
frame. There is no difference in behavior between backlog and throughput key figures.
● If backlog key figures were set up, the following functions are available:
○ Age Analysis: The diagram allows you to determine in which year or month the documents in the
backlog were created.
You can also see the distribution across the values of the primary dimension. If you have, for example,
selected the shipping point as the primary dimension, the distribution across years and shipping
points is displayed. You can decide whether the backlog indicates one of the following:
○ An operational issue
○ A potential for archiving data
○ Detail Analysis: A sample document can be displayed in the respective business transaction. You can
check why the document is in the backlog.

Procedure

1. On the launchpad, choose Business Process Operations. Then choose Business Process Analytics -
Classics.
2. On the Key Figure Variants tab, select the analysis variant.
3. Choose Launch Selected Variants.

The chart is displayed.

4. Optional: Specify the data to be displayed. For more information, see Defining Filter Criteria [page 44].
5. Select a characteristic for the Category Dimension.
6. To generate a chart according to the selected filter criteria, choose Update.
7. Optional: If you analyze backlog key figures, you can sample the documents in backlog:
1. To log on to the managed system, choose the Detail Analysis pushbutton.
2. From the list of documents in the backlog, select a document that you want to sample.
The document is displayed in the respective business transaction.
3. Check why the document is in the backlog.

Business Process Operations

Business Process Improvement PUBLIC 49
4.3.7 Defining Virtual Characteristics

Context

You can define virtual characteristics to map them to real characteristics.

For example, you can map customer-specific organizational units (region, line of business, etc.) to
organizational units in the SAP systems. You can analyze key figures based on customer-specific organizational
units, which do not have a one-to-one relationship to the organizational units in an SAP system. You can see a
virtual characteristic as a container that groups real characteristics.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, choose Configuration - Virtual Characteristics.

2. To define a virtual characteristic in guided procedure step 1 (Create Virtual Characteristics and Values),
proceed as follows:

1. Select Append Row.

2. Create a new virtual characteristic.

 Note

The prefix ZVIRT_CHARSTIC_ will be filled automatically.

3. Enter the virtual characteristic descriptions in the required languages by clicking Add language.
4. Define virtual characteristic values (and their descriptions) for each virtual characteristic.
3. To map the values of the virtual characteristics to real values in guided procedure step 2 (Map Virtual
Characteristic Values to Real Values), proceed as follows:
1. Select a virtual characteristic and a value, and select a semantic ID from the input help.
2. Enter real values for the semantic ID.

 Example

Virtual Characteristic Virtual Characteristic Values

ZVIRT_CHARSTIC_REGION Region FRANCE France

Virtual Characteristic Value Mapping

Semantic ID Values

ERP_BUKRS Sign: I, Option: EQ, Low: 3000

Business Process Operations

50 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
 Semantic ID Values

Sign: I, Option: EQ, Low: 6000

ERP_VKORG Sign: I, Option: CP, Low: AND*

Sign: I, Option: CP, Low: FR*

You can download a list of selected values by clicking  (Download to Excel).

You can upload CSV files by clicking  (Upload .csv file).

4. To add the virtual characteristics to the analytical key figures in guided procedure step 3 (Add Virtual
Characteristics to AKFs), proceed as follows:

1. Select the analytical key figure and the virtual characteristic from the input help.
2. Save your entries.

You can download a list of characteristics and values by clicking  (Download to Excel).

4.4 Maintaining Variant Categories

Context

Defining variant categories allows you to ensure that personal or other critical data can only be accessed by
users authorized to do so. To do so, you can assign analysis variants to variant categories and then allow
certain users to display only analysis variants of certain variant categories.

For more information about authorizations, see Assigning Roles and Authorizations As an Administrator [page
41].

Procedure

1. On the launchpad, choose Business Process Analytics - Classic.

2. On the Key Figure Variants tab, choose the Manage Variant Categories and Variants link.
3. Enter a name and a description.
4. Choose Create.
5. To assign an analysis variant to a variant category, do the following:
1. On the Variant Assignment tab, select a variant category.
2. Under Available Variants, select the analysis variant you want to assign to the variant category.

Business Process Operations

Business Process Improvement PUBLIC 51
 3. Choose Add.
The variant is displayed under Assigned Variants.

4.5 Business Process Operations Dashboards

Use

In the Business Process Operations dashboards (BPO dashboards), end users can graphically display and
monitor analytical key figures, such as throughput or backlog figures, in various panels. This gives the end
users an overview of the status of business processes to identify current operational problems.

The panels can contain various types of charts. Users can, for example, display a trend over the previous two
weeks or display a currently measured value.

Mainly the following end users use BPO dashboards:

● The business process expert maintains an overview of the business processes for which the business
process expert is responsible (for example, order processing or procurement).
● The key user of a business process monitors critical key figures of the subprocesses. For example, the
warehouse manager of a subsidiary monitors different possible backlog situations for business documents
of the warehouse (for example, deliveries, goods movements, or transport orders).
● The application support expert monitors technical and business key figures. To identify technical
irregularities, the application support expert compares, for example, the number of incoming orders and
the number of backlog deliveries in all locations.

The BPO dashboards administrator and the business process expert together identify the end user’s
information requirements, set up the BPO dashboards, and assign them to groups of end users according to
their areas of responsibility.

Activities

The various roles do the following:

1. The business process expert specifies the information requirements of various groups of end users.
2. The dashboard administrator:
○ Identifies, with the business process expert, the analytical key figures to be displayed in the
dashboards.
○ Defines the data sources for the analytical key figures. If the data sources are not yet available, makes
the configurations and settings for the data sources, so they are available to be used for the BPO
dashboards.
For more information, see Define Data Sources [page 87].
○ Sets up the BPO dashboards including creating connector instances, analytical key figure instances
(AKFI), panels, and dashboards. For more information, see BPO Dashboards Setup [page 56].
○ Provides authorizations to users (other dashboard configuration users and dashboard end users).For
more information, see Roles and Authorizations [page 66].

Business Process Operations

52 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
 ○ Makes the dashboards known to the end users.
3. The end users (including business process experts, key users of a business process, application support
experts) display the dashboards that are assigned to their user groups. For more information, see Working
with BPO Dashboards as End User [page 67].

For more information about the BPO dashboards, installation details, and examples, see SAP Note 1819313 :
Additional Information for BPO Dashboards.

4.5.1 Technical Prerequisites

The following prerequisites must be met for the BPO dashboards on SAP Solution Manager 7.2 SP06 and
higher:

● Implement Software Plug-ins and SAP Notes [page 53]

● Activate Services [page 54]
● Assign Authorizations to Users [page 54]

4.5.1.1 Implement Software Plug-Ins and SAP Notes

For BPO dashboards on SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SP05 and higher and on SAP Solution Manager 7.2 SP03 and
higher, do the following:

1. Implement the collective SAP Note for the support package level of your SAP Solution Manager:
○ SAP Note 1759233 : BPO Dashboards and SAP Business Process Analytics on SAP Solution
Manager 7.1 SP05 - 7.1 SP15
○ SAP Note 2324106 : BPO Dashboards and SAP Business Process Analytics on SAP Solution
Manager 7.2 SP03 or higher
2. Implement the latest versions of the following software components on the managed systems:
○ ST-A/PI
○ ST-PI
3. Implement the collective SAP Notes for the software components ST-A/PI and ST-PI.
They can be found in
○ SAP Note 1759233 : BPO Dashboards and SAP Business Process Analytics on SAP Solution
Manager 7.1 SP05 - 7.1 SP15 and
○ SAP Note 2324106 : BPO Dashboards and SAP Business Process Analytics on SAP Solution
Manager 7.2 SP03 or higher
.

Business Process Operations

Business Process Improvement PUBLIC 53
4.5.1.2 Activate Services

Context

The Business Process Operations dashboard is designed as a Web Dynpro component, therefore the
corresponding HTTP services have to be activated.

Procedure

1. In SAP Solution Manager, call the client-independent SICF transaction. Select the Service hierarchy type
and choose Execute.
2. Navigate to /default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap.
3. Activate all entries starting with ags_ri and ags_bpm, except ags_bpm_eval_time_schd and
ags_bpm_jsm_migration_tst.
4. To activate an entry, in the context menu, select Activate Service.

4.5.1.3 Assign Authorizations to Users

BPO dashboards include an elaborate authorization concept to guarantee well-controlled access to business-
sensitive data.

Therefore, the users (administrators and end users) of Business Process Operations dashboards need the
correct authorizations assigned in their user master record.

For more information, see Roles and Authorizations [page 66].

4.5.1.4 Maintaining a Connector Instance

Use

The data displayed on the business process operations dashboards is read from data sources.

The logical link between the business process operations dashboards infrastructure and a data source is
established by a connector. The connector is instantiated once before usage for a connector type and the
associated data source, by creating a connector instance. Later, during the configuration of business process
operations dashboards, analytical key figure instances are assigned to the connector instance to get their data
from the associated data source. Thus, for every data source that business process operations dashboards
use, there must be at least one active connector instance.

Business Process Operations

54 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
The following SAP Solution Manager applications can provide data for business process operations
dashboards:

● Business process analytics uses the following data sources:

○ SAP Business Explorer BW query
○ Detail list

● Business Process Monitoring uses the following data sources:

○ Monitoring and alerting infrastructure
○ Detail list

 Note

To display business process monitoring information, business process operations dashboards have to be
manually configured in the Dashboard Builder.

For more information about data sources, see Define Data Sources [page 87].

Procedure

To define the connector instances in the connector directory:

● To navigate to the data source manager, on the launchpad, choose Business Process Improvement -
Administration. The BPO Reporting Infrastructure Maintenance screen appears.
● On the Data Source Manager tab, you can add, change, activate, or deactivate a connector instance.
○ To create or change a connector instance, choose the corresponding connector in the upper part of the
screen, and choose the connector instance in the table below.
○ To add, change, activate or deactivate a connector instance, choose Change Mode.

The system creates the following connector instances:

● BPM_TwinCube_default for the Analytics TwinCubes connector (BPM_TwinCube)

● Analytics_DL_default for the detail list connector (BPM_Detail_List)

To activate the connector instances for use by business process operations dashboards:

1. Choose Change Mode, and in the Applications field, enter the additional entry DASHBOARD.
2. Choose (De)Activate and save your entries.

If the system does not automatically create the connector instance associated with the data source for the
business process operations dashboards, create the connector instance manually, as follows:

1. Choose Add.
2. For the new connector instance, enter the following information:
○ Name: technical name of the connector instance
○ Description: description of the connector instances
○ RFC Destination: RFC connection to SAP Solution Manager from which data is extracted for the
analytical key figures in business process operations dashboards. The only possible entry for this field
is NONE, because a remote scenario (extracting data from a remote SAP Solution Manager) is not
supported for the business process operations dashboards.
○ System: description of the SAP Solution Manager system from which the data is extracted via RFC
destination, with this connector instance. Enter the local SAP Solution Manager system.

Business Process Operations

Business Process Improvement PUBLIC 55
 ○ Applications: Enter the applications that use the connector instance:
To use the connector instance for dashboards, choose DASHBOARD. This entry is required for business
process operations dashboards.
To use the connector instance for analytics, choose ANALYTICS. This entry is required if you also want
to use this connector instance for the business process analytics data source (recommended).
○ Managed Systems (optional): To limit the retrieval of data on certain managed systems or clients, enter
the SID and client of the managed system. If no system or client is entered, data from all systems is
used.
3. Save your entries and activate the connector instance.
4. Change to display mode.

 Note

If you have created or changed a connector instance, refresh the browser window so that the changes take
effect, before you create analytical key figures.

 Note

Make sure that there is only one active connector instance per data source (connector). To avoid having
more than one active connector instance, create only one connector instance per data source.

For more information about how to configure and edit connector instances, see SAP Note 1819313 .

4.5.2 BPO Dashboards Setup

Prerequisites

The technical prerequisites are given.

● You have identified which information you want to visualize in BPO dashboards.
● You are authorized to access Business Processes Operations.
○ SAP standard roles: SAP_SMWORK_BASIC and SAP_SMWORK_BPM
○ Main authorization object: D_SOL_VSBL – Solution Manager – Visibility of Solutions
For more information, see the Application-Specific Security Guide at https://help.sap.com/viewer/p/
SAP_Solution_Manager.
● You are authorized to access Configuration - Dashboards Business Process Operations .

For more information about the administrator authorizations to access the Manage BPO Dashboards view, see
Roles and Authorizations [page 66].

Business Process Operations

56 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
Context

The administrator is responsible for configuring and maintaining connector instances, analytical key figure
instances (AKFIs), panels and dashboards.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, choose Configuration - Dashboards Business Process Operations.
2. Perform the following activities:
○ Create Analytical Key Figure Instances [page 57]
○ Set Filter [page 59]
○ Set Rating [page 63]
○ Set Up Panel [page 64]
○ Set Up Dashboard [page 65]

4.5.2.1 Creating Analytical Key Figure Instances

Use

An analytical key figure can be seen as a program for BPO dashboards to retrieve data from a specific data
source type (connector) and a specific kind of data (key figure). Hence, an analytical key figure consists of a
connector name and a key figure name in the following format: <technical name of
connector>.<Technical name of key figure>

 Example

“BPM_ACube.KPLE000110”

● “BPM_ACube”: Connector for BW InfoCube of the Business Process Analytics application

● “KPLE000110”: Technical name of SAP standard key figure Outbound Deliveries (overdue)

The typical use case for BPO dashboards is to display the results for business-oriented key figures. In addition,
various rather technical key figures are possible, for example, for interface monitoring or system monitoring.

If you are already running SAP Business Process Monitoring or SAP Business Process Analytics on your SAP
Solution Manager, and you want to display the results of their data collectors (meanwhile over 800 delivered by
SAP), you can use, for example, the following data collector types:

● Backlog key figures: For example, number of overdue outbound deliveries

● Throughput key figures: For example, number of outbound deliveries created.
● Lead time key figures: For example, Lead Time: From Outbound Delivery creation -> Post Goods Issue
(prev.day) [in days]

These key figures can provide data with several collector-specific characteristics (for example, plant, shipping
point, delivery type, sales organization) and time-related characteristics (for example, calendar day, calendar
week).

Business Process Operations

Business Process Improvement PUBLIC 57
To define which data is retrieved and how the data is displayed, you create an analytical key figure instance
(AKFI). To do this, specify the following:

● What kind of data is displayed, for example number of overdue outbound deliveries: Assign the analytical
key figure.
● From which data source the data is retrieved, for example a table or BW InfoCube located on a certain
system and client: Assign the connector instance that is associated to the data source.
● How the data is displayed, for example, which parameters are on the x-axis and the y-axis: Select the
characteristics for category and drilldown.
● What kind of data is considered, for example, for which sales organizations the overdue outbound
deliveries are displayed: Restrict the displayed data by setting filters on characteristics values.

 Note

How an analytical key figure instance (AKFI) is displayed in the BPO dashboards also depends on the chart
type you selected when you configured the panel.

 Note

An analytical key figure instance can be reused in several panels.

Prerequisites

The required connector instances are created.

Procedure

To create an analytical key figure instance, proceed as follows:

1. On the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, choose Configuration - Dashboards Business Process Operations.
The Setup BPO Dashboards Web Dynpro application screen appears.
2. Choose Setup Analytical Key Figure Instance.
3. Choose Add.
The New Analytical Key Figure Instance screen is active.
4. Enter a technical name.
5. Enter a description. You use the description in the panel configuration.
6. In the Analytical Key Figure Repository Name field, select the analytical key figure from the repository.

 Note

If the key figure exists in different data sources that are connected via different connector instances,
there is more than one entry for the analytical key figure. To find the key figure associated with the
correct data source, see the prefix of the technical name.

7. To select the connector instance, use the value help.

8. Choose a characteristic for category, and optionally, a characteristic for drilldown.

Business Process Operations

58 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
 Which options are available depends on the chart type of the panel.

You can set filters for the AKFI. For more information, see Setting a Filter [page 59].

You can set a rating for the AKFI. For more information, set Setting a Rating [page 63].

For more information about how to create analytical key figure instances, see SAP Note 1819313 : Additional
Information for BPO Dashboards.

4.5.2.1.1 Setting Filters

Use

The data displayed in BPO dashboards can be restricted by filtering on analytical key figure instances. You can
set multiple filters for an AKFI.

Procedure

To set up a filter:

1. To open the Setup BPO Dashboards screen, on the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, choose Configuration
- Dashboards Business Process Operations.
2. In Setup BPO Dashboards, on the Setup Analytical Key figure Instance tab, select an analytical key figure
instance, and choose Change.
3. In the Filter Characteristic screen area, choose Add Filter Element.
4. Enter the filter characteristic for which you want to set a filter.
There are the following filter characteristic types:
○ Time characteristic, for example, Calendar day or Calendar week.
○ System characteristics, for example, System ID or Monitoring ID.
○ Analytical key figure specific characteristics, for example, sales organization. Which characteristics are
available depends on the selected key figure.
5. Select a filter type. The following filter types are available:
○ Regular filter
○ Relative filter
○ Runtime filter
○ Filter for Top N characteristic values
6. Save your entries.

 Note

You can maintain more than one filter for one AKFI, but you can use only one time characteristics filter per
AKFI.

Regular Filter

A regular filter directly filters certain values of a filter characteristic. Regular filters can be used with all filter
characteristics.

Business Process Operations

Business Process Improvement PUBLIC 59
Typical use case: You want to display data for a single sales organization only.

1. To open the Setup BPO Dashboards screen, on the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, choose Configuration
- Dashboards Business Process Operations.
2. In Setup BPO Dashboards, on the Setup Analytical Key figure Instance tab, select an analytical key figure
instance, and choose Change.
3. Choose Add Filter Element.
4. Select the filter characteristics and the Regular Filter filter type.
5. To define a select option, enter the following data:
○ Sign (mandatory): I (Include) or E (Exclude)

 Note

For time characteristics, only I (Include) is supported.

○ Option (mandatory): EQ (Equal), BT (Between), CP (Contains Pattern)

 Note

For time characteristics, only BT (Between) is supported.

○ Low (mandatory): Enter a characteristic value you want to exclude or include in the filter.
○ If you have selected BT (Between): High (optional): If you want to exclude or include a range of
characteristic values, enter values for Low and High.
6. Choose Add to add the select option to the filter.
7. To define more select options, repeat steps 1 to 3.
8. Save your entries.

Relative Filter

Using a relative filter, you can filter dynamically. Relative filters can only be used for time characteristics.

Typical use case: You want to display data from the last ten days.

1. To open the Setup BPO Dashboards screen, on the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, choose Configuration
- Dashboards Business Process Operations.
2. In Setup BPO Dashboards, on the Setup Analytical Key figure Instance tab, select an analytical key figure
instance, and choose Change.
3. Choose Add Filter Element.
4. Select the filter characteristics and the Relative Filter filter type.
5. To define a select option, enter the following data:
○ Sign (mandatory): I (Include)

 Note

Even though exclude can be selected, it is not supported.

○ Option (mandatory): BT (Between)

○ Low (mandatory): Enter the lowest value of a relative range.
○ High (mandatory): Enter the highest value of a relative range.
6. Choose Add to add the select option to the filter.
7. Save your entries.

Runtime Filter

Business Process Operations

60 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
With runtime filters, you can define category and drilldown characteristics. The system applies runtime filters
during runtime when a panel calls a detail panel.

1. To open the Setup BPO Dashboards screen, on the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, choose Configuration
- Dashboards Business Process Operations.
2. In Setup BPO Dashboards, on the Setup Analytical Key figure Instance tab, select an analytical key figure
instance and choose Change.
3. Choose Add Filter Element.
4. Select the filter characteristics and the Runtime Filter filter type.
5. To define a select option, enter the following data:
○ Sign (mandatory): I (Include) or E (Exclude)

 Note

For time characteristics, only I (Include) is supported.

○ Option (mandatory): EQ (Equal), BT (Between)

 Note

For time characteristics, only BT (Between) is supported.

○ Low (mandatory): Enter a characteristic value you want to exclude or include in the filter.
○ High (optional): If you want to exclude or include a range of characteristic values, enter values for Low
and High.
6. Choose Add to add the select option to the filter.
7. To define more select options, repeat steps 1 to 5.
8. Save your entries.

Filter for Top N Characteristic Values

With the filter for top n characteristic values, you can filter for only the highest values of the selected filter
characteristic.

The top n filter cannot be used with time characteristics.

1. To open the Setup BPO Dashboards screen, on the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, choose Configuration
- Dashboards Business Process Operations.
2. In Setup BPO Dashboards, on the Setup Analytical Key figure Instance tab, select an analytical key figure
instance, and choose Change.
3. Choose Add Filter Element.
4. Select the filter type Filter for Top N Characteristic Values.
5. Choose how many values you want to display in the AKFI panel.
6. Save your entries.

 Note

When using the filter for top n characteristic values in combination with other filters, set the filter for top n
characteristic values as the last filter. Otherwise, data collection runtime is longer and performance is
reduced.

Filter Overview

Business Process Operations

Business Process Improvement PUBLIC 61
1. To open the Setup BPO Dashboards screen, on the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, choose Configuration
- Dashboards Business Process Operations.
2. After saving a filter, the filter appears in the Analytical Key Figure Details screen in the Filter Characteristic
screen area.
3. To display the select options for a filter in the Select Options screen area, select a filter.
4. To delete a filter, select it and choose Remove Filter Element.
5. To add a new filter, choose Add Filter Element.

 Note

You can maintain more than one filter for one AKFI, but you can use only one time characteristics filter
per AKFI.

6. The Maintain Thresholds pushbutton is only available to display analytical key figure instances that were
created in a previous version of BPO dashboards, and were transported to SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SP 05
and higher during an update.
7. To change the sequence/order of the filter elements, select a filter and choose the up or down button.

Best Practice for Filters

Set filters as specifically as possible. When you set a filter (for example, on solution and monitoring ID), you
restrict the amount of data to be evaluated. This improves the performance when calling the dashboard, so the
data is displayed faster.

 Note

Filtering is especially important when using the detail list connector. The detail list connector only works if a
filter is set to only a single detail list. Otherwise, an error occurs. A detail list is uniquely identified by
system, client, solution, and monitoring ID. It is sufficient to set a filter on a monitoring ID.

Required Filters to Refer Directly to Key Figures from SAP Business Process Analytics in BPO dashboards

In BPO dashboards, to refer directly to key figures from SAP Business Process Analytics, set a filter on
SM_MONID (monitoring ID).

Key figures in SAP Business Process Analytics always refer to a specific collector set up in a specified solution
(from Business Process Monitoring Setup). In contrast, AKFIs in the BPO dashboards refer to single collector
setups, and even across solutions, to the data of all monitors set up for a certain key figure in Business Process
Monitoring Setup.

To avoid displaying cross-collector data in BPO dashboards, filter on monitoring ID.

To refer directly to key figures from SAP Business Process Analytics in BPO dashboards:

1. Navigate to the key figure you want to use in BPO dashboards.

2. Choose Technical Information.
3. From Technical Information, copy the monitoring ID.
4. In BPO dashboards, create an AKFI for the key figure.
5. Create the following filter on the AKFI:
○ Create a regular filter for the SM_MONID filter characteristic:
1. Sign = I
2. Option = EQ
3. Low = the monitoring ID you copied in step 3 from Business Process Analytics

Business Process Operations

62 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
 4. Choose Add and save your entries.

4.5.2.1.2 Setting a Rating

Context

A rating indicates, by using traffic light symbols, if threshold values are exceeded.

You create a general rating for an analytical key figure instance. For the Trend Chart with Rating Line(s) chart
type, the panel displays the general rating thresholds as lines in the chart.

To define thresholds for specific drilldown values, such as for a sales organization, create specific ratings. The
specific rating is based on a combination of Drilldown Value and Category Value.

You can define value-based rating for specific currencies. Value-based rating allows the end user to see
monetary values instead of the default measurement unit.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, choose Configuration - Dashboards Business Process Operations.

The Setup BPO Dashboards screen appears.

2. In Setup BPO Dashboards, on the Setup Analytical Key Figure Instance tab, select an analytical key figure
instance, and choose Change.
3. On the Standard Rating tab, in the General Rating screen area, enter the threshold values.
4. To create a specific rating:
○ In the Specific Rating screen area, choose the Add button.
○ Choose a drilldown value and a category value, and enter the thresholds for the traffic lights.
5. On the Value-Based Rating tab, you can define ratings for monetary values for specific currencies.

 Note

This tab is only displayed if the key figure supports monetary values (for example, document value).

To create a general rating:

1. In the General Rating screen area, choose the Add button.
2. Enter the currency and the threshold values.

For information on how to maintain exchange currency rates, see Maintaining Exchange Currency Rates
[page 68].
6. To create a specific rating for monetary values:
1. In the Specific Rating screen area, choose the Add button.

Business Process Operations

Business Process Improvement PUBLIC 63
 2. Choose a drilldown value and a category value, and enter the thresholds for the traffic lights.
7. Save your entries.

4.5.2.2 Setting Up a Panel

Context

A panel is a graphical display of one or more analytical key figure instances.

The following chart types are available:

● Bar chart, stacked bar chart

● Column chart, stacked column chart
● Trend chart, trend chart with rating lines
● Pie chart
● Static rating table, dynamic rating table

A panel contains, for example, a title, a chart type, data labels, and one or more analytical key figure instances.
One or more panels are assigned to a dashboard. A panel can be reused in several dashboards.

A panel can also contain a reference to another panel that is displayed as detail panel. A detail panel is a panel
that displays values in more detail. You can reference a detail panel from a panel if both share the same
category. To drill down the level of detail, a detail panel can also reference another panel. For example, you can
display sales orders for sales organization, region, country, and site.

Procedure

1. To open the Setup BPO Dashboards screen, on the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, choose Configuration
- Dashboards Business Process Operations.
2. In the Setup Panel tab, choose Add.
3. To be able to reuse panels, enter a technical name and a meaningful description. You cannot change the
technical name after saving. The description is displayed as panel title.
4. Select the chart type.
5. Depending on the chart type, enter the descriptions for the category and value axes.
6. To enable auto refresh, enter a time interval per day and a period.

The default is 00:00:00 to 00:00:00 with period 0, that is, auto refresh is not enabled.
7. Define the displayed default measure unit (default measure unit or value).
8. Specify whether the end user can switch between the display of the default measure unit and the
(monetary) value, and whether they can change the displayed currency.
9. Add one or more instances of an analytical key figure.

To reference a detail panel, enter the technical name of the panel.

Business Process Operations

64 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
  Example

To compare, in a line chart, the development of the deliveries created with the development of overdue
deliveries through time, for example, aggregated by time attribute calendar day (CALDAY), do one of
the following:
○ Add the analytical key figure instance, for example, Plant 1 – Outbound Deliveries (created) and
Plant 1 – Outbound Deliveries (overdue).
In the line diagram, two lines and a legend are displayed.
○ For both instances of the analytical key figures, in addition to the calendar day attribute, create the
shipping point as drilldown characteristic. In addition, filter by shipping points A and B.
In the line diagram, four lines are displayed that show the development of deliveries created and
overdue deliveries for shipping points A and B.

10. Save your entries.

The panel appears in the Panel Overview.

11. To simulate how the panel is displayed in a dashboard, choose Preview.

4.5.2.3 Set Up Dashboard

Context

A BPO dashboard is a visual display of one or several analytical key figures that gives the end user an overview
of a certain business area or a business process.

A dashboard can have one to six panels assigned, depending on the chosen layout. You can restrict the visibility
of a dashboard by assigning a specific authorization group to the dashboard.

Procedure

1. To open the Setup BPO Dashboards screen, on the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, choose Configuration
- Dashboards Business Process Operations.
2. In the Set Up Dashboard tab, choose Add.
3. Enter a technical name. You cannot change the technical name after saving the dashboard.
4. Enter a description.
5. In the Dashboard Type field, specify the layout of the panels that are displayed in the dashboard. The
following values are possible:
○ 1 row / 1 column
○ 2 rows / 2 columns
○ 2 rows / 3 columns

Business Process Operations

Business Process Improvement PUBLIC 65
 ○ 3 rows / 1 column
○ 3 rows / 2 columns
○ 3 rows / 3 columns
6. To restrict the display of the dashboard to specific users only, assign an authorization group to the
dashboard.

For more information, see Roles and Authorizations [page 66].

7. Add panels to the dashboard. The sequence of the panels in the list specifies the panel sequence in the
dashboard from left to right.
8. Save your entries.

4.5.3 Roles and Authorizations

Use

Within the BPO dashboards, there are the following dedicated user types:

● The administrator is responsible for the configuration and maintenance of connector instances, analytical
key figure instances (AKFIs), panels and dashboards. Additionally, the administrator is authorized to
display the dashboards in the assigned authorization groups.
● The end user can display the dashboards in the authorization groups that are assigned to the end user’s
user profile. An end user is not authorized to access the administration screens.

More Information

For more information about the roles and authorizations for using the BPO dashboards, see the Application-
Specific Security Guide at https://help.sap.com/viewer/p/SAP_Solution_Manager.

4.5.3.1 Using Authorization Groups to Restrict the Display

of Dashboards

Use

You use authorization groups to restrict the access to dashboards for end users. You can assign authorization
groups to any dashboard. That is, if the authorization for a specific authorization group is granted to a user, by
choosing Business Process Operations - Dashboards on the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, the user can
access all dashboards that have the authorization group assigned.

The end user can only display the data inside the dashboards that is not restricted by other authorizations,
such as solution, application area, key figure, and system and client. In the BPO dashboards, you can use
authorization groups to restrict, for example, to regions (EMEA, US, APJ) or SAP application modules (SD, MM,
FI).

Business Process Operations

66 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
  Recommendation

We recommend that you assign an authorization group to every dashboard that an administrator creates.
Doing so avoids unauthorized access to business-sensitive data in the dashboards.

Per default, in the standard roles SAP_SM_DASHBOARDS_ADMIN and SAP_SM_DASHBOARDS_DISP, all users are
assigned to the PUBLIC authorization group.

Procedure

To create and assign authorization groups for dashboards, do the following:

1. In the Data Browser transaction (SE16), in the DSH_AUTHGROUPS table, create a new entry for field
AUTHGROUP (for example AUTHGROUP = “FINANCE”).
2. To open the Setup BPO Dashboards screen, on the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, choose Configuration
- Dashboards Business Process Operations.
3. In the Setup BPO Dashboards screen, on the Setup Dashboard tab page, assign the authorization group to
the dashboard.
4. Assign the authorizations to end users and administrators as follows:
○ For end users:
Authorization object SM_DSBINST (in SAP standard role SAP_SM_DASHBOARDS_DISP):
○ For display authorization, in ACTVT, enter value 03 (display mode).
○ For displaying dashboards with specific authorization groups, in AUTHGRPDSB, enter the values of
the authorizations groups.
○ For administrators:
Authorization object SM_APPTYPE (in SAP standard role SAP_SM_DASHBOARDS_ADMIN):
○ For general authorization, in ACTVT, enter 01, 02, 03, and 06 (01 = Create, 02 = Change, 03 =
Display, 06 = Delete).
○ For administering dashboards with specific authorization groups, in AUTHGRPDSB, enter the values
of the authorizations groups.

4.5.4 Working with Business Process Operations Dashboards

as End User

Prerequisites

● You are authorized for Business Process Operations.

Business Process Operations

Business Process Improvement PUBLIC 67
  Note

The dashboard administrator can also provide you with the URL to display a dashboard without access
to Business Process Operations.

● You are authorized to use the feature Business Process Operations Dashboards.
● You are authorized to display the dashboard, which means the administrator has your user assigned to the
corresponding authorization group.

Context

As an end user, you use a dashboard to monitor the status of specific business processes and to identify
current business problems.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, select Business Process Operations - Dashboards.
2. To display a dashboard, enter the dashboard name. You can use the search help to find a dashboard.
○ On panel level, you can use the Show Keys and Show Text buttons to switch between the technical
name and the text description of the values, which are displayed as legend.
○ To drill down into panel details: If a detail panel is assigned, double-click a panel value to go to the detail
panel.
○ To exchange information with your colleagues who use the same panel, select Comment.
○ If your data source is SAP Business Process Analytics: On panel level, use the Analytics button to
navigate from the panel to the corresponding key figure variant in SAP Business Process Analytics.
○ You can open a panel in maximized mode by clicking  (Maximize).
○ You can set the number of visible rows and columns by clicking Table Settings.
○ You can change the size of the columns by clicking on the space between two columns in the header of
a table.

4.6 Maintaining Exchange Currency Rates

You can maintain exchange currency rates to define ratings for monetary values.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, choose Business Process Improvement - Administration.
2. In the BPO Reporting Infrastructure Maintenance window, choose the Exchange Rates tab.

Business Process Operations

68 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
3. Click on the Open Exchange Rate Setup button.
4. In the Exchange Rate Provider Settings window, you can add, modify, and delete exchange rate providers.

The provider configurations administered by SAP can be used as templates.

4.7 Dependency Diagrams

Use

You can display and create diagrams to show the dependencies of key performance indicators (KPIs). A
diagram consists of tiles; a tile represents an analytical key figure instance (AKFI).

Features

Displaying Dependency Diagrams

To display dependency diagrams, choose Dependency Diagrams on the SAP Solution Manager launchpad.

You can edit the standard view selecting  (Settings).

To refresh the page, select  (Refresh).

Setting Up Dependency Diagrams

To set up dependency diagrams, choose Business Process Operations on the launchpad. Then choose
Business Process Analytics - Classic BPA Links Dependency Diagrams Setup .

The Level in Hierarchy field is filled automatically, based on the relations you entered in the Is Child Of Tile
column.

 Note

The input help of the AKFI Technical Name column shows only those AKFIs that do not have a category and
drilldown value, so they are aggregated to a single key figure. Otherwise, you cannot use the AKFI.

You can also set up new AKFIs if necessary, or use existing ones.

Business Process Operations

Business Process Improvement PUBLIC 69
4.8 Progress Management Board

Progress Management Board allows managers to keep track of the progress made for KPIs that are being
improved in Business Process Improvement projects.

Progress Management Board for End Users

End users of progress management board are, for example, managers who want to follow the progress made
for KPIs of Business Process Improvement projects. In Progress Management Board, you call up progress
management boards to display the following information about KPIs that are being improved:

● Overview of the the improvement process

For each KPI, a chart indicates the process phases that have been passed.
● Current values of the KPIs compared to the target values, the baseline values, and the values of the
previous week and the previous month
● Further detailed information, such as the due date, the business priority, or contact details of persons
responsible for the improvement of the KPIs

Progress Management Board for Configuration Users

Configuration users of progress management board are, for example, Business Process Improvement team
members. You configure the following for Progress Management Board:

● Progress KPIs
To configure the KPIs that you want to monitor with the application, you select the data sources and
specify details, such as the baseline and target values, units or currencies. For more information, see
Configuring Progress KPIs [page 73].
● Progress management boards
You can configure specific progress management boards for different user groups, for example, progress
management boards that display KPIs of specific business areas or regions. For more information, see
Configuring Progress Management Boards [page 74].
● Authorization areas
You can manage the access of users to the progress management boards and KPIs by creating and
maintaining authorization areas. For more information, see Creating Customer-Defined Authorization
Areas for Progress Management Board [page 71].

You can edit the standard view by selecting  (Settings).

To refresh the page, select  (Refresh).

Business Process Operations

70 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
4.8.1 Creating Customer-Defined Authorization Areas for
Progress Management Board

In Progress Management Board, authorization areas are used to restrict the access to progress KPIs or
progress management boards for unauthorized end users.

Context

In addition to using the standard authorization areas for business goals areas, you can create your own
customer-defined authorization areas for various scenarios, for example, for very specific business areas or
regions. In Progress Management Board, you can then assign the authorization areas to progress management
boards or progress KPIs to restrict the boards or the KPIs to users authorized for the authorization areas.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, choose the Business Process Improvement - Administration tile
to start the BPO Reporting Infrastructure Maintenance.
2. To open the Authorization Settings, in the BPO Reporting Infrastructure Maintenance, choose the
Authorization tab.
3. In the Authorization Settings, choose Authorization Areas.
4. Choose Customer defined.
5. To add an authorization area, choose Add.
6. Enter a name and a description for the authorization area.
7. To save your settings, choose Create.

Next Steps

When you have created customer-defined authorization areas, do the following::

● Assign the authorization area to the users who you want to authorize for the authorization area.
To assign authorization areas to users, you maintain authorization areas as objects in the user roles: In the
BPA Object Authorization, you add the authorization area as an BPA object type (BPA_OBJTYP) and you
maintain the specific authorization areas as BPA objects (BPA_OBJECT).

 Note

If you use the standard authorization areas, you also have to assign them to the users.

● In Progress Management Board, assign the authorization area to progress KPIs and progress management
boards.

Business Process Operations

Business Process Improvement PUBLIC 71
4.8.2 Creating Data Sources for Progress KPIs

The data sources for the progress KPIs are analytical key figure instances.

You set up the analytical key figure instances in the business process operations dashboard setup. To access
the business process operations dashboard setup, choose Configuration - Dashboards Business Process
Operations on the SAP Solution Manager launchpad. For more information about setting up analytical key
figure instances, see Creating Analytical Key Figure Instances [page 57].

 Note

The following connector types are relevant for analytical key figure instances used for Progress KPIs in
Progress Management Boards:

● BPA_TwinCube: Connector for Business Process Analytics TwinCubes

● BPM_Detail_List: Connector for Business Process Monitoring Detail List (also used by Business
Process analytics key figures)
● BPM_HANA_SUITE: Connector for Adhoc Analytics
● MAI: Connector for MAI (Business Process Monitoring)
● CDC_Conn: Connector for Cross- Data Comparison
● BPO_BW_Query: Connector for BW Queries

In addition to creating analytical key figure instances directly in the business process operations dashboard
setup, you also have the following options for creating analzticals as data sources for progress KPIs:

● If you have created key figure variants for business process analytics, you can convert key figure variants
directly into analytical key figure instances:
1. In Business Process Analytics, on the Key Figure Variants tab, choose Manage Variant Categories and
Variants .
2. Select Variant Maintenance.
3. Select the key figure variant you want to convert into an analytical key figure instance.
4. To convert the key figure variant including all its filter settings into an analytical key figure instance,
choose Convert to AKFI for BPO Dashboards.
● You can use the BW query connector to create analytical key figure instances for BW queries:
1. In Business Process Improvement - Administration on the Data Source Manager tab page, create a
connector instance for the BW query connector (BPO_BW_Query). For more information about setting
up a connector instance, see Maintaining a Connector Instance [page 54].
2. Choose Maintain BW Query AKF to configure BW query analytical key figures.
3. In the business process operations dashboards setup, create analytical key figure instances based on
the BW query analytical key figures.

Business Process Operations

72 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
4.8.3 Configuring Progress KPIs

You can configure the progress KPIs to be displayed on the progress management boards.

Prerequisites

● You have Progress Management Board configuration user authorizations.

● You have created analytical key figure instances (AKFIs).
Progress Management Board uses AKFIs as data sources for the progress KPIs. You need to set up the
AKFIs before you can configure progress KPIs. For more information, see Creating Data Sources for
Progress KPIs [page 72].
● If you want to use customer-defined authorization areas, you have to create them before you configure the
progress KPIs. For more information, see Creating Customer-Defined Authorization Areas for Progress
Management Board [page 71].

 Tip

Consider on which progress management boards you want to display the progress KPIs. You might, for
example, want to use a naming convention for the KPIs displayed on specific boards.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, choose Progress Management Board to start the application.
2. Choose Maintain Progress KPIs.
3. Select  (Create Progress KPI).

The Add Progress KPI wizard opens.

4. In 1 General Information and Data Source, select a Data Source and an Authorization Area.

 Note

The Authorization Area restricts the access to the progress KPI: The progress KPI is visbile only to
users who are authorized to view KPIs of the Authorization Area. You can also select Public to make the
progress KPI visible to all users.

5. Choose 2 Unit and Baseline Definition to go to the next step. In the second step, specify the measuring
units, the currency and the baseline value:
a. Specify the units.
b. Define a baseline value.

The definition of a baseline value is optional.

To define a baseline value, switch to On and enter the baseline values and other details, such as the
date of the baseline value (Baseline Time).
6. In 3 Target Definition, define a range of tolerance for the difference to the value of the previous period and a
target value.

Business Process Operations

Business Process Improvement PUBLIC 73
 The definition of a target value is optional.

To define target values, switch to On and enter the target values and the target type. If you use the target
type Between, you can define a value range as target.
7. In 4 Progress Information, enter the progress information:
a. Enter a due date. The due date is the date when the target value should be reached.
b. Enter the business priorty.
c. Enter the phases passed in the improvement process.

 Note

End users of progress management boards that display the progress KPI can maintain the passed
phases, the business priority, and the due date.

8. In 5 Responsible Persons, you can assign the persons responsible for the improvement of the KPI, for
example, the IT person responsible and the business person responsible.

The contact information of the persons responsible is displayed on the fact sheet of the progress KPI.

 Note

You maintain the contact information of the persons responsible in the Progress Management Board
application: Choose Maintain Responsible and enter the contact information of the persons reponsible.

9. Save your settings

To make changes to an existing progress KPI, choose Maintain Progress KPIs. Choose the progress KPI and
choose Edit.

The progress information (the passed phases, the business priority, and the due date) of a KPI, can be
maintained by the end users of the progress management boards that display the KPI: To change the
progress information, select the KPI and choose Change Progress Information.

4.8.4 Configuring Progress Management Boards

You can configure specific progress management boards for different users or user groups.

Prerequisites

● You have Progress Management Board configuration user authorizations.

● You have configured Progress KPIs. For more information, see Configuring Progress KPIs [page 73].
● If you want to use customer-defined authorization areas, you have to create them before you configure the
progress management boards. For more information, see Creating Customer-Defined Authorization Areas
for Progress Management Board [page 71].

Business Process Operations

74 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
Context

When you create a progress management board, you assign an authorization area to the progress
management board, so that only authorized users can see and use the board. After creating a progress
mangement board, you assign the progress KPIs that you want to display on the board.

Creating Progress Management Boards

Procedure

1. On the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, choose Progress Management Board.

2. Choose Maintain Progress Boards.
3. Choose  (Create Progress Board).
4. Enter a Title and select the Authorization Area that you want to assign to the progress management board.
5. Save your settings by clicking  (Save Progress Board).

Assigning Progress KPIs to Progress Management Boards

Procedure

1. On the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, choose Progress Management Board.

2. Select the progress management board.
3. Choose Assign Progress KPI.

A pop-up window displays a list of the available and unassigned progress KPIs and a list of the KPIs already
assigned to the progress management board.
4. To assign progress KPIs, select the KPIs in the list of unassigned KPIs and move them to the list of assigned
KPIs by clicking (Assign Progress KPI).
5. Save your settings by clicking  (Save Progress Board).

Deleting Progress Management Boards

Procedure

1. Select the progress management board you want to delete.

2. Select  (Delete Progress Board).
3. Select OK.

Business Process Operations

Business Process Improvement PUBLIC 75
Editing Progress Management Boards

Procedure

1. On the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, choose Progress Management Board.

2. Choose Maintain Progress Boards.
3. Select the progress management board you want to edit.
4. Select  (Edit Progress Board).
5. Edit the progress management board.
6. Select  (Save Progress Board).

Displaying Technical Names

Procedure

1. Click  (Settings).
2. Display or hide technical names.

4.8.5 Using Progress Management Boards

In the Progress Management Board application, you call up progress management boards to display
information about the KPIs of Business Process Improvement projects.

Prerequisites

● You have progress management board end user authorizations.

Starting Progress Management Board

1. On the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, choose Progress Management Board.

2. Select a progress management board.

Business Process Operations

76 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
Viewing and Comparing Progress KPIs

Progress Management Board has the following tab pages:

● Overview
● Details

Overview Tab Page

You use the Overview tab page to get an overview of the current status of the KPIs in Business Process
Improvement process. The Overview table displays the following information for each KPI:

● Passed Phases
The phases in the improvement process that the KPI has completed
The phase bar on top of the Progress Management Board screen displays all possible phases of the
improvement process
● Due Date
The date when the improvement of the KPI has to be reached
● Current Value & Target:
A bar chart shows the relation of the current value to the target value with a black vertical line indicating
the target value. The number above the bullet bar is the current value and the number under the bar is the
target value
The target value can also be a value range. In this case, the value range is indicated by two green vertical
lines on the bar.
● Business Priority

Details Tab Page

You use the Details tab page to compare the current value of the KPIs with the baseline values, the values of the
previous month or week, and the target values.

Filtering Progress KPIs

To display only specific progress KPIs, choose Show Filter Bar and set filters.

You can save filter variants.

Changing the Measuring Unit or Currency

To change the displayed measuring unit or currency for selected KPIs, select the KPIs, choose Switch Unit, and
select the unit or change the reference currency.

Changing the Comparison Period for KPI Values

To change the comparison period from previous week to previous month or vice versa, select  (Settings). In
the Table Settings, change the comparions period.

Displaying Technical Names

To display or hide the technical names of progress KPIs, click  (Settings) .

Business Process Operations

Business Process Improvement PUBLIC 77
KPI Fact Sheets

You can view additional information about a progess KPI on the KPI fact sheet. To display a fact sheet, click on a
progess KPI displayed on the Overview or the Details tab page.

The fact sheet displays all the information about the KPI on one screen. This includes additional information,
such as contact information of the persons responsible for the improvement of the KPI.

Changing the Progress Information for KPIs

To change the progress information of progress KPIs, select the KPIs and choose Change Progress Information.

You can change the following information for one or more progress KPIs:

● Due date
● Business priority
● Phase

You can refresh the details immediately by clicking  (Refresh).

4.9 BPO Reporting Infrastructure

Use

The business process operations reporting infrastructure is a software layer underlying business process
analytics and business process operations dashboards. It is a collection of standardized functions to give
business process analytics, business process operations dashboards, and other tools and applications, an
easy-to-use interface to a set of data providers (business process improvement key figures).

Activities in the BPO Reporting Infrastructure Maintenance

To maintain the business process operations reporting infrastructure in the BPO Reporting Infrastructure
Maintenance, choose Business Process Improvement - Administration on the SAP Solution Manager launchpad.
You can do the following:

● BP Analytics BW tab
You can use TwinCubes in the business process operations reporting infrastructure. For more information,
see TwinCubes in Business Process Analytics [page 79].
● Data Source Manager tab
You can add new connector instances, and change, activate, or deactivate existing ones. For more
information, see Maintaining a Connector Instance [page 54].
● Master Data tab

Business Process Operations

78 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
 You can control the loading of master data. For more information, see Loading Master Data. [page 83]
● KPI Catalog tab
You can upload your self-developed analytical key figures to the KPI catalog of SAP Solution Manager.
● Geo Data tab
You can configure the geospatial data functionality for key figures that support location information.
● Authorization tab
You can use this tab to access the Authorization Settings. Here, you create or edit key figure groups,
visibility groups, and authorization groups for Business Process Analytics as well as authorization areas for
Progress Management Board.
● Exchange Rates tab
You can configure settings for exchange rate providers.
For information on how to maintain exchange currency rates, see Maintaining Exchange Currency Rates
[page 68].
● Usage Analysis tab
You can analyze how key figures are used by end users.
● Log for Data Collection and Cube Upload tab
You can analyze the root cause of problems in business process analytics and dashboards. For more
information, see Log for Data Collection and Cube Upload [page 85].

4.9.1 TwinCubes in Business Process Analytics

Use

TwinCubes are a type of data storage in BW with the following features:

● Value Benchmarking and Value Trend Analysis (business process analytics)

These functions can be used to analyze the number of documents and the document value.
Prerequisite: The ST-A/PI plug-in in the managed system and on SAP Solution Manager is ST-A/PI 01R or
higher.
● Simplified master data load (business process analytics and business process operations dashboards)
● Automatic housekeeping (business process analytics and business process operations dashboards)
Automatic housekeeping is a periodic reorganization process that deletes history data automatically.
● Improved performance (business process analytics and business process operations dashboards)

Prerequisites

You have activated TwinCubes in SAP Solution Manager configuration.

Features

Data Storage and Lifetime

Business Process Operations

Business Process Improvement PUBLIC 79
The business process analytics TwinCubes data storage consists of ten cubes, in five aggregation levels:

Aggregation Level Cubes Lifetime (Default)

Hourly cubes (with data Hourly cube 1 Hourly cube 2 30 days

down to minutes)

Daily cubes (with data down Daily cube 1 Daily cube 2 1 year
to days)

Weekly cubes (with data Weekly cube 1 Weekly cube 2 5 years

down to weeks)

Monthly cubes (with data Monthly cube 1 Monthly cube 2 10 years

down to month)

Yearly cubes (with data down Yearly cube 1 Yearly cube 2 30 years
to years)

On every aggregation level, there are two cubes, to facilitate housekeeping: For every aggregation level, there is
a lifetime default that can also be customized. The two cubes on each level are filled and dropped, according to
this lifetime.

Example: When you start to use the TwinCubes, data is first written into cube 1, until the lifetime is reached. In
this case, the lifetime of the hourly level is 30 days, so data is written into cube 1 (hourly cube) for 30 days.
After the 30 days, cube 1 is locked, and data is written into cube 2. After another 30 days, the lifetime of cube 2
is also reached and cube 2 (hourly cube) is locked. Data in cube 1 is dropped (deleted) and, for the next 30
days, cube 1 is again filled with new data.

Business Process Operations

80 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
 Lifetime

The other four aggregation levels are handled analogously, with the difference that the lifetime is usually longer.
Deleting (dropping) whole cubes after a certain lifetime has the benefit that even cubes with a lot of data can
be tidied up quickly.

You access the data from the different aggregation levels, as defined in the lifetime. You can change the lifetime
of the different aggregation levels, if necessary.

Data Aggregation

In the TwinCubes, data is stored in different aggregation levels:

● On the hourly level, every data collection is saved and can be accessed later on (similar to the InfoCube).
● On the other levels, data collections are aggregated to days, weeks, months, and years.

Business Process Operations

Business Process Improvement PUBLIC 81
4.9.1.1 Migrating Data and AKFIs to TwinCubes

Use

You will usually migrate your data in SAP Solution Manager Configuration, but you can also do so in the BPO
Reporting Infrastructure Maintenance: Choose Business Process Improvement - Administration on the SAP
Solution Manager launchpad and then go to the BP Analytics BW tab.

Procedure

Migrating Data from InfoCube to TwinCubes

 Note

The activation of the TwinCubes is irreversible. As soon as the TwinCubes have been activated, all new data
collections will be written into the business process analytics TwinCubes instead of the business process
analytics InfoCubes.

For more information about the activation of business process analytics TwinCubes, see https://
wiki.scn.sap.com/wiki/x/lgYsG

 Note

The TwinCubes have to be activated prior to starting the migration.

1. Verify that the data migration status is green.

2. Choose the Migrate Cube Data button
A background job is scheduled to migrate the data.
3. In the job log, you can identify errors (for example, if the data could not be migrated because of missing
authorization) and monitor the progress of the migration.

The data displayed in business process analytics is retrieved from TwinCubes. You do not need to migrate or
change key figure variants. When opening a variant, the system checks whether the TwinCubes are active. If so,
the data displayed in the variant is requested from TwinCubes.

Migrating Analytical Key Figure Instances

To display data from the TwinCubes in existing dashboards, adjust the analytical key figure instances (AKFIs) to
refer to data from the TwinCubes (BPM_TwinCube). Before the migration, the AKFIs that refer to data from BP
Analytics pull data from the InfoCube (BPM_ACube).

Choose the Migrate AKFI Directory button. This adjusts all AKFIs that have BPM_ACube as a data source.

Business Process Operations

82 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
4.9.1.2 Viewing Data in TwinCubes

Procedure

1. To view the data in the TwinCubes, open transaction LISTCUBE.

2. In the InfoProvider field, enter 0SM_BPAMA. 0SM_BPAMA is the central data provider for all ten cubes in the
TwinCubes.

The TwinCubes consist of ten data cubes, in five aggregation levels. You can also view data on the different
aggregation levels directly, by entering the following InfoProviders:

Aggregation Level InfoProvider

Hourly MultiProvider (with data down to minutes) 0SM_BPAMH

Daily MultiProvider (with data down to days) 0SM_BPAMD

Weekly MultiProvider (with data down to weeks) 0SM_BPAMW

Monthly MultiProvider (with data down to months) 0SM_BPAMM

Yearly MultiProvider (with data down to years) 0SM_BPAMY

4.9.1.3 Loading Master Data

Context

You can control the loading of the master data of the managed systems using TwinCubes.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, choose Business Process Improvement - Administration.

The BPO Reporting Infrastructure Maintenance opens.

2. On the Master Data tab, select one or more rows.
3. You can do the following:

Business Process Operations

Business Process Improvement PUBLIC 83
 ○ To control the scheduling activation, choose the  Start Schedule or  Stop Schedule button.
○ To remove the schedule and already loaded master data, choose the Remove Semantic ID button. The
entry will then disappear from the list.
○ To change the frequency of the master data load, choose the Set Schedule Time button.
○ To refresh the master data immediately, choose the Manual Master Data Reload button. The data can
take some minutes to be refreshed/reloaded, depending on the amount of data.
○ To delete master data, choose the Clear Master Data button. A popup shows the languages in which
the master data was last loaded. Select the languages for which you want to delete the master data.
○ To check the total amount of master data loaded, choose the Load/Reload Master Data Amount Details
button. To see the languages, click the number in the No. Languages (distinct) column.
○ To schedule a new semantic ID that is not shown in the table, choose the Schedule New Semantic ID
button. In a popup, you can define the semantic ID, target system, and frequency.
○ In the Master Data Language Customizing area, you can define the languages for which the master
data are to be loaded. By default, descriptions are loaded in English for every system/client. Only load
the languages that are required. You can append rows or change existing Customizing according to
your requirements.

4.9.1.4 Data Loader Error Queue

The data loader is a step in the data collection process. After data has been collected from the managed
systems, the data loader stores the aggregated data packages in the cubes. In the InfoCube or TwinCubes, data
loading into the cubes can fail, for example if the RFC connection between SAP Solution Manager and the
remote BW does not work, a data package contains an invalid character, or the data packages contain other
errors and cannot be written into the cubes.

In case of an error during the loading of data into the InfoCube, the framework tries to load it again and again.
You cannot see that an error occurred. If such error situations occur for the TwinCube, the data loader puts
these data packages into quarantine (error queue). The data loader status turns red.

You can view packages that could not be loaded into the TwinCubes, by choosing the Display Error Queue
button. After an issue was solved, you can release data packages so that they will be loaded into the TwinCubes
again.

4.9.2 Usage Analysis

Use

You can get an overview of how analytical key figures and dashboards are used by end users.

Prerequisites

You have administrator authorization.

Business Process Operations

84 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
Features

To open the usage analysis overview, on the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, choose Business Process
Improvement - Administration to open the BPO Reporting Infrastructure Maintenance. Then choose the Usage
Analysis tab.

You can activate logging of usage data.

You can define a retention period by choosing a number of days and clicking retention period.

You can display users who used key figures and dashboards and how often key figures and dashboards are
used.

You can sort and filter the lists by clicking  (Open Settings Dialog).

4.9.3 Log for Data Collection and Cube Upload

Use

The log allows you to analyze the root cause of problems in business process analytics and dashboards. Since
there are several infrastructures involved, the log allows you to identify which step of the data transfer caused a
problem. When key figures are created and scheduled, they are transferred from the managed system to SAP
Solution Manager, and saved in a BW cube. When data is collected, it is written to the log immediately.

Select the managed system for which you want to display the log. A system is available only if its key figures
have been set up beforehand. The log contains entries for the managed system and the SAP Solution Manager
system. The log data is retained for 14 days.

Features

● Start Extractor Manually: If you start the extractor manually, you override the priority of the extractor (see
the Current Extractor Priority field).
● Release Extractor: After you have identified and solved a problem, you can release the extractor. This
button is only active if the extractor has status B (banned) or M (maintenance). For more information, see
Extractor Framework.
● Data Collection Log
The Load column shows the processed BW packages that have been written to the BW cube.
The entries in the last three columns should be the same, otherwise the alert rating is red.
Status -> Package column:
○ Status A (start package): Data collection from the managed system has not been completed; there are
still BW packages to be collected.
○ Status E (end package): Data collection from the managed system has been completed; all BW
packages have been collected, data extraction is completely performed.

Business Process Operations

Business Process Improvement PUBLIC 85
4.9.4 Maintaining a Connector Instance

Use

The data displayed on the business process operations dashboards is read from data sources.

The logical link between the business process operations dashboards infrastructure and a data source is
established by a connector. The connector is instantiated once before usage for a connector type and the
associated data source, by creating a connector instance. Later, during the configuration of business process
operations dashboards, analytical key figure instances are assigned to the connector instance to get their data
from the associated data source. Thus, for every data source that business process operations dashboards
use, there must be at least one active connector instance.

The following SAP Solution Manager applications can provide data for business process operations
dashboards:

● Business process analytics uses the following data sources:

○ SAP Business Explorer BW query
○ Detail list

● Business Process Monitoring uses the following data sources:

○ Monitoring and alerting infrastructure
○ Detail list

 Note

To display business process monitoring information, business process operations dashboards have to be
manually configured in the Dashboard Builder.

For more information about data sources, see Define Data Sources [page 87].

Procedure

To define the connector instances in the connector directory:

● To navigate to the data source manager, on the launchpad, choose Business Process Improvement -
Administration. The BPO Reporting Infrastructure Maintenance screen appears.
● On the Data Source Manager tab, you can add, change, activate, or deactivate a connector instance.
○ To create or change a connector instance, choose the corresponding connector in the upper part of the
screen, and choose the connector instance in the table below.
○ To add, change, activate or deactivate a connector instance, choose Change Mode.

The system creates the following connector instances:

● BPM_TwinCube_default for the Analytics TwinCubes connector (BPM_TwinCube)

● Analytics_DL_default for the detail list connector (BPM_Detail_List)

To activate the connector instances for use by business process operations dashboards:

1. Choose Change Mode, and in the Applications field, enter the additional entry DASHBOARD.

Business Process Operations

86 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
2. Choose (De)Activate and save your entries.

If the system does not automatically create the connector instance associated with the data source for the
business process operations dashboards, create the connector instance manually, as follows:

1. Choose Add.
2. For the new connector instance, enter the following information:
○ Name: technical name of the connector instance
○ Description: description of the connector instances
○ RFC Destination: RFC connection to SAP Solution Manager from which data is extracted for the
analytical key figures in business process operations dashboards. The only possible entry for this field
is NONE, because a remote scenario (extracting data from a remote SAP Solution Manager) is not
supported for the business process operations dashboards.
○ System: description of the SAP Solution Manager system from which the data is extracted via RFC
destination, with this connector instance. Enter the local SAP Solution Manager system.
○ Applications: Enter the applications that use the connector instance:
To use the connector instance for dashboards, choose DASHBOARD. This entry is required for business
process operations dashboards.
To use the connector instance for analytics, choose ANALYTICS. This entry is required if you also want
to use this connector instance for the business process analytics data source (recommended).
○ Managed Systems (optional): To limit the retrieval of data on certain managed systems or clients, enter
the SID and client of the managed system. If no system or client is entered, data from all systems is
used.
3. Save your entries and activate the connector instance.
4. Change to display mode.

 Note

If you have created or changed a connector instance, refresh the browser window so that the changes take
effect, before you create analytical key figures.

 Note

Make sure that there is only one active connector instance per data source (connector). To avoid having
more than one active connector instance, create only one connector instance per data source.

For more information about how to configure and edit connector instances, see SAP Note 1819313 .

4.9.5 Define Data Sources

Business process operations dashboards can be connected to various data sources, such as database tables
or SAP BW InfoCubes. To make the data available in Business process operations dashboards, a so-called
connector is required. The task of a connector is to transform a specific data format that is used in the source
system into a generic data format that can be used in SAP Solution Manager. There are the following connector
types:

● SAP Business Process Monitoring Trend Analysis (connector available in SAP standard)
● SAP Business Process Monitoring Alerting (connector available in SAP standard)

Business Process Operations

Business Process Improvement PUBLIC 87
● SAP Business Process Analytics (connector available in SAP standard)

For every data source that the business process operations dashboards use, a connector instance is created.
For more information, see Maintaining a Connector Instance [page 54].

4.9.6 Execute AKF Repository Update

Use

Most changes on the data source objects require that you update the AKF repository in SAP Solution Manager
on a regular basis. This updates key figures, characteristics, and the corresponding descriptions from the
managed systems.

There are, for example, the following changes on the data source objects:

● Implementation of new ST A/PI plugin in managed systems

● Changing key figures in managed systems

Procedure

1. On the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, select Configuration - Dashboards Business Process Operations.
On the Setup Analytical Key Figure Instance tab, select Maintain Connector Instances.
2. In the Data Source Manager, select the connector in the upper table. In the lower table, the connector
instance for the connector is displayed.
3. Select the active connector instance and choose Update AKF Repository.

Business Process Operations

88 PUBLIC Business Process Improvement
5 Data Consistency Management

Use

Data consistency management checks the consistency of data between a source system and a destination
system and restores it where necessary.

When certain events occur, such as a system crash, mass update, or change to the Customizing settings, you
can find data consistency tasks and tools, check their suitability, and use them. The tools that are suggested
depend on the particular event, the SAP product, and the business object.

 Example

You have an integrated scenario that uses SAP ERP and SAP CRM. In SAP ERP, a mass update of material
master data is performed. You want to know whether all of the updates in SAP ERP have been replicated
correctly to SAP CRM for this event. For this purpose, you can use data consistency management.

Data consistency management provides tasks and tools for the required checks. It enables direct navigation to
the corresponding transactions, check programs, and guidelines with Best Practices.

Implementation Considerations

The following prerequisites need to be fulfilled before you can use data consistency management:

● You are authorized to use the applications in the Business Process Operations section of the SAP Solution
Manager launchpad.
● You have been assigned the necessary role for data consistency management.
● Data consistency monitoring objects have been defined in the business process monitoring setup.
● There are alerts for key figures that were flagged as relevant for data consistency monitoring.

Features

Data Consistency Monitoring

Data consistency monitoring proactively ensures a reliable business process flow and data consistency.

You can switch between the Solutions and the Business Processes view.

Only those alerts are displayed that were flagged as relevant for data consistency monitoring. These alerts are
a subgroup of the business process monitoring alerts.

You can use the business process monitoring functions to display and edit alerts.

You can edit the standard view selecting  (Open Settings Dialog).

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 89
Consistency Checks

To keep your data consistent, you can use the following tools:

● Cross-Database Comparison
Check data consistency and compare data sources across various systems.
● Internal Database Comparison
Compare tables within a system.
● Consistency Check Report Scheduling Verification
Check which reports are used to check consistency.
● GSS: Data Consistency Management
Select the tools and tasks to keep your data consistent.
● Data Consistency Toolbox (Classic)
You perform tasks and determine tools to check the data consistency between a source and target system
and restore it if required.

 Note

The data consistency toolbox (classic) can still be used, but the functions are replaced by the GSS:
Data Consistency Management. For information, see the application help under http://help.sap.com/
solutionmanager for SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SP12 and earlier.

● Data Quality
Integration with SAP Information Steward. You can use this tool to check data quality according to
definable business rules, which can be applied to datasets. For more information, see http://help.sap.com/
bois .

Analysis Tools

To search for the causes of data inconsistencies, use the following tools:

● GSS: Data Consistency Management

Select the tools to keep your data consistent.
● Business Process Completeness Check (BPCC)
Monitor critical subprocesses of business processes and check if all process steps of a process instance
have been executed successfully. In the Business Process Completeness Check application, you can
analyze errors in individual process steps. The Business Process Completeness Check is also integrated in
the Exception Management.
● Transactional Correctness Check
The transactional correctness tool checks the transactional correctness of your ABAP programs.
● End-to-End Trace
You switch to the root cause analysis to check the traces. For more information, see Trace Analysis.

More Information

Cross-Database Comparison [page 92]

Internal Database Comparison [page 147]

GSS: Data Consistency Management [page 146]

Transactional Correctness [page 137]

Business Process Operations

90 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
Business Process Completeness Check [page 148]

5.1 Data Consistency Management Launchpad Group

Use

This Launchpad group is the central access point for all the information and functions you need to implement
data consistency management.

Features

The group consists of the following tiles that are displayed depending on authorization:

Tile Description

Applications

Integration Repository - Cloud You can import SAP Cloud Platform integration flows together with runtime information
Platform Integration from the SAP Cloud Platform Integration tenant.

Data Consistency Management You can access the central application for data consistency management including the
alert inbox and all available checks and tools.

For more information, see Data Consistency Management [page 89].

Cross-Database Comparison You can check data consistency between two sources with complex structure and or hi­
erarchy.

For more information, see Cross-Database Comparison [page 92].

CDC Comparison: Compare ERP - You can explore the dynamic tile for the demo comparison CDC_DEMO_BUSINESS-
ID: CDC_DEMO_BUSINESS- PARTNER_72 in cross-database comparison.
PARTNER_72
For more information, see Cross-Database Comparison [page 92].

Transactional Correctness You can check ABAP programs for transactional correctness.

For more information, see Transactional Correctness [page 137].

Alert Inbox - Data Consistency You can access the alert inbox for context data consistency management which in­
Management cludes all relevant alerts.

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 91
Tile Description

Business Process Completeness You can identify interrupted executions of critical parts in a business process.
Check
For more information, see Business Process Completeness Check [page 148].

Integration Repository - Tools You can import interface documentation from various sources into the Integration Re­
pository.

For more information, see Integration Repository - Tools [page 158].

Integration Repository - Mass You can analyze and change interfaces that you have documented in the Integration Re­
Maintenance pository.

For more information, see Interface Search and Mass Maintenance [page 161].

Integration Repository - Cloud You can import SAP Cloud Platform integration flows together with runtime information
Platform Integration from the SAP Cloud Platform Integration tenant.

Configuration and Settings

Solution Documentation - You can access solution documentation to setup monitoring for data consistency.
Monitoring Configuration

Configuration - Business Process You can access the business process completeness check configuration of SAP Solu­
Completeness Check tion Manager.

Configuration - Business Process You can access the business process operations configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Operations (transaction SOLMAN_SETUP). The system displays the guided procedure to configure
your system.

5.2 Cross-Database Comparison

Use

You use this application to compare data sources with a complex structure or hierarchy. The data sources can
be in the same system or in different systems. You check whether the data is consistent in the source and
target systems, for example, whether updates in the source system have been replicated to the target system.
Examples of complex data sources are sales orders with several billing items, or a customer master record
containing multiple addresses, partner roles, and bank details.

The data sources must contain the same data logically, but they can have different values once they have been
forwarded to a different system, for example, from an ERP system to a CRM system.

Business Process Operations

92 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
Implementation Considerations

You compare databases to check the consistency of data in your systems.

Prerequisites

You have the roles and authorizations required by the application. The following roles are provided for cross-
database comparison:

Generic Roles

● SAP_CDC_ADMIN: Process champion

Contains full authorization for all cross-database comparison tasks.
● SAP_CDC_DISPLAY: Display user
Contains display-only authorizations for various cross-database comparison tasks.

Specific Roles for Typical Cross-Database Comparison Tasks

● SAP_CDC_OBJECT_MODELER: Object Modeler

● SAP_CDC_INSTANCE_CREATOR: Instance Creator
● SAP_CDC_INSTANCE_EXECUTER: Instance Executor
● SAP_CDC_INSTANCE_ANALYZER: Instance Analyzer

Each role has full authorization for one task and display authorization for the others.

Features

● You can model the data that you want to compare.

● You can compare data at any time or schedule regular comparisons.
● You can display the results in an overview that contains all of the relevant details.

You can edit the standard view selecting  (Open Settings Dialog).

This is a generic application, which means that you can use it to check the data consistency in both ABAP and
non-ABAP systems. You can use this application to compare the following data sources:

● Tables from the ABAP Dictionary

● Tables that are linked via ABAP Database Connectivity (ADBC)
● XML and CSV files on a Solution Manager application server or on your local PC
● Tables in an SAP HANA database
● OData services
● SAP Business Information Warehouse

You use the application as follows:

● Once, to check the consistency of new data

● When necessary, to check the consistency of existing data
● Regularly, to monitor important data

You can display the results of the comparison in Business Process Monitoring by configuring the relevant
settings in Customizing for Business Process Monitoring.

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 93
The cross-database comparison application is included in the business process operations dashboard. You can
create a dashboard for specific comparisons. For more information, see Business Process Operations
Dashboard [page 52].

5.2.1 Performing Cross-Database Comparison

Use

This process describes the steps required to prepare, execute, and postprocess a cross-database comparison.

Process

1. You create a comparison, in which you specify the data that you want to compare and create filters.
2. You can assign comparisons to a comparison group, for example, because they affect the same business
object and you want to display the overall comparison results.
3. You schedule and perform a comparison. By doing so, you specify when and how often you compare the
data sources. You can also specify further options for the comparison.
4. You display the comparison results to see whether there are inconsistencies in the data sources.
5. If you find inconsistencies in the cross-database comparison, you can create messages directly from the
comparison overview.
6. You can create guided procedures to provide guidance to investigate the potential root causes of
inconsistencies.
For more information, see Guided Procedure Authoring (GPA).

5.2.2 Comparison

Definition

To compare data sources, you must create a comparison. A comparison contains information about the source
systems as well as the connection information for the initial comparison. You specify the type of data source
that contains the data that you want to compare. Data sources can be, for example, ABAP or non-ABAP
systems.

Structure

A comparison is structured as follows:

Global Instance Parameters

Business Process Operations

94 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
The Global Instance Parameters area contains all of the generic data for your comparison.

● Name and description

● Extraction strategy
The following strategies are available:
○ Default: Individual data selection in each source system
The data to be compared is selected independently in each system.
○ Use keys of source system 1 to select in source system 2
The data block to be compared is first extracted from system 1. Then the keys identifying each record
are used to extract the required data from system 2.
○ Use keys of source system 2 to select in source system 1
The data block to be compared is first extracted from system 2. Then the keys identifying each record
are used to extract the required data from system 1.
○ Execute comparison in one system
The data is compared in one system only. This extraction strategy is relevant for internal database
comparison and for comparison in an SAP HANA database.
● Data sources from which the data to be compared is to be extracted
For more information, see Data Sources in Cross-Database Comparison [page 108].
● Comparison block size
Block size used to read the data for the comparison. You can use this value for the comparison depending
on your system performance.
● Maximum number of differences
Number of differences detected after which the system terminates the comparison.

Iteration Parameters

The Iteration Parameters area allow you to specify the maximum number of iterations, for example.

Comparison-Specific Filters

The Comparison-Specific Filters area lists the filters that are available for comparing databases. You can specify
values for the variable filters that you create in the comparison. This allows you to create multiple comparisons
and specify different filter values for each. For example, one comparison could have Country = “DE” and
another comparison could have Country = “US”.

Data Model for Comparison

The Data Model for Comparison area contains the tables and fields in the source systems that are to be
compared. The data model is displayed as a graphical user interface on which you can choose the compared
tables and fields from both databases and define mapping between those fields. For more information, see
Creating Data Models [page 98].

5.2.2.1 Processing Comparisons

Use

You define a comparison by following the steps below.

After you have created a comparison, you can change the settings at any time.

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 95
Process

You define a comparison as follows:

1. Create a comparison.
2. Create a data model.
3. Create foreign keys.
4. Map the data fields.
5. Generate extractors for the comparison.
6. Edit the comparison.

5.2.2.1.1 Creating Comparisons

Prerequisites

At least two systems with a data source each have been set up.

Context

A comparison contains information about the systems with the data sources to be compared. You specify the
type of data source that contains the data that you want to compare. The data can be in different types of data
source, such as ABAP or non-ABAP systems.

Procedure

1. On the Comparison or Comparison Overview tab, click Create.

2. Enter a name for your comparison and press Enter .
3. Enter a description for your comparison.

You can change the size of the description field: Choose Preferences and at Height Description (ex) enter
the size.
4. Choose one of the following extraction strategies:
○ Default: Individual data selection in each source system
The data to be compared is selected independently in each system.
○ Use keys of source system 1 to select in source system 2
The data block to be compared is first extracted from system 1. Then the keys identifying each record
are used to extract the required data from system 2.

Business Process Operations

96 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
 ○ Use keys of source system 2 to select in source system 1
The data block to be compared is first extracted from system 2. Then the keys identifying each record
are used to extract the required data from system 1.
○ Execute comparison in one system
The data is compared in one system only. This extraction strategy is relevant for internal database
comparison and for comparison in an SAP HANA database.

Depending on the extraction strategy, the available data source types are displayed for selection.
5. Specify the type of data source in which the data is stored. For more information, see Data Sources in
Cross-Database Comparison [page 108].

6. Click Validation Test Connection to Source 1 and Validation Test Connection to Source 2 to test
the connection.
7. Enter the following information for all of your data sources:
○ Block Size: The block size is used to read the data for comparison. You can improve your system
performance by changing the block size for each of your source systems here.

 Note

Defining block sizes speeds up data extraction. However, the cross-database comparison cannot
perform a binary full-block comparison if the block sizes for the source system are different. This is
relevant only if you expect a near 100% consistency. Usually, it is OK to increase the system load of
SAP Solution Manager if a changed block size reduces the database and network load of a source
system instead.

○ Max No. Differences: The number of differences detected after which the system terminates the
comparison.
Enter 0 if you want the comparison job to be executed regardless of how many differences are
detected. Use this setting to prematurely terminate an incorrectly configured comparison that returns
an error for every data record.
8. Save your entries.

Results

You have created a comparison and must now create the data fields that you want to compare (see Creating
Data Models [page 98]).

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 97
5.2.2.1.2 Entering Tolerances

In cross-database comparison, tolerances can be entered for cases inconsistencies can be disregarded.

Context

In cross-database comparison, an inconsistency is indicated whenever values in two data sources are different.
However, in some cases inconsistencies can be disregarded (e.g. rounding differences). As of SAP Solution
Manager 7.2 SPS 8, it is possible to enter tolerances for these cases.

Procedure

1. Go to the Data Model for Comparison tray.

2. Double-click a mapping connection.
3. In the new Mapping Details window, check Tolerance allowed.
4. In the new tray Tolerance Values, enter a tolerance.

5.2.2.1.3 Creating Data Models

Prerequisites

You have created a comparison (see Creating Comparisons [page 96]).

Context

For the comparison, you select data fields from one or more tables arranged hierarchically and consecutively.
To do this, create comparison tables in your data model, and specify the data sources and data fields that you
want to compare.

Regardless of the type of data source, the objects that you compare are represented as tables in this
application.

You can select as many tables as you want for each system. You join the tables to one another using foreign
keys (see Creating Foreign Keys [page 100]). You assign foreign keys in the root table or the higher-level child
table to the primary keys in the child tables. First create the root table: The first table that you create in a
system automatically becomes the root table. Subsequent tables that you create become child tables. When

Business Process Operations

98 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
the systems are compared, the information from the child tables is read using the foreign keys for the root
table.

Procedure

1. Open your comparison and click Edit.

2. In the Data Model for Comparison area, right-click to open the context menu and choose Element Add
element to table source 1 .

A dialog box appears.

3. Enter the table that you want to compare and select the data fields that you want in include in the
comparison.
4. Save your entries.

The data sources and data fields that you have selected are displayed graphically.

Context fields are marked with the binoculars icon or a D. You can display details by double-clicking the
field. Context fields are not in the comparison scope, but can be relevant for you as well. There are two
types of context fields:
○ Field is only in one of the source systems and cannot be a mapping field.
○ Field is in both source systems but always has different contents (for example, created-by fields); it is
not used as a comparison field.
5. Repeat the above steps to add any other tables that you want to compare to source system 1.
6. Save your entries.

7. To create tables for the second system, right-click to open the context menu and choose Element Add
element to table source 2 .
8. Enter the table that you want to compare and select the data fields that you want to include in the
comparison.
9. Save your entries.

Results

You have selected the tables and data fields that you want to compare.

Now create the foreign keys.

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 99
5.2.2.1.4 Creating Foreign Keys

Prerequisites

You have created at least two tables in a system (see Creating Data Models [page 98]).

Context

When you create multiple tables in a system, you assign foreign keys. This specifies relationships between the
tables in a system. You must define the relationships between the various tables in a system before you can
validate the parameters and the data model, and generate the function modules and SQL statements.

Foreign keys specify the relationship between root and child tables within a system. You assign data fields as
foreign keys in the root table or higher-level child table to the primary keys in the child tables.

Procedure

1. To create foreign keys for the first system, under Data Model for Comparison, choose Propose Foreign Key
Relation.
2. Create the foreign keys by dragging the arrows on the left of the higher-level tables to the child tables.

The system shows the foreign key as an arrow pointing from the root table to the child table.
3. Save your entries.

Results

You have created the foreign keys.

Now map the tables and fields to one another.

Business Process Operations

100 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
5.2.2.1.5 Mapping Data Fields

Prerequisites

● You have created a comparison.

● If you have created more than one table for each system, you have defined the foreign keys between the
tables.

Context

You specify which data fields in the tables in the first system you want to compare to the data fields in the
tables in the second system, as well as which data fields are to be used as comparison keys. You assign a name
to this mapping so that you can identify it later on.

When you create your comparison, you also create fixed and variable filters that you use to restrict the
comparison:

● For fixed filters, you specify the data field and the exact value of the filter. For example, you specify the
restriction Country="DE" when you create the comparison.
● For variable filters, you specify that a certain data field is to be used as a variable filter, for example the
Country data field. Variable filters are displayed in the comparison, where you can specify values for them
such as Country="DE". This allows you to create multiple comparisons using the same data, but specify
different filter values for each. For example, you can enter Country="DE" for one comparison and
Country="US" for another comparison.

You can also define variable filters for just one side of the data model. This is useful, for example, if the field to
be used as a filter exists only in one source system.

For date and time stamp fields, you can define relative filters to show the delta values between comparison
runs. You can use the $DELTA variable for this purpose. For example, CREATED_AT>='$DELTA' would consider
all new source documents created since the last comparison run.

Procedure

1. In the data model for the comparison, map the tables by dragging the arrows provided from left to right.

A dialog box is displayed for each mapping.

2. Enter the following data:
○ Tag Name: Enter a name for the mapping.
○ Comparison Key No.: You create at least one comparison key for the comparison and specify the
sequence of the comparison keys.
Enter 1, 2, 3, and so on, to define the sequence of the comparison keys.

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 101
 Enter 0 to select the data fields for the actual comparison.
3. Variable Filter: Enter a value to indicate that the mapping is a fixed filter.

Enter X to indicate that the mapping is a variable filter.

If you do not want to use the mapping as a filter, leave the field empty.
4. Save your entries.

Results

You have defined the mapping between the data fields of the comparison tables.

Now create the function module for the comparison.

Next Steps

Filters in Cross-Database Comparison [page 119]

Relative Date Filtering [page 120]

5.2.2.1.6 Generating Extractors for a Comparison

Prerequisites

● You have created a comparison.

● You have created comparison tables.
● If required, you have created foreign keys for the tables in a system.
● You have assigned the data fields in the systems to one another.
● For data sources that generate a function module, you have specified the connection that is to be used to
create the initial function module.

Context

After you have created the comparison and the comparison tables, and you have assigned the table
relationships within and between the systems, you generate the extractors for the comparison. When you
generate the extractors, the system creates additional elements that are required for the comparison, such as
RFC-enabled functions in the case of ABAP systems or SQL statements in the case of SQL-based extractions.
You can test the SQL statements in the application before you generate them.

Business Process Operations

102 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
If you change the settings in a comparison, you must generate the comparison again so that the extractors take
into account the changes in the systems.

When the application generates the extractors, it tests the connection and validates the comparison. If errors
occur, the generation is terminated.

 Note

If you have saved your comparison data in an XML or CSV file in SAP Solution Manager, do not generate the
extractors because the system reads the data directly from the file. You can test the specified path.

Automatic Generation of Extractors

Depending on the source type used in your comparison, you can configure the system in such a way that
extractors are generated automatically when you save the comparison. To enable automatic generation, set the
Extractor Generation option to Automatic Generation Only or Both Automatic and Manual Extractor Generation
in Customizing for SAP Solution Manager under Capabilities (Optional) Business Process Operations
Data Consistency Management Cross-Database Comparison Define Cross-Database Comparison Source
Types .

Procedure

1. Test the connection by choosing Validation Test Connection to Source 1 or Validation Test
Connection to Source 2 .

2. Check the comparison by choosing Validation Validate Parameters and Data Model .
3. Generate the extractors by clicking Generate Extractors and choose whether you want to generate the
extractors for source 1, source 2, or both.
4. Proceed as follows depending on the type of data source you are using:
○ If your data source generates an extractor that in turn generates a function module (for example, SAP
ABAP System (RFC to Generated Extractor)), specify a transport request to transport your function
module and save. If you do not want to transport the function module, leave the field empty.
Create the function module in a development system and test it together with the function group. Then
transport the function module to a test system.
To execute the comparison in other systems, transport the function module to the systems that
contain the tables that you want to compare. If you have created a function module in multiple
systems, create multiple comparisons to compare the tables in the various systems.
○ If your data source generates an extractor that in turn generates an SQL statement (for example,
Remote Database (Using ADBC)), check the SQL statement and the count statement.

5.2.2.1.7 Editing Comparisons

Use

You can edit a comparison that you have created at any time.

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 103
Procedure

Changing a Comparison

1. Open the comparison from the comparison overview by selecting it and clicking Edit.
2. Change the comparison data as you require.
3. Save your entries.

Copying a Comparison

You can create a comparison quickly by copying an existing one. To do so, copy a comparison, save it under a
new name, and change the settings of the copied comparison.

1. In the comparison overview, select the comparison that you want to copy and click Copy.
2. In the dialog box that appears, enter the name for your new comparison.
The copied comparison appears in display mode.
3. Click Edit to change the settings for your new comparison.

Deleting a Comparison

 Caution

When you delete a comparison, all of the comparison results are also deleted. If you want to delete only the
comparison results and not the comparison itself, use the Delete Obsolete Comparison Result Details
transaction (DSWP_CDC_REORG). For more information, see Deleting Comparison Results [page 133].

1. In the comparison overview, select the comparison that you want to delete and click Delete.
2. Confirm the popup that appears.

Editing Old Versions of Comparisons

1. Open your comparison and choose a previous version from the Data Model Version dropdown list.
2. Modify the old version of the comparison and save.
Note that if you delete a comparison, all versions of the comparison are deleted.

Result

The system creates a new version of the comparison. When you execute a comparison run, the system uses
the latest version of the comparison.

5.2.2.1.8 Using Aggregates

Use

You use aggregates in cross-database comparisons (CDC) to significantly reduce the comparison volume.

Business Process Operations

104 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
Prerequisites

You have defined the data model and the mapping between the data fields of the comparison tables with
comparison keys.

Features

Comparing Tables with Single Item Data

You can use aggregates for a comparison between systems where table data fields are not aggregated yet.

Comparing Tables with Single Item Data and Aggregated Data

You can use aggregates for a comparison between two systems, for example an SAP ERP system with non-
aggregated table data fields and an SAP BW system with aggregated data.

Activities

First you adjust your data model in the Data Model for Comparison view.

1. Define the comparison key as needed for the aggregation level required.
2. Double-click the table fields for which you want to use an aggregate.
3. In the Aggregate field, select the desired aggregate type using the value help. Choose one of the following
aggregate types:
○ COUNT DISTINCT: Count Number of Distinct Values
You use this aggregation if you are interested in the number of different values, which are used in this
field, within a range of records defined by an individual comparison key. For example, you compare
sales orders between two systems, and you are only interested in the number of different materials
used in a specific order.
○ DISTINCT: Select Distinct Values only
You use this aggregation if you are interested in the distinct values only. For example, you compare
data between two systems where the data is not unique in one of the two systems, and you are only
interested whether a key like a document number exists in both systems.
○ MIN: Minimum Value
CDC extracts and compares the lowest value of this field within a range of records defined by a specific
comparison key.
○ MAX: Maximum Value
CDC extracts and compares the largest value of this field within a range of records defined by a specific
comparison key.
○ AVG: Average Value
CDC extracts and compares the arithmetic average of all values for the field, to which the aggregate is
applied, within a range of records defined by a specific comparison key.
○ SUM: Sum of Values
CDC extracts and compares the sum of values for the field, to which the aggregate is applied, within a
range of records defined by a specific comparison key.

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 105
4. Choose OK.
5. In addition, you can choose Create COUNT GROUP BY in the context menu of the data model.
As a result, an additional count-field is added to the comparison. You use this aggregation if you are
interested in the number of records corresponding to the comparison key only. For example, you compare
sales orders between two systems, and you are only interested in the number of line items in an order, and
not in the individual line items.
6. Start the comparison.

 Note

The result of a comparison run with aggregated values might not be precisely enough for you to analyze the
comparison. For example, if the number of order items deviate, we recommend that you run a detailed
comparison to find out which item is missing.

5.2.2.1.9 Mass Processing of Comparisons

Use

You can create, change, and delete comparisons using the mass processing function.

Procedure

Delete Data Models

1. On the Comparison or Comparison Overview tabs, click Mass Processing.

2. Choose Delete Data Models from the dropdown box and click Continue.
3. Use the search criteria to find and select the data models that you want to delete and click Next.
4. Confirm your selection and click Delete Data Models.

Create Comparisons Using Data from SAP Landscape Transformation Replication Server

1. On the Comparison or Comparison Overview tabs, click Mass Processing.

2. Choose Create Comparisons Using Data from LT Replication Server from the dropdown box and click
Continue.
3. Select the data sources and enter the required data as described under Creating Comparisons [page 96].
4. Enter a prefix for the comparison name. The generated comparisons will consist of this prefix and the
name of the compared table.
5. Enter the RFC destination of the ABAP source system.
6. Enter the RFC destination of the LT server.
7. Select a mass transfer ID. This is a logical grouping of tables that are relevant for replication.
8. Optional: Select the DB connection and the schema of the SAP HANA system.
9. To include the client field in the comparisons, select the Include Client checkbox.
10. Select Test if you want to test the mass creation before performing it.
11. Choose Next. The system lists all the tables available for generation.

Business Process Operations

106 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
12. Select the tables for which you want to create comparisons.
13. Review and submit the comparisons to be created.

Create Comparisons

1. On the Comparison or Comparison Overview tabs, click Mass Processing.

2. Choose Create Comparisons from the dropdown box and click Continue.
3. Select the data sources and enter the required data as described under Creating Comparisons [page 96].
4. If you want to map the client, set the Include Client checkbox.
If you are comparing ABAP-based source systems, the client is not required because the generated or
generic extractor handles clients automatically. You may need to map the client when accessing a remote
database that contains tables replicated from an ABAP system. This depends on the comparison model
and the combination of data source types.
5. If you want the system to generate extractors automatically for each comparison, select the option
Generate Only for Source Types with Automatic Generation from the Extractors to be Generated for Source
dropdown list.
For more information about generating extractors, see Generating Extractors for a Comparison [page 102].
6. In the next step, use the Append Row and Insert Row buttons to enter the tables. Append Row adds a new
row at the end of the table, whereas Insert Row adds a new row below the row currently selected.
Alternatively, upload the tables from a local file.
7. In step 3, enter the data for your comparisons as described under Creating Comparisons [page 96]. Each
of your comparisons is displayed on a separate tab.
8. Optional: In the next step, assign your comparisons to a comparison group.
9. Review and submit your comparisons.

Create Comparisons for the Same Data Model

1. On the Comparison or Comparison Overview tabs, click Mass Processing.

2. Choose Create Comparisons for the Same Data Model from the dropdown box and click Continue.
3. Use the search criteria to find and select your data model and click Next.
4. Enter generic data for your comparisons as described under Creating Comparisons [page 96] and click
Next.
5. Enter names and descriptions for each of your data models and click Next.
6. Enter specific data for each of your comparisons on the relevant tabs and click Next.
7. Optional: In the next step, assign your comparisons to a comparison group.
8. Review and submit your comparisons.

Change Comparisons

1. On the Comparison or Comparison Overview tabs, click Mass Processing.

2. Choose Change Comparisons and click Continue.
A guided procedure appears.
3. Enter the new parameters that are to apply to all of the comparisons you want to change.
For example, change the maximum number of differences to 5000.
4. In the next step, use the search criteria to find and select all of the comparisons you want to change.
You can also save your search by entering a name and clicking the disk icon.
5. In the next step, each of the comparisons you selected appears on a separate tab. You can make any
changes that are comparison-specific here.
6. In the next step, you can add your comparisons to an existing comparison group or you can create a new
group and add them to that.
7. Check and confirm your changes.

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 107
Mass Copy of Comparisons

1. On the Comparison or Comparison Overview tabs, click Mass Processing.

2. Choose Copy Comparisons.
3. Enter the new parameters that are to apply to all of the comparisons you want to create.
4. In the next step, use the search criteria to find and select all of the comparisons you want to copy.
You can also save your search by entering a name and clicking the disk icon.
5. In the next step, enter names for each of your new comparisons.
6. In the next step, each of the comparisons you selected appears on a separate tab. You can make any
changes that are comparison-specific here.
7. In the next step, you can add your comparisons to an existing comparison group or you can create a new
group and add them to that.
8. Review and submit your comparisons.

5.2.2.1.10 Displaying Change Logs

Context

You can track which field values in comparisons were changed or deleted, by whom, and when.

The following fields are tracked:

● Header data attributes

● Multi-lingual descriptions
● Source-specific parameters
● Variable filter criteria (comparison groups only)

Procedure

1. Display your comparison on the Comparison tab.

2. Click Display Change Log.

5.2.3 Data Sources in Cross-Database Comparison

Use

You can compare data from various sources. The system displays the available data sources based on the
selected extraction strategy.

Business Process Operations

108 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
Features

The types of data source that you can use for your comparison can be divided into the following areas:.

● Data sources from an ABAP system:

○ ABAP Data Sources [page 110]
○ "Determine Inconsistent Entries in One System" Data Source [page 111]
● Data sources from an external database:
○ SAP HANA Data Source [page 111]
○ Non-ABAP Data Sources [page 112]
○ OData Service Data Sources [page 113]
○ SAP Business Intelligence Data Sources [page 113]
● Data sources based on a file:
○ XML Data Sources [page 114]
○ CSV Data Sources [page 116]

You can define customer-specific source types in Customizing under SAP Solution Manager Capabilities
(Optional) Business Process Operations Data Consistency Management Cross-Database Comparison
Define Cross-Database Comparison Source Types .

Activities

1. Choose an extraction strategy for your comparison.

The system displays the relevant data source types.
2. Enter the data required to establish a connection to the data sources.
3. Provide the information required to extract data based on the selected data source.
4. Verify that the connection is working by choosing Validation Test Connection to Source 1 or
Validation Test Connection to Source 2 .
5. Click Generate Extractors and generate the extractors for source 1, source 2, or both.

More Information

Creating Comparisons [page 96]

Generating Extractors for a Comparison [page 102]

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 109
5.2.3.1 Data Sources from an ABAP System

You can extract the data to be compared from an ABAP system or you can compare the data that exists only in
one system. For more information, see the following sections:

● ABAP Data Sources [page 110]

● "Determine Inconsistent Entries in One System" Data Source [page 111]

5.2.3.1.1 ABAP Data Sources

Use

You can extract data for comparison from ABAP systems.

Cross-database comparison uses RFC function modules to extract data from managed ABAP systems. You can
specify which of the following types you want to use.

● Generated extractor function module

This function module is specific to your data model. It is generated for each comparison and transported
from the development system to the production system. Each time a data model is changed, new extractor
function modules are generated and retransported. This also allows complex models including specific
custom code inside the extractor.
● Generic extractor function module
This function module receives selection criteria from the cross-database comparison application and can
be used for most data models.

Features

The following ABAP data source types are available:

SAP ABAP System (RFC to Generated Extractor)

In this case, data is read by a generated function module. The following data is required:

● RFC Connection (Read): Connection to read the data from the ABAP Dictionary of the source system.
● RFC Connection (Trusted): Connection to create the function module in the source system.
● Function Group: Name of the function group (new or existing function group).
● Function Name: Name of the function module generated by the application.

SAP ABAP System (RFC to Generic Extractor)

The data is read by a generic function module. The following data is required:

● RFC Destination: Connection to read the data from the ABAP Dictionary of the source system.
● SQL Statement: SELECT: Select-clause of the generated select statement, identifying the data fields to be
extracted.
● SQL Statement: FROM: From-clause of the generated select statement, identifying the tables to be read.

Business Process Operations

110 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
● SQL Statement: Fixed WHERE: A part of the where-clause of the generated select statement corresponding
to the fixed filters of the data model.
● SQL Statement: ORDER BY: Extracted data has to be ordered by the keys.

5.2.3.1.2 "Determine Inconsistent Entries in One System"

Data Source

You can compare data in a single database, for example, missing header entries for dependent tables. This data
source enhances the existing internal database comparison features. For more information, see Internal
Database Comparison [page 147].

 Note

To use this data source type, choose the extraction strategy Execute Comparison in One System.

SQL statements are generated for the different comparison cases:

● Only dependent data exists: SQL query: In source 1 only

● Only header data exists: SQL query: In source 2 only
● Data exists in header and dependent data but with different data fields: SQL query: Different data

5.2.3.2 Data Sources from an External Database

You can extract the data to be compared from a data source that connects to a database. For more
information, see the following sections:

● SAP HANA Data Source [page 111]

● Non-ABAP Data Sources [page 112]
● OData Service Data Sources [page 113]
● Business Intelligence Data Sources [page 113]

5.2.3.2.1 SAP HANA Data Source

Use

You can compare data between an SAP HANA database and another database (SAP HANA or non-SAP HANA),
directly in an SAP HANA database. Remote access to the second database is provided by SAP HANA smart
data access, which accesses remote data as if it were local tables in SAP HANA, without copying the data into
SAP HANA. To minimize the amount of data transferred, only key fields and row hashes of multiple fields are
compared, not single values.

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 111
  Note

To use this data source type, choose the extraction strategy Execute comparison in one system (also see
Comparison [page 94]).

Features

The following graphic provides an overview of cross-database comparison in an SAP HANA database.

Cross-Database Comparison in One SAP HANA Database

The following information is required to extract the data from the SAP HANA database:

● Database Connection: Connection to read the data for the comparison.

● Database Schema: Database schema from which the data is read.

5.2.3.2.2 Non-ABAP Data Sources

You can extract data from non-ABAP data sources using the data source type Remote Database (Using ADBC).
The data is read via ABAP Database Connectivity (ADBC) using a secondary database connection. A native
SQL statement is generated to extract the data.

Business Process Operations

112 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
The following data is required:

● Database Connection: Connection to read the data for the comparison.

● Database Schema: Database schema from which the data is read.
● SQL String (Count): The SQL statement used to count the objects in the comparison is displayed after
generation.
● SQL String (Extract): The SQL statement used to run the comparison is displayed after generation.

5.2.3.2.3 OData Service Data Sources

Use

You can extract data from OData Service data sources. Extracting data from OData sources allows you, for
example, to compare data in a “hybrid” scenario where some of your data is stored in the cloud (and there is a
corresponding OData service for it) and other data is stored on-premise.

Prerequisites

You have created an RFC connection of type HTTP Connection to External Server and specified the target
system on the Technical Settings tab of transaction SM59. For example, you have entered the target host
services.odata.org and the path prefix /V2/OData/OData.svc/.

Activities

If you select OData Service as your source type, you must enter the RFC destination for the OData service. You
then create your data model by specifying entities of the OData service as the tables and properties of the
OData service as the fields.

On generation, a query is created for this data model. When you run the comparison, the query is used to
extract the data.

5.2.3.2.4 Business Intelligence Data Sources

Use

Cross-database comparison provides support for native SAP Business Information Warehouse by enabling you
to extract data directly from SAP BW.

To do so, you enter the RFC destination to your SAP BW system.

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 113
Prerequisites

You have created an RFC connection to your SAP BW system.

Activities

If you select Business Intelligence (MDX Query) as source type, you must enter the RFC destination to your SAP
BW system. You then create a data model by specifying the InfoCubes as the tables and dimensions or key
figures as the fields. Dimensions are automatically marked as key fields in the data model.

On generation, an MDX query is created for this data model. When you run your comparison, the MDX query is
sent to SAP BW over the RFC connection that you specified.

If you select SAP BW Data Manager Read Interface as a source type, you must enter the RFC destination to your
SAP BW system. You then create a data model by specifying the InfoCubes as the tables and the
characteristics and key figures as table columns.

The information in the data model is then used to call the SAP BW Data Manager Read Interface.

You can use characteristics as key or data fields.

Key figures can be used as data fields.

Characteristics and key figures can be used as context fields.

The source type Business Intelligence (MDX Query) supports filters on data model and comparison instance
level. However, a combination of filters is not possible.

5.2.3.3 Data Sources from a File

You can extract the data to be compared from an XML file that is stored on the application server or on your
local PC, or from a CSV file that is stored on the application server. For more information, see the following
sections:

● XML Data Sources [page 114]

● CSV Data Sources [page 116]

5.2.3.3.1 XML Data Sources

Use

You can extract data from XML files that are stored on the SAP Solution Manager application server or on a
local PC.

Business Process Operations

114 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
Features

The following data source types are available:

XML Files on Application Server

The following data is required to extract data that is stored on the application server:

● Host Name: The application server that hosts the data

● File Path: Path on the SAP Solution Manager application server under which the XML file containing the
data to be compared is saved.
● File Name: Name of the XML file.

You have the following options when using XML files:

● You can select several XML files for processing, by specifying a file path and no file name. The system
processes all files in this path.
● You can enter the following parameters in the File Name field:
○ $TODAY: The system selects all files that have today's date in the format YYYYMMDD in the file name.
For example, if the date is September 21, 2015 and you enter data$TODAY.xml, the system might
return a file named data20150921.xml.
○ $YESTERDAY: The system selects all files that have yesterday's date in the format YYYYMMDD in the
file name. For example, if the date is September 22, 2015 and you enter data$YESTERDAY.xml, the
system might return a file named data20150921.xml.
○ Wildcard: You can use an asterisk (*) to stand in for any characters in the file name, and you can
combine this with the parameters mentioned above.
● Use the following parameters in the Created from and Created to fields to enter a start and end time for the
creation date of XML files.
○ $TIMES: timestamp now (offset in seconds). Example: $TIMES-10
○ $TIMEM: timestamp now (offset in minutes). Example: $TIMEM-30
○ $TIMEH: timestamp now (offset in hours). Example: $TIMEH-12
○ $TIMED: timestamp now (offset in days). Example: $TIMED-1
● You can enter XML transformation parameters in the Transformation field. Data is then changed from a
different format to the required asXML format.

 Note

The cross-database comparison source type “XML files on application server” requires either XML files
in asXML format, or XML files in any other format and a transformation to change the required data
into asXML format.

asXML is the format that results from using a transformation ID for an internal ABAP table.

XML Files on Local PC

You do not have to enter any source-specific parameters for your comparison. Instead, you specify the file
name directly in the comparison. For more information, see Creating Comparisons [page 96].

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 115
5.2.3.3.2 CSV Data Sources

Use

You can extract data from one or more CSV files that are stored on the SAP Solution Manager application
server. Extracting data from CSV files allows you, for example, to compare data in a “hybrid” scenario where
some of your data is stored in the cloud and other data is stored on-premise, provided that you have first
extracted your data in the cloud to a CSV file.

When you run the comparison, the data from the specified CSV files is read directly. In this case, no function
module or query is generated.

Prerequisites

You have stored the CSV files that are to be compared on an SAP Solution Manager application server.

Activities

The following data is required:

● Host Name: The application server that hosts the data

● Path Name: Path to the directory in which the CSV file is stored.
● File Name: Name of the CSV file.

You have the following options when using CSV files:

● You can select several CSV files for processing by specifying a path but no file name. The system processes
all files in this path.
● You can enter the following parameters in the File Name field:
○ $TODAY: The system selects all files that have today's date in the format YYYYMMDD in the file name.
For example, if the date is September 21, 2015 and you enter data$TODAY.csv, the system might
return a file named data20150921.csv.
○ $YESTERDAY: The system selects all files that have yesterday's date in the format YYYYMMDD in the
file name. For example, if the date is September 22, 2015 and you enter data$YESTERDAY.csv, the
system might return a file named data20150921.csv.
○ Wildcard: You can use an asterisk (*) to stand in for any characters in the file name, and you can
combine this with the parameters mentioned above.
● Use the following parameters in the Created From and Created To fields to enter a start and end time for the
creation date of CSV files.
○ $TIMES: timestamp now (offset in seconds). Example: $TIMES-10
○ $TIMEM: timestamp now (offset in minutes). Example: $TIMEM-30
○ $TIMEH: timestamp now (offset in hours). Example: $TIMEH-12
○ $TIMED: timestamp now (offset in days). Example: $TIMED-1

Business Process Operations

116 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
● You can specify whether the CSV files that are to be compared contain a header row. If you set this value to
X, the first row in the CSV file is ignored.
● If your CSV files are separated by a character other than a comma (for example, a semicolon), you can
enter the delimiter used in your files here.

5.2.3.4 Extra Fields in Cross-Database Comparison

You can use extra fields in cross-database comparison to maintain additional fields for source types that
support Data Dictionary integration.

For example, if you want to compare data fields with different formats and therefore want to transform their
content, you can use extra fields in the mapping.

Possible use cases:

● You want to concatenate the value of two or more source fields into one extra field to compare this value
with another system.
● You want to compare a substring and you want to extract its value from an original field to put it into an
extra field.
● You want a conditional comparison on several possible source fields depending on some application logic.

The transformation of content is typically done as custom-specific code in the Business Add-In which is called
after the extraction. The resulting values are written in the extra fields.

For source types that support Data Dictionary integration, the system lists the fields available. It also lists the
fields that were added manually.

 Note

For source types that do not support Data Dictionary integration, only the lower section is visible.

The SELECTED flags indicate the fields relevant for the current data model.

After having assigned extra fields to a source table, you can see them in the Data Model for Comparison tray.
Here, you can change their order.

 Note

For source types that support Data Dictionary integration, you can use extra fields for data field mappings
and as display-only fields.

For source types that do not support Data Dictionary integration, you can use extra fields for data field
mappings, for key field mappings, for filtering, and as display-only fields.

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 117
5.2.3.4.1 Maintaining Extra Fields

This topic contains information about the maintenance of extra fields for source types that support Data
Dictionary integration.

Procedure

1. In the comparison, click the Edit pushbutton.

2. In the Data Model for Comparison tray, double-click a table.

The Fields for Table popup screen opens.

3. In the Fields added manually grid, choose Append Row, Insert Row, or Delete Row.
4. Select OK.

5.2.4 Mass Processing Functions in Cross-Database

Comparison

Use

Instead of managing data for each comparison manually, you can execute various mass processing functions
to change a lot of data at once.

Features

Cross-database comparison enables you to carry out the following mass changes:

● Create general comparisons

● Generate extractors
● Delete data models
● Create comparisons for the same data model
● Create comparisons using data from the SAP Landscape Transformation Replication Server
The system uses an RFC connection to retrieve a list of tables that are replicated between the SAP system
and the SAP HANA database from the replication model. The list is used as a basis for generating
comparisons. One comparison is created for each table, and the tables are compared 1:1 between the SAP
system and the SAP HANA database.

Business Process Operations

118 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
Activities

1. Start all mass processing options from the Comparison or Comparison Overview tab.
2. Choose Mass Processing.
3. Select the mass change option that you want to use.
4. Enter the required parameters to execute the mass change, depending on the selected option, and follow
the guided procedure.
5. Review and submit your changes.
6. Confirm the changes.

More Information

Mass Processing of Comparisons [page 106]

For more information, in the SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com , search for Overview of SAP Landscape
Transformation.

5.2.5 Filters in Cross-Database Comparison

Use

You can use various types of filters in the cross-database comparison to restrict the data that is compared. You
can create filters for both source systems or for one source only.

Prerequisites

You have administration authorization for cross-database comparison (role SAP_CDC_ADMIN).

Features

The following filter types are available in cross-database comparison. You specify the filters at source level for
the relevant fields when you map the comparison tables (see Mapping Data Fields [page 101]).

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 119
Filter Type Comparison Comparison Run

Fixed filter with fixed values You can define fixed filter values at Fetches data from generated extractor
source level, either for both sources or using the hard-coded where-clause.
only one source. The value is used dur­
ing the generation to create a hard-
coded where-clause.

Variable filter with variable values The Variable Filter checkbox is set in the The comparison run passes the filters
comparison, either in the mapping area to the extractor, which handles the filter
(which means that it is relevant for both values dynamically.
sources) or in the source area (which
means that it is relevant for that source
only).

Fixed filter with relative dates If a filter for a comparison contains the The comparison run translates the rela­
syntax for relative dates (starting with tive date syntax into an absolute time
$), it is not generated as a hard-coded stamp and passes the filters to the ex­
filter in the extractor. tractor, which handles the filter values
dynamically.

Variable filter with relative dates The Variable Filter checkbox is set in the The comparison run translates the rela­
comparison, either in the mapping area tive date syntax into an absolute time
(which means that it is relevant for both stamp and passes the filters to the ex­
sources) or in the source area (which tractor, which handles the filter values
means that it is relevant for that source dynamically.
only).

You can maintain the relative date syn­

tax (starting with $) in the comparison.
The filters are used for all comparison
runs of this comparison.

More Information

Relative Date Filtering [page 120]

5.2.5.1 Relative Date Filtering

Use

You can enter specific values to define relative filters for dates, which can then be used for time-dependent
comparisons. For example, you might want to compare new documents created on today’s date.

To perform relative date filtering, that is, to calculate relative dates instead of absolute dates, cross-database
comparison provides syntax for defining fixed points and offsets for relative dates.

Business Process Operations

120 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
Prerequisites

In the details popup for a mapped field or a source-specific field, you have set the filter type to Relative Time
Stamp.

Features

● Instead of a fixed (absolute) date, you can enter a keyword for the start date (using $ as a prefix) and
optionally an additional offset for the difference in days:
Syntax = <StartDate>[<Difference>]
You can replace <StartDate> with the following keywords:

Keyword for <StartDate> Description Example Using 2013-04-25 as a Ref­

erence Date

$TODAY Current date (today) 2013-04-25

$FDOCW First day of current week 2013-04-22

$LDOCW Last day of current week 2013-04-28

$FDOCM First day of current month 2013-04-01

$LDOCM Last day of current month 2013-04-30

$FDOCY First day of current year 2013-01-01

$LDOCY Last day of current year 2013-12-31

$FDOPW First day of previous week 2013-04-15

$LDOPW Last day of previous week 2013-04-21

$FDOPM First day of previous month 2013-03-01

$LDOPM Last day of previous month 2013-03-31

$FDOPY First day of previous year 2012-01-01

$LDOPY Last day of previous year 2012-12-31

$FDONW First day of next week 2013-04-29

$LDONW Last day of next week 2013-05-05

$FDONM First day of next month 2013-05-01

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 121
 Keyword for <StartDate> Description Example Using 2013-04-25 as a Ref­
erence Date

$LDONM Last day of next month 2013-05-31

$FDONY First day of next year 2014-01-01

$LDONY Last day of next year 2014-12-31

$TIMES Time stamp now (offset in seconds) n/a

$TIMEM Time stamp now (offset in minutes) n/a

$TIMEH Time stamp now (offset in hours) n/a

$TIMED Time stamp now (offset in days) n/a

$DELTA Delta mode (timestamp of last run) n/a

 Note

These dates are based on the Gregorian calendar and as such, Monday is considered to be the first day
of the week.

● You can enter the <difference> as a positive or negative offset in days using the following signs:
○ The plus sign (+) increases days, that is, the start date is moved into the future.
○ The minus sign (-) decreases days, that is, the start date is moved into the past.

 Example

$TODAY-2: day before yesterday

$TODAY+2: day after tomorrow

● You can combine the relative date selection in ranges using the From and To fields of the selection criteria,
for example, to define intervals.

 Example

To count the number of documents that were created in the last month, you enter the following
selection criteria: <Field Name> = $FDOPM to $LDOPM.

● For the ABAP source type, filter-fields with the following data types support the syntax for relative dates:

DDic Data Type ABAP Data Type Date Format

DATS D YYYYMMDD

CHAR 10 C 10 YYYYMMDD

CHAR 14 C 14 YYYYMMDDhhmmss

Business Process Operations

122 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
 DDic Data Type ABAP Data Type Date Format

DEC 15 P8 YYYYMMDDhhmmss

DEC 21 P 11 YYYYMMDDhhmmss,mmmuuun

TIMS C6 hhmmss

Legend:
○ YYYY = year
○ MM = month
○ DD = day
○ hh = hour
○ mm = minute
○ ss = second
○ mmmuuun = milliseconds / microseconds / nanoseconds

 Note

In data types containing time stamps (hhmmss), the system enters 000000 by default.

Exception: For start date keywords using a “Last Day” option (for example, $LDOCM), a maximum time
stamp (235959) is set by the system.

The keywords $TIME<x> and $DELTA are filled with exact values.

● You can also use relative date filtering for the ADBC source type. However, the supported date and time-
stamp data types depend on the database management system that is used.
● For the $TIME<x> and $DELTA keywords, the system calculates an exact time and not only a date.
The following keywords use the current system time stamp at the time of data comparison: $TIMES,
$TIMEM, $TIMEH, and $TIMED. The system calculates exact time stamps using DEC 15 and DEC 21 data
types (see table above). You can use different time units for the offset, for example, seconds, minutes,
hours, or days.
$DELTA stores the time stamp of each data comparison run, and at the next run, it selects the data created
since the last run by entering >=$DELTA in the time stamp filter. You can enter an additional offset in
minutes (plus or minus <Difference>).
Both keywords support an additional <Difference> offset. For $DELTA , the value entered is interpreted
as minutes.
The time stamp is calculated based on UTC time. If the database table that is used stores time stamps in a
different time format, you can use the <Difference> operator to adjust the value.

5.2.6 Comparison Group

Definition

A comparison group is a collection of comparisons that are assigned to a specific group type. A comparison
can be included in several comparison groups.

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 123
The type of comparison group defines the behavior of the comparison group.

 Example

Group type A specifies that comparisons are grouped because they affect the same business object (for
example, all comparisons that check business partners).

Group type B specifies that comparisons are grouped because they allow a correlated result, for example,
transfer master data from one source system to multiple target systems.

Use

You can use comparison groups for various purposes:

● Group result view to display the correlated results for multiple systems within a comparison group
● Filter for the administration view
● Quick assessment of the data distribution from one source system to multiple target systems
● Assessment of data distribution across a chain of systems

Structure

The following comparison group types are provided by default:

● Display
This type of comparison group combines comparisons and displays them in a comprehensive
administration view. The comparisons can be started and stopped together.
● Sequence
This type of comparison group combines comparisons that belong to a distribution of master data across a
chain of systems. Groups of this type can be used as filter criteria in the administration view, they can be
started and stopped, and they are correlated.
● Distribution
This type of comparison group combines comparisons that belong to a distribution of master data from a
single source system to multiple target systems. Groups of this type can be used as filter criteria in the
administration view, they can be started and stopped, they have a validation function, and they are
correlated.
● Split
This type of comparison group combines comparisions that you have created by splitting up a large
comparison using the mass procedure for splits. Groups of this type are used to split large comparisons
into smaller comparisons.

More Information

Creating and Editing Comparison Groups [page 125]

Creating and Editing Comparison Group Types [page 125]

Business Process Operations

124 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
Executing Comparison Group Runs [page 126]

5.2.6.1 Creating and Editing Comparison Groups

Procedure

1. On the Comparison Group tab, select a group type from the table.
2. Click Create Group.
3. Choose Edit/Display and enter a name and description for your group.
4. Add the required comparisons to your group.
5. Save your entries.

5.2.6.2 Creating and Editing Comparison Group Types

Context

You can use the comparison group types delivered by SAP or create and edit your own group types.

Procedure

1. On the Comparison Group tab page, click Create Group Type.

2. Make sure that you are in edit mode and enter a name and description for your group type.
3. Enter an implementing class to define the behavior of the group type. You can choose from the following
options:

Implementing Class Description Prerequisites

Display Completely independent comparisons None

can be grouped together irrespective
of the business object.

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 125
 Implementing Class Description Prerequisites

Distribution Using this group type, you can model ○ All comparisons have the same

the distribution of a business object source system and source type.

from one system to many target sys­ ○ The mapping and key fields are
tems, for example, business partners identical.
from system A to system B, system A
to system C, system A to system D,
and so on.

Sequence You can model the distribution of a ○ All comparisons have the same

business object from one system mapping and key fields.

across many systems, for example, ○ Source type and connection data
business partners from system A to of the target system in a compari­
system B to system C, and so on. son (for example, system A to
system B) correspond to the data
in the subsequent comparison
(system B to system C).

Split You can split a large comparison into Since a split group type is a split of
multiple smaller comparisons using one comparison into multiple smaller
the mass procedure for splits. ones, all comparisons need to be iden­
tical except for the variable filters.

4. Save your entries.

5. Select an existing transport or create a new transport request for the group type.
6. Click OK.

5.2.6.3 Executing Comparison Group Runs

Context

You can execute comparison group runs from the Comparison Group tab page and from the Comparison Run
Overview tab page.

Procedure

1. On the Comparison Group tab page, select a comparison group.

2. Choose Start Group.

The system displays a dialog window.

Business Process Operations

126 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
3. Choose a scheduling option:
○ Create Job Only
The system schedules the comparison job using transaction SM37. The name of the job is
CDC_<comparison or comparison group name>. The job is now scheduled. To display the
scheduling, choose Job Overview.
○ Create Job and Start Immediately
The system executes the comparison run immediately.
○ Start Comparison Run Immediately in Dialog
The comparison is executed in dialog, not as a background job. You must choose this option if your
source type is XML File on Local PC.
4. Choose OK.

You can stop a running job by choosing Stop Group, for example, if the job is taking too long and you want
to change the settings.
5. Choose Show Group Result.

Results

The results of the completed run is displayed in the Cross-Database Comparison pop-up window. In the pop-up
window, you can choose a type of inconsistency to view details of the inconsistencies in the Group Result
Details table. If you want to check the results of an earlier run, you can select the run in the Group Run selector
field.

The results of the run are also displayed on the Comparison Overview tab page.

5.2.7 Evaluating Comparisons

Use

You can schedule comparisons and display the results for each comparison run. You specify whether the
comparison is to be executed immediately or scheduled for another time.

Prerequisites

You have created a comparison.

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 127
Process

To perform a comparison, proceed as follows:

1. Schedule when the comparison is to be executed (see Scheduling Comparisons [page 128]).
2. Optional: Stop the comparison (see Stopping Comparisons [page 131]).
3. Display the comparison results (see Displaying Comparison Results [page 131]).
4. Delete any comparison results that are no longer required (see Deleting Comparison Results [page 133]).

5.2.7.1 Scheduling Comparisons

Use

To trigger a comparison, you start the comparison from the comparison overview. This schedules the
comparison run. The system creates a job in transaction SM37, which you can either execute immediately or
schedule manually.

You can also schedule a comparison to run regularly and start the job immediately. The run ID is increased each
time.

 Note

The following procedure describes how to schedule comparisons in the WebDynpro user interface. You can
also schedule comparisons in batch jobs using transaction DSWP_CDC_START, which provides more
advanced features. For more information, see the documentation in the transaction.

Prerequisites

You have created a comparison.

Procedure

Schedule a Job

1. On the Comparison Overview tab, select a comparison and click Start.

The Select Execution Mode dialog box is displayed.
2. Select one of the following options:
○ Create Job Only: The system schedules the comparison job using transaction SM37. The name of the
job is CDC_<comparison or comparison group name>. The job is now scheduled. To display the
scheduling, choose Job Overview.
○ Create Job and Start Immediately: The system executes the comparison run immediately.

Business Process Operations

128 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
 ○ Start Comparison Run Immediately in Dialog: The comparison is executed in dialog, not as a
background job. You must choose this option if your source type is XML File on Local PC.
3. Choose Special Options to display the special options:
○ If you check Rescan Identified Inconsistencies (Manual Iteration), the system starts a manual iteration.
○ If you check Attempt to Restart the Canceled/Aborted Previous Run, the system does not generate a
new run ID. Instead, it tries to restart the previously canceled run.
○ Choose a comparison scenario for further options. For more information, see Comparison Scenarios
[page 130].
4. Click OK to start the comparison run.

Display Results

● On the Comparison Overview tab, find your comparison and check the overview of the evaluation status.
For example:
○ Run Status: Shows the status of the comparison run.
The following statuses are possible:

Status Description

Initial You have created but not yet scheduled the comparison or group run.

Running The comparison run is currently being executed.

Iterating The comparison run is currently executing an iteration.

Finished The comparison run was executed successfully.

Terminated The comparison run aborted with a system error.

(Aborted)

Paused The comparison run was canceled by the user.

(Canceled)

Confirmed The result of the comparison run was confirmed.

○ Inconsistency Status of Comparison: Shows whether the last comparison run found any
inconsistencies.
○ Run ID: Shows how often the comparison has been executed.
○ Progress: Shows the extent to which the comparison job has been executed.
○ Start Time: Shows when the comparison job was last started.
○ User Name: Shows the user who last started the comparison job.

Result

When the comparison has been run successfully, you can display the details of the comparison results by
clicking the icon in the Inconsistency Status of Comparison column or by selecting the comparison in the table
and choosing Show Last Result. For more information, see Displaying Comparison Results [page 131].

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 129
5.2.7.1.1 Comparison Scenarios

Use

When you start a comparison run, you can choose a comparison scenario from the special options. The
comparison scenarios influence the runtime behavior of the data extraction and comparison engine.

 Caution

Use these scenarios for special purposes only, such as troubleshooting, debugging, or exceptional
comparisons. Familiarize yourself with them and how they affect system behavior. Some of the scenarios
may have a performance impact, while others may even falsify the result or fail to show existing
inconsistencies correctly.

Features

You can choose from the following comparison scenarios:

● Count Expected Records Only (No Comparison)

This scenario counts the number of expected records in each source system. However, it does not check
that the keys are identical. Therefore, an identical count does not necessarily mean that the source
systems contain the same objects.
● Detailed Comparison Only if Counts Are Not Identical
This scenario first counts the number of expected records in each source system. If the number of
expected records is identical, the system does not perform a comparison. However, if the counts are
different, a detailed extraction and comparison is performed. This does not include a check for identical
keys. Therefore, an identical count does not necessarily mean that the source systems contain the same
objects.
● Std Comparison with Details Results up to "Max Differences"
This is the recommended, default option for a standard comparison. The system first counts the number of
expected records in both source systems. It then performs a detailed extraction and comparison. If the
number of inconsistencies identified exceeds the maximum number of differences (as defined in the
comparison), the comparison run is stopped prematurely.
● Continue Comparison After "Max Differences" but w/o Details
This scenario is similar to the standard comparison but in this case, the comparison continues even if the
maximum number of differences has been reached. The system does not record any further details; it
simply increases the count of any inconsistent key figures.

 Caution

This option can dramatically increase the total runtime, especially if there is a systematic error such as
an incorrectly defined comparison or if the source systems are entirely different.

Business Process Operations

130 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
5.2.7.2 Stopping Comparisons

Prerequisites

A comparison job is currently being executed.

Context

You can stop a comparison or group job that is currently running. For example, you might want to stop a job if
the comparison is taking too long and you want to adjust the settings, or if the comparison has already found
numerous inconsistencies and you want to analyze them before continuing.

If you want to reschedule the job, call transaction SM37 and reschedule the comparison there. The name of the
job is CDC_<comparison or group name>.

Procedure

1. On the Comparison Overview or Comparison Group tab, select a comparison or group and choose Stop or
Stop Group respectively.
2. The comparison job stops as soon as possible.

Results

You can now change the comparison, group, or run before restarting the comparison run.

5.2.7.3 Displaying Comparison Results

Prerequisites

You have executed a comparison run.

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 131
Context

After you have completed a comparison run or comparison group run, you can display the results of the
comparison by selecting it and clicking Show Last Result.

The results are broken down as follows:

● Global Result Parameters

This area provides an overview of the comparison used in the run. You can display the comparison details
by clicking Other Commands and then Show Comparison Definition.
● Result Overview
This area summarizes the comparison results.
● Result Details
This area provides detailed information about the inconsistency type selected in the result overview.
● Comparison Runtime Statistics
This area provides information about the duration and speed of the job, along with the actual block size for
the source systems and whether any identical blocks were found in the comparison.

Procedure

1. On the Comparison Overview tab, select a comparison or group and choose Show Last Result.

The results of the last comparison are displayed.

2. Optional: If you want to display other results for the comparison run, select a value from the Run ID
dropdown list in the Global Result Parameters area.
3. In the Result Overview, select Objects Exist Only in System 1, Objects Exist Only in System 2, or Objects with
Differences.

The details are displayed in the Result Details area.

 Note

If you want to change the text used for the inconsistency types, click Rename Inconsistency Types and
enter your own text in the Comparison-Specific Text column. Your new texts are then displayed for this
comparison only. If you remove your custom texts from the table, the system reverts to the default
texts.

4. Choose Hide/Show Context Fields to display further fields in addition to the mapped key fields. These fields
are not in the comparison scope but may also be relevant to you. There are two types of Context Fields:
○ Fields that are only available in one of the source systems and cannot be used as a mapping field.
○ Fields that are available in both source systems but that always have different contents (for example,
created-by fields) and are, therefore, not used as comparison fields.
5. Optional: Expand the Comparison Runtime Statistics area and review the statistics.

Business Process Operations

132 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
5.2.7.4 Deleting Comparison Results

Use

The volume of data recorded in the comparison results grows over time. You can therefore delete data that you
no longer require. In doing so, you can specify the following:

● How old the data for deletion is

● Exactly what information you want to delete – just the details for a specific result or the entire result
including the summary and details

Prerequisites

You have run comparisons and are displaying the comparison results.

Procedure

1. Call transaction DSWP_CDC_REORG.

2. Enter data as required.
Specify the comparison from which you want to delete data. If you do not specify a comparison, the
system deletes the data from all comparisons.
Specify which results you want to delete. For example, all results older than 30 days, but not the last three
results.
Specify which information you want to delete from the results.
3. Choose Execute ( F8 ).

 Note

To ensure that the comparison results are deleted regularly, schedule report DSWP_CDC_COMPARE_REORG
as a background job in transaction SM37.

Result

The comparison results are deleted based on your selection.

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 133
5.2.8 Creating Messages

Prerequisites

You are authorized to create messages in IT Service Management.

Context

If you find inconsistencies in the cross-database comparison, you can create messages directly from the
comparison run overview.

Procedure

1. On the Comparison Overview tab, click Create Incident.

2. Choose the type of message you want to create and click OK.

The system displays the message form and automatically enters various data such as the description and
the fact that the message is related to a comparison run.

 Note

If you want to change the predefined message text, implement enhancement spot
DSWP_CDC_INCI_PARA.

3. Complete the information and choose Send.

Results

You have created a message and dispatched it to the relevant support team.

5.2.9 Duplicate Checker

The duplicate checker is a functionality within the cross-database comparison. You can find and list duplicated
keys in a system.

You can use these results to clean up a data source or to fine tune a data model.

The following ABAP data source types are supported:

Business Process Operations

134 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
● Remote database (using ADBC)
● ABDY SAP ABAP system (RFC to Generic Extractor)

 Note

The duplicate checker analysis can only be done for comparison keys. There is no extraction and
comparison of further data fields

5.2.9.1 Using the duplicate checker

When getting a duplicate key exception for a comparison run you can check for duplicate keys in the source
system.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, select Cross-Database Comparison.

2. Go to Comparison Overview.
3. Select a comparison.
4. Select Start.
5. Expand the tray Special Options and choose a Comparison Scenario e.g.

Duplicates Check in Source 1,

Duplicate Check in Source 2 or

Duplicates Check in both Sources.

6. Select OK (Start using selected parameters).
7. To have the results of the duplicate check displayed, click on the status icons in the column Incon. Status -
Inconsistency Status of Comparison.

5.2.10 Drill-down comparisons

You can use the drill-down comparison to perform a detailed comparison of the results of a leading
comparison.

Use

You can assign multiple leading and drill-down comparisons and trigger them automatically or manually.

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 135
Features

The result of a leading comparison can be applied as a filter in the drill-down comparison by considering the
keys of the leading comparison for the selection of data.

On the result screen, you can navigate between the results of a leading and a drill-down comparison.

To add or delete columns, click  (Personalize) in the Define Drill-down Comparisons window.

5.2.10.1 Defining drill-down comparisons

You can add, delete, and validate new and existing drill-down comparisons.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, select Cross-Database Comparison.

2. On the pushbutton Other commands, select Define Drill-down Comparisons.
3. In the new window, select Add.

The new comparison is added at the end of the list.

4. To choose a leading comparison and a drill-down comparison, click  in the relevant columns.
5. Enter a Description and choose a Comparison Scenario (Runtime Behavior)..
6. Select whether you want to start the drill-down comparison automatically.
7. Select whether a key transfer is mandatory or not required.

If you choose Key transfer not required, a full comparison is triggered. If you choose the option Key transfer
mandatory and the transfer fails because no matching key fields are found, the drill-down comparison will
not start.
8. Save your drill-down comparison.

5.2.10.2 Performing drill-down comparisons

You can select, schedule and perform drill-down comparisons.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, select Cross-Database Comparison.

2. On the Cross-Database Comparison screen, tick the leading comparison you want to drill down on.

Business Process Operations

136 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
3. Select  (Trigger Drill-Down).
4. A new window opens (Schedule drill-down comparisons). Here, you can select individual drill-down
comparisons manually. You can also review and change the scheduling and the proposed comparison
scenario.

5.3 Transactional Correctness

Use

Transactional correctness is an important database consistency requirement. If multiple programs update the
same information simultaneously, data correctness can be at risk if the changes are not performed in an
isolated manner. Locks control the access to data by multiple programs. In the event of a system failure, the
logical unit of work principle ensures that the data affected is still consistent after recovery. The transactional
correctness tool checks the transactional correctness of your ABAP programs.

Integration

The transactional correctness evaluation is based on the software principles of atomicity, consistency,
isolation, and durability (ACID principles).

Prerequisites

Depending on the functions you want to use, the following prerequisites apply:

Use Prerequisite

Use the transactional correctness tool directly in the man­ You have installed ST-PI 2008_1 or above
aged system

Evaluate enqueues and dequeues You have installed ST-PI 2008_1 SP9

Use the transactional correctness tool in SAP Solution Man­ You have installed ST 7.10 SP12
ager to evaluate transactional correctness in one of your
managed systems

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 137
Features

● The transactional correctness tool is a report that evaluates a transaction performance trace.
● You can check transactional correctness either directly in the managed system or from the Transactional
Correctness tile on the Fiori launchpad.
● Based on predefined rules, the report checks the following:
○ The number of independent changes in a logical unit of work (LUW)
○ Whether the database changes are bundled in a single task
○ The usage of enqueues and dequeues to lock the data
● The following rules are checked:

Rule Description

1 There should be no COMMIT and ROLLBACK statements between changes in the main program.

2 There should be no COMMIT and ROLLBACK statements between changes within each tRFC/
qRFC.

3 There should be no changes in sRFC/aRFC unless executed in an update task.

4 An explicit COMMIT statement is needed to trigger changes in an update task.

5 If some changes in the main program are executed in an update task, the others should be as
well.

E1 A database record can be modified without an active enqueue.

E2 A dequeue might be set without an active enqueue.

E3 A dequeue is set without all parameters specified.

E4 Modifying DB operation on a table that is not part of an active lock object.

E5 The changed table entry might only be locked by a shared lock.

E6 Data might be committed without an active enqueue.

 Note

To ensure correct results of the transaction correctness tool, take the following measures:
○ Record only a single SAP logical unit of work (LUW) in a trace, that is, steps that are to be
processed together from a logical point of view, to grant transactional correctness.
○ While recording the trace, do not use update debugging.
○ Process inbound queues with a user different from your own user.
To do so, fill the Destination With Logon Data field in the QIN scheduler (transaction SMQR). If the
field is empty, the system uses your user to process inbound queue entries you created.

Business Process Operations

138 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
More Information

● Transaction Correctness guide at https://wiki.scn.sap.com/wiki/x/y4E_FQ Wiki Page "Data

Consistency Management" Best Practice for Transactional Correctness .
● In the SAP NetWeaver documentation at http://help.sap.com/netweaver, search for Performance Trace.
● SAP Note 1325677

5.3.1 Evaluating Transaction Correctness in a Managed

System

Use

The transactional correctness evaluation performed directly in a managed system consists of three steps. As
the transaction correctness tool evaluates performance traces, you have to record a trace of the transaction
you want to evaluate, before using the tool.

Procedure

Step 1: Recording a Performance Trace

1. In the managed system, go to transaction ST05.

2. Select SQL Trace and Enqueue Trace.
3. Choose Activate Trace.
4. Execute the transaction or step that you want to analyze.
5. Choose Deactivate Trace.

Step 2: Using the Transaction Correctness Tool

1. Start the transaction correctness tool by calling report /SDF/DCC_TC.

The system displays the selection screen for the trace records that can be evaluated. If you have captured
an RFC call in the trace, enter the RFC type under RFC Type for Evaluation:
○ NUNI for no RFC or un-identified RFC type
○ SRFC for synchronous RFC
○ ARFC for asynchronous RFC
○ QRFC for queued RFC
2. Select the performance trace you have recorded, and choose Continue.
The system lists all database changes in your performance trace, with comments indicating where
transactional correctness is at risk.

Step 3: Displaying Results

1. Check the results of the evaluation.

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 139
 The results window contains the following information:

Field Description

Record no. Number of evaluated database trace record

Trace date Timestamp (date) of the recorded trace

Trace time Timestamp (time) of the recorded trace

Transaction Transaction the trace was executed from

Process Type Work process type in which the action was executed

Program Executing program

Table Table the statement was performed on

Statement Type of the analyzed statement.

 Note
The tool only analyzes and lists INSERT, UPDATE, UPSERT, and DELETE state­
ments, and COMMITs and ROLLBACKs. For the analysis of enqueues and de­
queues, ENQUEUE, DEQUEUE, and DEQUEUE ALL statements are also consid­
ered.

Comment If transactional correctness is at risk, a warning message is displayed.

2. Handle the results depending on the content of the warning message. For more information, see Handling
Transaction Correctness Warning Messages [page 143].

More Information

For more information, in the SAP NetWeaver documentation at http://help.sap.com/netweaver , search for
Performance Trace.

5.3.2 Evaluating Transactional Correctness Using SAP

Solution Manager

Use

You can evaluate the transactional correctness of one of your managed systems, from SAP Solution Manager.
You can call it from the Data Consistency Management tile on the SAP Solution Manager Launchpad.

Business Process Operations

140 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
Procedure

Step 1: Start and Stop Traces

1. On the ST05 tab page, choose the RFC destination of the managed system for which you want to check the
transactional correctness.
2. Enter the user who is to execute the program you want to analyze.
3. Under Tables, the list contains tables that are to be excluded from the transactional correctness analysis.
The tables listed by default should be excluded, since they are not relevant for the analysis, and might
jeopardize the analysis if they are included. Review this list before each analysis.
Choose Insert Row or Append Row, to add tables. Choose Delete Row to remove a table from the list.
4. Choose Start Trace to start the database performance trace in the managed system.
5. Choose Stop Trace to finish the trace in the managed system.

Step 2: Select Traces

1. Under Trace Restrictions, enter the RFC destination of the managed system containing the program you
want to analyze.
2. Enter the ID of the user who executed the program you want to analyze. This should be the user that has
been traced.
3. The Date and Time fields are pre-filled by the system, with the start date and time and end date and time of
the last trace. You can change the contents of these fields, if required.
4. If the trace records are to be distinguished by the extended passport root ID, the extended passport
connection ID, the extended passport connection counter, or the TransGUID, you can enter the required
data.
5. Under Data for Evaluation, if the program you traced used an RFC, you can either choose the RFC type or
“Unknown RFC Type” if an un-identified RFC was used. You can also leave this field blank.
6. Choose Load Trace.
The system displays the trace records based on the selection criteria specified.

Field Description

Server Name Name of application server the database trace record was read from

Trace Rec. Number Number of the evaluated database trace record

Client Client of the managed system in which the database was traced

Date Time stamp (date) of the recorded trace

Time Time stamp (time) of the recorded trace

Object Name Table the statement was performed on

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 141
 Field Description

Statement Analyzed statement

 Note
The tool only analyzes and lists INSERT, UPDATE, UPSERT, and
DELETE statements, and COMMITs and ROLLBACKs.

Work Process no. The number of the work process in which the SQL statement was
executed in the managed system.

Executed Operation The SQL operation related to the trace record.

 Note
The tool only analyzes and lists REEXEC, EXECSTA, and
EXCUSED statements. For the analysis of enqueues and de­
queues, ENQUEUE, DEQUEUE, and DEQUEUE ALL statements
are also considered.

Program Name Program that was executed and traced in the managed system

Process Type Work process type in which the action was executed in the managed
system

Executed Transaction Transaction the trace was executed from (in the managed system)

User Name User ID that was traced in the managed system

TransGUID Transaction GUID of the captured trace record

Extended Passport Root ID Extended Passport Root ID of the captured trace record

Extended Passport Connection ID Extended Passport Connection ID of the captured trace record

Extended Passport Connection Counter Extended Passport Connection Counter of the captured trace re­
cord

7. Choose Upload/Download to download the results.

8. Select all trace records that are to be analyzed. Ideally, select all trace records that belong to the same SAP
logical unit of work (SAP LUW), so that affected data belongs together logically, and should be posted to
the database together or not at all.

Step 3: Display Result

1. Choose the Commit Structure tab page to display the check results of the commit structure of the analyzed
program, based on the selected trace records.
The system evaluates how many change blocks are contained in the trace (a “change block” is ended by a
COMMIT statement) and whether there is a risk to the transactional correctness of the program. The
Description for TC check result line column contains a warning message, if transactional correctness is at
risk.

Business Process Operations

142 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
 For more information, see Handling Transaction Correctness Warning Messages [page 143].
2. Choose the Enqueues tab page to display the result of the enqueue/dequeue structure check of the
analyzed program, based on the selected records.
They system evaluates whether correct and complete enqueues and dequeues are set, and whether they
match the captured database changes. The Description for TC check result line column contains a warning
message if transactional correctness is at risk.
For more information, see Handling Transaction Correctness Warning Messages [page 143].

5.3.3 Handling Transaction Correctness Warning Messages

The following table shows the transaction correctness tool warning messages.

Warning Message Explanation Recommendation

Rule 1: There should be no More than one change block is cap­ ● Review the underlying ABAP code.
COMMIT and ROLLBACK tured in the trace, which means that Check whether the data in the sep­

statements between changes there is more than one COMMIT state­ arate change blocks is logically re­
ment in a single logical unit of work lated (for example, sales order
in the main program.
(LUW). header data and sales order item
Rule 2: There should be no data). If it is logically related, in­
The tool counts the number of change
COMMIT and ROLLBACK consistencies in the database can
blocks (that is, all INSERT, UPDATE,
occur if the processing of the data
statements between changes and DELETE statements) between two aborts between the two COMMIT
within each tRFC/qRFC. COMMIT statements. If more than one statements. For example, sales or­
change block is captured in the trace, der header data is stored in the da­
transactional correctness might be at tabase, whereas the related sales
risk for the statements after the first order item data are not.
change block.
● Change the ABAP code so that all
data that belongs together logically
is committed to the database at
the same time. There should be
only one COMMIT statement at the
end of the LUW.
● If the data in the different change
blocks is not related logically (for
example, data of two logically inde­
pendent sales orders is posted to
the database in the two different
change blocks), transactional cor­
rectness of the data is not at risk.

Rule 3: There should be no The analyzed trace contains changes Transactional correctness might be at
changes in sRFC/aRFC that were performed in an update task, risk if data processing aborts when the
unless executed in an and changes that were performed out­ changes outside the update task have

update task. side an update task. already been committed to the data­
base, but those performed inside the

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 143
Warning Message Explanation Recommendation

Rule 4: An explicit COMMIT The tool recognizes if a change block update task have not yet been commit­
statement is needed to contains changes that are made by an ted, so check whether the changes per­
trigger changes in an update task (tables VBMOD, VBDATA, or formed outside the update task can

update task. VBHDR). If a change block contains such also be performed in the same update
a change, and also contains changes task as the other changes.
Rule 5: If some changes in that are processed outside the update
If there is no COMMIT statement to trig­
the main program are task, check if all changes can be proc­
ger the changes in the update task, add
executed in an update essed in the update task. Changes
it. Follow rules 1 and 2.
task, the others should be processed outside the update task have
this warning.
as well.
A COMMIT statement is required, since
updates in an update task are only trig­
gered by an explicit COMMIT state­
ment.

Rule E1: A database record The trace contains an INSERT, Ensure that during the database modifi-
might be modified without UPDATE, UPSERT or DELETE state­ cation a correct enqueue is set, by call­
an active enqueue. ment, but there is no enqueue active ing the enqueue function module for
when the modifying statement is exe­ the lock object.
cuted. So, the same table record can be
modified by more than one process at
the same time, which can lead to incon­
sistencies, since isolation is not guaran­
teed.

Rule E2: A dequeue might The trace contains a DEQUEUE state­

be set without an active ment when there is no active ENQUEUE
enqueue. statement. An enqueue may not have
been set, so the same table record may
be modified by more than one process
at the same time, which can lead to in­
consistencies, since isolation is not
guaranteed.

Business Process Operations

144 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
Warning Message Explanation Recommendation

Rule E3: A dequeue is set The trace contains a DEQUEUE state­ Ensure that all the parameters of the
without all parameters ment, but the corresponding dequeue call of the dequeue function module are
specified. function module is not called with all the same as in the call of the corre­
parameters, so the corresponding en­ sponding enqueue function module.
queue will not be deleted. This impacts
performance, since the enqueue will be
held longer than required, and other
work processes will not be able to mod­
ify the locked object.

The corresponding enqueue will only be

deleted with the next Dequeue All,
which can either be triggered explicitly
(via an ABAP command) or automati­
cally at the end of the SAP LUW, or at
the end of the SAP transaction.

Rule E4: Modifying DB The trace contains an INSERT, For the table being modified, check
operation on a table that UPDATE, UPSERT or DELETE state­ whether there is a corresponding lock
is not part of an active ment on a table that is not part of an ac­ object, and modify the code so that this
lock object. tive lock object. lock object is called via the correspond­
ing enqueue function module. If there is
A lock object is active when there is an
no lock object for this table, create one
active enqueue. For the table with no
or assign this table to a lock object that
active lock, the same table record can
is active during program execution.
be modified by more than one process
at the same time, which can lead to in­
consistencies, since isolation is not
guaranteed.

Rule E5: The changed table The trace contains an INSERT, Check the lock arguments in the call of
entry might only be locked UPDATE, UPSERT or DELETE state­ the enqueue function module that locks
by a shared lock. ment on a table for which only a shared the table to be modified. Change the
lock is active at the time of the modifi- lock mode to a “Write Lock” (E) or “Ex­
cation. clusive, not cumulative” (X). Adapt the
call of the dequeue function module,
The most commonly used lock modes
since the enqueue will only be deleted
are “Shared Lock” (S), “Write Lock” (E),
by the dequeue function module if en­
“Exclusive, not cumulative” (X). If only a
queue and dequeue function modules
shared lock is set on a data record, it
are called with the same parameters. If
can be modified by a work process
the lock mode is not set explicitly when
other than the lock holder, so isolation
the enqueue function module is called,
is not guaranteed, and inconsistencies
the lock mode will be taken from the
might occur.
lock object’s master data (In transac­

tion SE11, choose Lock Object

Tables Lock Mode ).

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 145
Warning Message Explanation Recommendation

Rule E6: Data might be The trace contains a COMMIT WORK Ensure that the correct enqueue func­
committed without an statement when there is no active en­ tion module is called before the
active enqueue. queue. Changes to the database will changes to the database table, and the
only be consistent after they have been correct dequeue function module is
committed or rolled back. Ensure that called only after the data is committed
the enqueue still is active at the time of to the database.
the commit. If not, isolation might not
be guaranteed, and the data to be
modified can be changed by another
work process before the current
changes are posted to the database.
This can lead to inconsistencies.

No ENQ, DEQ or DEQ ALL This message is issued at the end of the Ensure that when capturing the ST05
statement found at all. result list of the transactional correct­ trace, “Enqueue Trace” is selected, so
Check whether Enqueue ness check tool, if the trace contains no that the corresponding statements are

trace was captured. ENQUEUE, DEQUEUE or DEQUEUE in the trace result, and can be evaluated
ALL statements, for the following rea­ by the tool.
sons:

● In the ST05 trace, “Enqueue Trace”

was not selected when the trace
was switched on, and no
ENQUEUE, DEQUEUE or
DEQUEUE ALL statements were
captured in the trace.
● In the ST05 trace, “Enqueue Trace”
was selected, but there are no
ENQUEUE, DEQUEUE or
DEQUEUE ALL statements in the
trace.

5.4 GSS: Data Consistency Management

Use

You can use this Guided Self-Service (GSS) to select the best tools to keep the data in your systems consistent.
You can use the GSS after various events have occurred (such as a database crash) as well as to ensure the
consistency of your data.

You work in sessions. In a session, you create multiple business processes for which you want to use data
consistency management.

Data consistency management helps you to select the relevant tools by guiding you from the level of the
business process down to the level of individual tables.

Business Process Operations

146 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
Integration

Data consistency management uses solutions to access the systems maintained.

Prerequisites

● The Solution Directory is maintained for the business processes.

● The business objects and tables are specified in the configuration.

Activities

The GSS for data consistency management consists of several steps. In each step, you can save your entries
and continue editing later. Information about each step is displayed directly on the screen.

The GSS runs as follows:

1. On the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, choose Data Consistency Management, then choose GSS Data
Consistency Management.
2. You select the session to which you want to add objects.
3. You select the event for which you want to use data consistency management.
○ Technical analysis: Analyze which tools you can use after a system crash before restoring the
database.
○ Application analysis: Analyze which tools you can use to check data consistency.
○ CDC documentation: Automate the documentation of existing cross-database comparisons and add
your own documentation.
4. You choose the objects for which you want to ensure data consistency. Starting from the event, select the
systems, business processes, business objects, and tables and add them to a session.
5. The system suggests the most suitable tools.
6. Execute the suggested tools.
7. You display evaluations of the analysis results.
8. You specify follow-up activities.

5.5 Internal Database Comparison

Use

You can check data for consistency within one SAP system, for example, by comparing two tables to detect any
missing table entries or inconsistent field contents.

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 147
There are two ways to compare data in an internal database:

● By opening the Data Consistency Management tile in the Fiori launchpad and choosing Internal Database
Comparison.
If you select this option, you can use the features described below.
● By choosing the extraction strategy Execute Comparison in One System in cross-database comparison
If you select this option, you can use the features in cross-database comparison and define more complex
data models. For more information, see Cross-Database Comparison [page 92] and "Determine
Inconsistent Entries in One System" Data Source [page 111].

Features

● Define conditions and restrictions for the tables and field contents to be compared.
● Select a use case: missing entries in a table or inconsistencies between tables.
● Define fields to be displayed in the result.
● Define a remote connection to the system in which the data to be compared is located.
● Create a variant for your comparison that can be run regularly.

5.6 Business Process Completeness Check

Use

If business processes have subprocesses that are synchronously executed on several systems, it can be
difficult to identify whether all process steps have been executed successfully and whether all objects were
correctly created on the different systems. With the Business Process Completeness Check (BPCC), you can
monitor critical parts of a business process.

Prerequisites

● You have configured the managed systems for Exception Management in SAP Solution Manager
Configuration (transaction SOLMAN_SETUP).
● You have configured the monitoring of multiple-step exceptions for the business processes and their
critical subprocesses in the Exception Management Instrumentation Platform (EM-IPA) configuration.
● You have instrumented the processes and the process steps in the managed systems.

Features

● In the Business Process Completeness Check application, you can view a process instance to check wether
all process steps have been executed successfully and to examine the steps individually in case of an error.

Business Process Operations

148 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
● You can also see the results of the Business Process Completeness Check for a process instance in the
Details view of the Exception Management Cockpit.

More Information

Configuring Business Process Completeness Check [page 149]

Instrumenting the Business Process Completeness Check [page 152]

Analyzing Business Process Steps with the BPCC Process Flow view [page 154]

5.6.1 Configuring Business Process Completeness Check

Use

To implement the monitoring of business processes with the Business Process Completeness Check (BPCC),
you do the following tasks in SAP Solution Manager:

● Activate the Exception Management Instrumentation Platform (EM-IPA) for systems and clients
● Specify Journal Mode data collection for Exception Management logging
● Configure business processes and their subprocesses as categories and subcategories in the EM-IPA
configuration
● Map business process type IDs to the categories and subcategories

Prerequisites

● You have configured the systems in the Managed Systems Configuration of SAP Solution Manager
Configuration (transaction solman_setup).
● You have configured Exception Management for the systems in the Exception Management scenario of SAP
Solution Manager Configuration (transaction solman_setup).

Procedure

Activating the Exception Management Instrumentation Platform (EM-IPA) for the technical systems

1. On the SAP Solution Manager launchpad in the Business Process Operations section, start the
Configuration Business Process Completeness Check application .
2. Select the clients on which you have implemented the Exception Management Instrumentation Platform.
3. Choose OK.

Specifying Journal Mode Data Collection

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 149
On the Instrumentation Platform tab page, under Specific Settings, specify the data collection mode Journal
Mode for the systems that you want to configure for BPCC.

 Note

With Journal Mode data collection, data is written for every processing step to exception management
logging, regardless of whether an exception occurred. Only step data is persisted; in other words, there is
no error or payload information. This setting is not sensitive to the trace flags provided by SAP Extended
Passport. This means that tracing occurs for all users in all sessions in which the appropriate processing
step is executed.

Configuring Business Processes and Subprocesses as Categories and Subcategories

You usually don't want to monitor a business process as a whole, but critical parts of the process, that is
subprocesses. You configure the subprocesses in the Exception Management Instrumentation Platform so
that you can later instrument them in the monitored systems.

On the IPA Configuration screen, you configure business processes and their subprocesses as categories with
subcategories in the Exception Management Instrumentation Platform. You can use processes and process
steps that you have configured in Solution Documentation and assign them to the categories and
subcategories.

You also map a business process type ID to the categories and subcategories. The business process type ID is
used for the instrumentation of the process steps in managed system to distinguish the different process
types.

1. On the Repository tap page, go to the Repository sub-tab page.

2. Choose Edit.
3. Under Category, choose Add to define a new business process as category.
4. Specify a category ID and a category text.

 Example

To configure an order-to-cash process, you could specify the category ID O2C and the category text
Order to Cash.

5. You can assign a process modelled in Solution Documentation to the category. To do so, use the value help
at Assigned Process to select the process from Solution Documentation.
6. To define a subprocess as a subcategory of a business process, select the category that represents the
business process and, under Subcategory, choose Add.
7. Specify a subcategory ID and a subcategory text.

 Example

For the order-to-cash process, you want to configure the order creation as the first process step. You
specify the subcategory ID 1O2C and the category text Order Creation.

8. You can assign a process or process step modelled in the Solution Documentation to the subcategory. To
do so, use the value help at Assigned Process or Process Step to select the process or process step from
the Solution Documentation.
9. At Business Process Type ID, specify the business process type ID for the subcategory.

Business Process Operations

150 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
  Note

The business process type ID is assigned to the combination of category and subcategory. When you
instrument the process steps of the subprocess in the managed system, you use the business process
type ID to identify the subprocess that you want to monitor. You also use the business process type ID
when you configure rules for BPCC.

 Example

You assign the business process type ID OC00 to the subcategory Order Creation. When you later
instrument the process step in the managed system, you use the business process type ID OC00 to
identify the process step.

10. Save your configuration.

Configuring Object Types for BPCC

Configuring object types is a prerequiste for configuring rules that check wether specific object types exist or
not exist in the process steps of a business process instance. You can configure object types that have been set
up in the instrumentation of the business processes on the managed systems. An exception is the object type
STEP, which refers to the logged business process steps. You configure the object types on the Object
Maintenance tab:

1. On the Repository tap page, go to the Object Maintenance sub-tab page.

2. Choose Edit.
3. Under Object, choose Add to define a new object type.
4. Specify the object type and an object name.
5. Save your settings.

Configuring Rules for BPCC

On the Rules Maintenance tab, you can configure rules that check whether specific object types exist or not
exist in the process steps of a business process instance. For example, you can configure a rule that checks if a
Sales Order object has been created in the process step Create Sales Order.

1. On the Repository tap page, go to the Rule Maintenance sub-tab page.

2. Choose Edit.
3. Under Rule, choose Add to define a new rule.
4. Define a rule ID and a rule name.
5. Specify the rule type. There are the following rule types:
○ O_EXIST: Object exists
○ O_NO_EXIST: Object does not exist
6. Specify the excecution mode of the rule. There are the following execution modes:
○ AX
The rule is executed automatically and the rule completeness relevant: A failure of this rule impacts the
completeness status of the business process instance.
○ A
The rule is executed automatically and the rule is not completeness relevant: A failure of this rule does
not impact the completeness status of the business process instance.
○ M
The rule is executed manually.

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 151
7. To use the rule for the Business Process Completeness Check, activate the rule.
8. You can configure rule attributes. Select a rule in the Rules table, and in the Rules Attributes table, add the
rule attributes.
9. Save your settings.

More Information

Exception Management Instrumentation Platform

5.6.2 Instrumenting the Business Process Completeness

Check

Use

If you want to monitor business process steps with the Business Process Completeness Check, you need to
instrument them in the source code of the managed systems. The instrumentation can be done via implicit or
explicit enhancement points when enhancing SAP coding, or it can be done directly in customer coding.

For more information on the Exception Management Instrumentation Platform, see Exception Management
Instrumentation Platform.

Prerequisites

● You have configured the business process and the subprocess that you want to as categories and
subcategories in the Exception Management Instrumentation Platform configuration
● You have assigned business process type IDs to the subcategories.
● You have identified the business process steps that you want to instrument.
Usually, not all of the process steps and unit calls are critical and need to be instrumented. Consider also
the following rules:
○ Remote function calls to other systems have to be instrumented as process steps.
○ To get the correct sequence of the steps, the calling system should be instrumented as well as the
called system.
○ Error messages can only be logged for units (function calls and methods).
○ Explicit COMMITS should not occur within a step, but outside of the step.

Procedure

This procedure describes how you can instrument the process steps directly in the custom coding.

Business Process Operations

152 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
1. Initialize the SAP Business Passport.
Create a GUID for the business process instances.

* Create Business Process Instance

ID CALL FUNCTION 'GUID_CREATE'
IMPORTING
ev_guid_32 = l_instance_id.

Write this GUID to the passport. Use the business process type ID (i_bpt_id) configured in the Exception
Management Instrumentation Platform configuration to identify the process.

* Initially write the instance ID to the passport

/sdf/cl_em_ipa_write=>initialize_process(
i_bpi_id = l_instance_id
i_bpt_id = p_ptype).

2. Instrument the start of the first process step. Use a descriptive name for the step (Step 1).

** EM Instrumentation: create start step via EM-IPA

/sdf/cl_em_ipa_write=>start_step(
i_step_name = 'Step 1').

3. Instrument the end of the process step.

** create end step via EM-IPA

/sdf/cl_em_ipa_write=>end_step( ).

4. Between the start of the step and the end of the step, instrument the units (function calls and methods) of
the process step. Possible unit types are:
○ ABAP function modules
○ ABAP form routines
○ BAPIs
○ Web service calls
○ ABAP class methods

/sdf/cl_em_ipa_write=>create_unit_entry(
i_unit_name = 'ZFM_ORDER_UPDATE'
i_unit_type = 'ABAP Function Module'
it_parameter = lt_param
it_bapiret = lt_msg ).

5. In the same manner, instrument further process steps.

6. Instrument the saving of the data at the end of the business process or at the end of the function call
(LUW).
When the process runs across different systems, at least one save data should exist before the another
system is called, if not the data won't be logged.

 Note

If you want to instrument the process steps in SAP coding, use implicit enhancement options. To display
the implicit enhancements options, in the ABAP system, choose Edit Enhancement Options Show
Implicit Enhancement Options .

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 153
5.6.3 Analyzing Business Process Steps with Business
Process Completeness Check

Use

To analyze exceptions in a critical subprocess of a business process, you can examine the steps of the
subprocess in the Business Process Completeness Check application.

Prerequisites

● You have configured the monitoring of the processes in the Exception Management Instrumentation
Platform.
● You have instrumented the processes and steps in the managed systems.

For more information, see.

● Configuring Business Process Completeness Check [page 149]

● Instrumenting Business Process Completeness Check [page 152]

Procedure

Starting the Business Process Completeness Check

1. Start the Business Process Completeness Check application from the SAP Solution Manager launchpad.
2. In the Instance field, use the value help to select the business process instance that you want to analyze.

 Note

Business Process Completeness Check is also integrated in Data Consistency and in Exception
Management application. In Exception Management, select the exception type for multiple-step exceptions,
the category of the business process, and the process instance and choose BPCC Process Flow.

Analyzing Business Process Steps

The screen of Business Process Completeness Check consists of the header with general information, the
process flow chart, and context-sensitive information for selected steps.

The header displays general information on the process instance, such as the ID of the selected process
instance, the timestamp, and the overall execution time of the process instance. The statuses for the process
instance as a whole, the overall status, the exception status, the completeness status, and the rule status, are
indicated by traffic light icons:

● Red (error)
● Yellow (warning)
● Green (success)
● Gray (undefined)

Business Process Operations

154 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
The process flow chart shows the sequence of the process steps. You see the status of each step and in which
system the steps are performed.

On the right side, you can display context-sensitive information on individual process steps.

To analyze the steps, proceed as follows:

1. To display the statuses of the process steps in the flow chart, select a status type (overall status, exception
status, completeness status, or rule status ) in the header. The flow chart indicates the status of each
process steps for this status type.

 Example

You see that the completeness status for the process instance indicates an error, which means that the
process hasn't been completed. You want to know in which of the steps an error occurred. You select
Completeness to see which of the steps are completed (green icon) and which of the steps are
incomplete (red icon).

2. To see detailed information on a process step, click on a process step in the flow cart and select an
information context. You can display up to three different information contexts at once. You can select the
following contexts:
○ Call Stack: Call stack of the process step
○ Rule Result: The result of the rules evaluation. The configured rules are used to check whether specific
objects exist or not exist in a process step.
○ Step Details: Information on the step, such as the following:
○ Step ID
○ Pred. Step ID: ID of the previous step
○ Sequence No.: Number of the step sequence to which the step belongs. A process can have several
step sequences.
○ Step number
○ Start time, end time, and duration
○ Step Context: Information on the technical context of the step, such as system, host, client, or user
○ Business Objects Logged: Business objects logged during the step execution (if instrumented)
○ Messages: Messages logged during the step execution (if instrumented)
○ Extended Passport: Details from the extended passport, such as the client, the root context, the
transaction ID. This information refers to the process as a whole and is not specific to the selected
step.

 Note

To view another process instance, select the process instance in the Instance field.

Saving Personalized Settings

To save your context selections as personalized settings for the Business Process Completeness Check
application, proceed as follows:

1. Select the Context for the information that you want to see when you open the Business Process
Completeness Check Process Flow view.
2. On the right side of the screen, choose Personalization.
3. In the Personalization window, choose Save.

When you want to reload your personalized settings, choose Personalization and then Load.

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 155
5.7 Integration Repository

With the Integration Repository, which is tied to the Solution Documentation, you can centrally document all
interfaces in your solution landscape.

The Integration Repository can be called from within the Solution Documentation as an element of an
interface object in the interface library. Although the integration repository is tightly bound to the Solution
Documentation, it is a stand-alone application with a separate data persistency. The integration with the
Solution Documentation provides several advantages:

● If you have assigned the interfaces to business processes, you can estimate the effect of planned
downtimes on business processes.
● If there is failure of a system or an interface, you can identify the business processes that will be affected.
● With the integration repository, you can maintain different versions of the same interface that exist in
parallel in different contexts within the same solution. For example, you can document versions of an
interface for different sites or system roles within the same branch, or across system boundaries.
● The lifecycle management based on branches of the Solution Documentation also applies to the interface
documentation in the Integration Repository. For example, you can document a new version of an interface
in the development branch without interfering with the currently active version of the interface in the
production branch.

All interface technologies within SAP landscapes as well as to non-SAP systems can be documented with the
Integration Repository. For every interface technology a set of interface attributes are provided that you can
use to specify each interface. If you need more interface attributes, you can create custom attributes. Custom-
specific interface technologies can be defined if the standard technologies are insufficient to describe the
interface properly.

It is recommended to use the Integration Repository together with Interface and Connection Monitoring. The
interface attribute data that you maintain in the Integration Repository can be used to configure interface
channels for monitoring and alerting.

5.7.1 Import of SAP Cloud Platform Integration Flows

With the SAP Solution Manager, you can import integration flows together with runtime information from the
SAP Cloud Platform Integration tenant.

With the Integration Repository - Cloud Platform Integration app, you can import integration flows together with
runtime information from the SAP Cloud Platform Integration tenant.

In the app, you can make the following settings:

● You decide into which solution, branch, and system role combination of Solution Documentation the
integration flows are imported.
● You can assign the corresponding logical component groups to the sender and receiver systems

The interfaces are imported directly into the Integration Repository. You do not have to import a JSON file.

Business Process Operations

156 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
5.7.2 Documenting Interfaces

To document interfaces in the Integration Repository, you create interface objects in the interface library of the
Solution Documentation and then specify the attributes of the interfaces.

Creating Interfaces Object

1. In the Solution Documentation navigate to Libraries Interface Library .

2. You can create folders in the interface library, for example to structure the interface library by application
areas or regions.
3. Choose a folder and open the context menu.
4. Select New Interface .
5. Specify the following for the interface object:
○ Name
○ Sending Logical component group
○ Receiving logical component group
If you interface includes a middleware component, for example SAP Process Integration or SAP process
Orchestration, specify also the middleware logical component group.
6. Select the interface technology.
7. Save your settings

Specifying Interface Attributes

1. In the Solution Documentation navigate to the interface object.

2. In the Elements of... section, open the context menu.
3. In the context menu, select New Interface Details Interface Details .
4. In the Interface Attributes section of the interface details, specify the interface attributes on the following
tab pages:
○ Technical Attributes: Classify the interface type in more detail.
○ Routing Attributes: Document the communication profile by specifying communication partners and
destinations,
○ Functional Attributes: Specify business-related data, such as the interface volume or peak times.
○ Further Details: Here you can add a text with additional information.
It depends on the interface technology, what attributes have to be specified on the Technical Attributes and
the Routing Attributes tab.
For interfaces of some interface technologies, you have to select the interface type first, before you can
specify the attributes. For example, for an RFC interface, you select the following types:
○ Synchronous RFC (sRFC)
○ Asynchronous RFC (aRFC)
○ Transactional RFC (tRFC)

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 157
 ○ Queued RFC (qRFC)
○ Background RFC (Transactional Units) (bgRFCt)
○ Background RFC (Queued Units) (bgRFCq)

 Note

If you can change interface type, you have to specify the attributes again.

For the interface technology SAP Process Integration / SAP Process Orchestration), you have to select the
installation type, the sender adapter and the receiver adapter.

5.7.3 Integration Repository - Tools

Integration Repository – Tools helps you to import interface information from various sources. The app provides
the following tools:

● SAP PI/PO tab

Extract data from SAP Process Integration (SAP PI) or SAP Process Orchestration (SAP PO) scenarios
● External File tab
Use the following spreadsheet template file to document interfaces and then upload the data from a
spreadsheet file (CSV file): https://wiki.scn.sap.com/wiki/download/attachments/399671389/
IFDocu_Interface_Details_Template.xlsx?api=v2
● Discovery tab
Import data about IDoc, qRFC, RFC, and web service interfaces from a managed system with the help of
Interface Discovery [page 158].

With each of these tools you can create a JSON file that you can then import into Solution Administration to
add the data to the Integration Repository. For more information about how to import the data into Solution
Administration, see Export and Import of Content.

Related Information

Interface Discovery [page 158]

Export and Import of Content

5.7.3.1 Interface Discovery

Interface Discovery extracts information about interfaces from managed systems and saves it in SAP Solution
Manager. Interface discovery supports the following interface technologies:

● IDocs
● qRFC
To collect qRFC data, implement 1042040 in the managed systems.

Business Process Operations

158 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
● RFC
RFC Discovery using UCON enables you to track all incoming RFC calls to your managed system
● Web services
You can extract web service data in every managed ABAP system where ST-A/PI is installed. You have to
have created logical component groups for all sender and receiver services.

Interface Discovery for IDocs

You collect the data in the managed system as follows:

1. In the managed system, open the report /SSA/EIM.

2. In the selection screen of the report, select the IDoc Interface Discovery option and select the IDoc
direction (inbound or outbound) and the system client..
You can also select an IDoc message type.
3. Execute the report in background.

When the data collection is finished, you perform the following steps to import the IDocs data into Interface
Repository:

1. On the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, open the Integration Repository - Tools app.
2. In the Integration Repository - Tools app, select the Discovery tab.
3. Under Technology, select IDoc.
4. Select the RFC destination of the managed system, the variant, and the direction (inbound or outbound).
5. Choose Get Data.
6. You can now create a JSON file that you can then import into Solution Administration to add the data to the
Integration Repository.

Interface Discovery for qRFC

You select the data in the managed system as follows:

1. In the managed system, open the report /SSA/EIM.

2. In the selection screen of the report, select Administration of qRFC Throughput data and the option
Generate program for qRFC integration into ST-A/PI.
3. Select Administration of qRFC Table Shadowing and activate the qRFC table shadowing and select the
directions you would like to monitor.

 Note

When activating the qRFC table, the system will indicate a time interval after which the shadowing is
deactivated automatically.

4. Select the direction (inbound, outbound, or both).

5. Execute the report.
6. To collect and store the qRFC data, select Administration of qRFC Table Shadowing and the option Collect
and store qRFC statistics in the report /SSA/EIM.
7. Execute the report.
8. Make the relevant settings and choose the option Save Results to table /SSF/BTAB.

When the data collection is finished, you can perform the following steps to import the qRFC data into Interface
Repository:

1. On the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, open the Integration Repository - Tools app.
2. In the Integration Repository - Tools app, select the Discovery tab.

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 159
3. Under Technology, select qRFC.
4. Select the RFC destination of the managed system the direction for qRFC and the direction (inbound or
outbound).
5. Choose Get Data.
6. You can now create a JSON file that you can then import into Solution Administration to add the data to the
Integration Repository.

Interface Discovery for RFC

You select the data in the managed system as follows:

1. In the Managed System, open the report /SSA/EIM.

2. In the selection screen of the report, select the RFC Discovery - Data Collection option.
3. Enter the system client for which you want to retrieve the interface data.
4. Select Save Results to table /SSF/BTAB.
5. Execute the report in background. Alternativeley, you can also run the data extraction in the background.

When the data collection is finished, you can perform the following steps to import the RFC interfaces into
Interface Repository:

1. On the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, go to the Data Consistency Management launchpad group and
open the Integration Repository - Tools application .
Alternatively, launch transaction AGS_DCM_EXT_IMPORT.
2. In the Integration Repository - Tools app, select the Discovery tab.
3. Choose RFC (UCON) as technology and choose the relevant RFC Destination of the Managed System.
4. Choose Get Data
5. Select the interfaces you would like to import and generate a JSON file using the Download JSON option
6. Start Solution Administration (transaction SLAN). Use the generic import feature to upload the generated
JSON file to the solution.

Interface Discovery for Web Services

You select the data in the managed ABAP system as follows:

1. In the Managed System, open the report /SSA/EIM.

2. In the selection screen of the report, select the Web Service Discovery - Data Collection option and select if
you want to collect data of web service providers or web service consumers or both.
3. Select Save Results to table /SSF/BTAB.
4. Execute the report in background.

When the data collection is finished, you can perform the following steps to import the data into Interface
Repository:

1. On the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, open the Integration Repository - Tools app.
2. In the Integration Repository - Tools app, select the Discovery tab.
3. Under Technology, select Web Service.
4. Select the RFC destination and the variant (provider, consumer, or both), and the direction (inbound or
outbound).
5. Choose Get Data.
6. You can now create a JSON file that you can then import into Solution Administration to add the data to the
Integration Repository.

Business Process Operations

160 PUBLIC Data Consistency Management
5.7.4 Interface Search and Mass Maintenance

You can use the Interface Search and Mass Maintenance tool to analyze and change interfaces that you have
documented in the Integration Repository.

You have the folowing option for starting Interface Search and Mass Maintenance:

● Choose the Integration Repository - Mass Maintenance tile on the SAP Solution Manager launchpad
● Start the tool in transaction AGS_DCM_EXT_IMPORT (External Interface Import).

Interface Search
In Interface Search and Mass Maintenance, you can use interface parameters, such as the interface technology
or attribute values, as search criteria to find specific interfaces for a combination of solution, branch and
system role.

The results of you search are displayed in a search results table. To analyze the interfaces in the search results
table, you can do the following:

● To display additional attributes of the interfaces as colums in the table, choose the settings icon and select
the attributes that you want to display.
● Use the column headers of the table to sort and filter the displayed interfaces.

Mass Maintenance Function

To make changes for several interfaces at once, you can select the the interfaces in the search results of the
interface search and choose the  (edit) icon.

You can select the interface attribute that you want to change in all selected interfaces. To delete the value of an
attribute for all selected interfaces, choose the option Leave Blank. To keep existing values of an attribute that
differ between the selected interfaces, choose the option Keep Existing Values.

 Note

With the mass maintenance, you can only change attributes that are common to all selected interfaces.

Business Process Operations

Data Consistency Management PUBLIC 161
6 Job Management

Job management is a process that supports management of solution-wide background operations that
automate your business processes. It allows you to request, document, analyze, and schedule background jobs
in your system environment from a central location, with a standardized workflow.

Implementation Considerations

● Your system landscape and the Job Management scenario must be configured in the SAP Solution
Manager Configuration. SAP Solution Manager Configuration. In SAP Solution Manager Configuration,
make sure that:
○ The relevant systems are connected to SAP Solution Manager.
○ You have executed the guided procedure for job management under Business Process Operations.
○ Each system that is relevant for job management is part of one technical scenario or a logical
component group.
Note that logical component groups are defined in solution documentation.
● Solutions for the background processing business processes must be defined in Solution Documentation.

Integration

Integration with SAP Solution Manager Scenarios

Job management is integrated with the following SAP Solution Manager scenarios:

● Business Process and Interface Monitoring [page 8] and System & Application Monitoring for monitoring
jobs
● Job monitoring, which is part of application operations (but can also be setup as part of process
monitoring in solution documentation).
● IT Service Management and Change Request Management for handling job requests

To use this integration, you must configure these scenarios.

Integration with External Schedulers

Solution Manager Scheduling Enabler (SMSE) is the interface between SAP applications and external
schedulers for scheduling jobs and job chains, and for integrating business and infrastructure events. You can
use SAP Solution Manager to view and monitor jobs and job chains that are managed with an SMSE-certified
external scheduler, such as SAP Business Process Automation by Redwood (SAP BPA).

Business Process Operations

162 PUBLIC Job Management
Features

Job Request Processing

Project members or business end users can use an interactive job request form to request that a job be
created, changed, or deleted. When you submit the job request, you can decide whether a job request
document or a job document is created. An approval process is in place to handle these documents. If a job
request document is created, it must be copied over to a job document before the job can actually be
scheduled.

The workflow is handled by IT Service Management and Change Request Management, although you can also
integrate your own, external ticketing system.

For more information, see Requesting Jobs [page 168].

Job Documentation
Job documentation is the central object of the job management standard. It allows you to centrally manage,
schedule, and document in detail the background processing of your entire system landscape.

Create structured documentation of the following business and technical properties of background jobs:

● Job steps
● Job-automated business process steps and the corresponding system
● Business requirements, priority, and responsible organization
● Scheduling parameters
● Monitoring configuration
● Error-handling procedures
● Authorizations
● Contacts and responsibilities

You can do the following:

● Schedule jobs in managed systems from job documentation.

● Import job data, including scheduling parameters, from managed systems into job documentation.
● Use templates to simplify the creation of job documentation and ensure consistency.

For more information, see Job Documentation [page 193].

Job Scheduling
Job scheduling supports the following activities:

● Perform centralized job scheduling from SAP Solution Manager to connected SAP systems, with or without
job documentation.
● Use the job scheduling assistant to support your job planning process. Fulfill business requirements while
ensuring optimal utilization of system resources.
● Fully document job scheduling parameters, supported by automatic data transfer from connected SAP
systems.
● Activate Job Control for Managed Systems [page 228] to automatically redirect specified users to SAP
Solution Manager when they try to schedule or change jobs using scheduling transactions such as SM36 or
SM37.

For more information, see Job Scheduling [page 218].

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 163
Job Analysis
You can analyze the workload caused by background jobs using graphical analysis tools such as a Gantt Chart.

For more information, see Job Analysis [page 242].

Related Information

Job Monitoring

6.1 Job Management Launchpad Group

This launchpad group is the central access point for all functions offered for background operations
management for your solution landscape.

The group consists of the following apps, which are displayed by default:

App Description

Alert Inbox - Job Monitoring The application displays alerts that are related to job monitoring. You can change the
standard query to restrict the display of specific alerts.

Job Monitoring Job Monitoring is a centralized job monitoring concept based on the end-to-end Moni­
toring and Alerting Infrastructure (MAI). It enables you to monitor ABAP jobs, BW proc­
ess chains, data service jobs, business objects jobs, SMSE jobs, and other custom job
types.

Central Job Overview [page 237] You use this application to view job data over the complete lifecycle, similar to the Job
Overview (transaction SM37). You can view detailed information of the ABAP jobs in the
different managed systems. It also gives you an overview of the jobs scheduled via SAP
Business Process Automation by Redwood or its predecessor SAP Central Process
Scheduling by Redwood (enhancement to other certified schedulers is also possible). If
the SAP BPA scheduled job is part of a job chain, hierarchical job chain information is
also displayed. To provide this overview, data is collected directly from the managed
system and the SAP BPA scheduler.

Job Schedule Gantt Chart [page The Gantt Chart provides a convenient graphical overview of scheduling information for
242]
selected jobs over a period of time. It allows you to analyze the workload caused by
background jobs, so you can avoid bottlenecks and optimize system resources when
scheduling jobs.

Job Scheduling Assistant The job scheduling assistant helps you to schedule a new job by finding slots with low
system load and by providing information on similar jobs. In this way, you can avoid re­
dundant jobs and make sure you schedule a job at times of low system load. It uses data
obtained from System and Application Monitoring.

Business Process Operations

164 PUBLIC Job Management
 App Description

Requesting Jobs [page 168] You use this application to create and display job requests.

Job Documentation [page 193] You use this application to open and edit existing job or job chain documentation.

Create Job Documentation (Sim­ Users with detailed knowledge of SAP Solution Manager and job scheduling can use this
ple UI) app to create job documents that contain all of the important fields offered by job docu­
mentation. The UI is simplified but includes a validation function (that can be enhanced
via BAdI). The system expects a certain sequence of actions to happen before the ac­
tual job scheduling takes place. If external scheduling is to take place, automatic crea­
tion of the external job definition can be implemented via a BAdI.

Create Job Documentation (De­ Users with detailed knowledge of SAP Solution Manager and job scheduling can use this
tailed UI) app to create job documents that contain all fields offered by job documentation. The UI
can be simplified by implicit enhancements. It does not offer a validation function, and
does not expect a certain sequence of actions to happen before the job is actually
scheduled. The automatic creation of the external job definition cannot be implemented
via a BAdI.

Request Batch Job - Job Request Users with a limited knowledge of SAP Solution Manager and job scheduling can use
+ WF (Simple UI) this app to create simplified job requests. The app consists of a subset of fields offered
by job documentation. Integration with an external ticketing system is supported.

Request Batch Job - Job Request Users with detailed knowledge of SAP Solution Manager and job scheduling can use this
+ WF (Detailed UI) app to create detailed job requests that contain all fields offered by job documentation.

Request Batch Job - Job Docu­ Users with a limited knowledge of SAP Solution Manager can use this app to create sim­
ment + WF (Simple UI) plified job documentation without a job request. Integration with an external ticketing
system is supported.

Job Management Administration This is the central point of access to Job Management applications.
[page 166]
Job documents enable you to manage the background processing of your entire system
landscape. They allow you to document (with version management) and schedule your
background jobs, as well as monitor their execution. The starting point of the job man­
agement process is the job request. End users and project members can create a job
request for a new job, for a job change, or a job deletion. Job requests undergo an end-
to-end approval and implementation process with the workflow handled by IT Service
Management and Change Request Management. The content of a job request can auto­
matically be copied over to a job document.

The following tiles are not displayed by default but can be added via the app finder:

Tile Description

Configuration - Job Management You can access the Job Management configuration of SAP Solution Manager (transac­
tion SOLMAN_SETUP).

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 165
Tile Description

Job Resource Analysis Job Resource Analysis allows you to remotely analyze your entire system landscape, in­
cluding KPIs that are relevant for background processing. It offers you a compulsory
trend report on the relevant system monitoring metrics.

Related Information

SAP Fiori Launchpad

6.2 Job Management Administration

The Job Management - Administration app provides access to the following features:

Overview

This view provides overview information with direct links to the personal object worklist (POWL) queries
defined for the other views.

Depending on your configuration settings, a tag cloud may be displayed at the top of the Overview page. Click
on a tag to view a list of job requests and job documentation that use that tag. Navigate directly to the tagged
items by clicking them in the list.

You can set the refresh rate for the overview by using the Page Update Settings link in the bottom right corner of
the page.

For more information, see Job Documentation [page 193].

Job Requests

This view enables you to quickly access job requests that you have submitted or that you have to process. You
can also use it to create new or detailed job requests. For more information, see Requesting Jobs [page 168].

Job Documentation

This view enables you to quickly access job documentation, including any documentation that you need to
review. You can also use this view to create job documentation. For more information, see Job Documentation
[page 193].

Business Process Operations

166 PUBLIC Job Management
Unified Alert Inbox

This view displays job alerts generated by active monitoring objects. For more information, see Job Monitoring.

External Scheduler Management

Provides a view to manage jobs scheduled with a connected, SMSE-certified external job scheduler

For more information, see External Scheduler Management [page 240].

SAP Scheduler Management

In this view, you can manage jobs scheduled with the SAP Scheduler via the BC-XBP interface.

For more information, see SAP Scheduler Management [page 239].

Recommended Jobs

Provides a view of background jobs in your system landscape, organized by system.

For more information, see Scheduling Recommended Jobs [page 235].

Task Inbox

Provides a list of job documentation tasks. If authorized, you can create new tasks and display, edit, and delete
existing tasks.

For more information, see Tasks Tab Page [page 205].

Reports

This view provides access to ABAP and BW reports. For more information, see Reports [page 245].

Administration

Provides you access to perform various configuration and management tasks:

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 167
● Generate business partners for users
● Manage connections to external schedulers
● Define and check RFC BACK destinations from managed systems to SAP Solution Manager
● Maintain criteria profiles for job control, and activate or deactivate job control for users
● Configure Job Scheduling Management Health Check Reports [page 247] and Business Process
Monitoring reports
● Configure the automatic delivery of specified query results to email recipients
● Use a guided procedure to customize the UI configuration for different roles

Common Tasks

Provides you with links to the following frequently used job management tasks:

● Access the template directory

● Analyze jobs with the batch job analysis tool
● Analyze jobs in a Gantt chart
● Schedule jobs directly
● Import jobs into job documentation
● Select jobs in your managed systems to check details centrally from SAP Solution Manager
● Link jobs in your managed systems with job documentation
● Open the Central Job Overview [page 237]

6.3 Requesting Jobs

If you want to request a new job, a change to a job, or the deletion of a job, you can do so by submitting a job
request or a job document. The job request or job document then undergoes an end-to-end approval and
implementation process, with the workflow handled by IT Service Management or Change Request
Management. However, you can also integrate your own, external ticketing system by implementing the BAdI
for External Service Desk (BADI_AGS_SJR_EXTSDK).

 Note

To ensure that new jobs and job scheduling changes go through the job request and approval process, the
administrator can set up job control. Job control redirects users to Job Management when they try to
schedule or change jobs in the managed systems using scheduling transactions such as SM36 or SM37. For
more information, see Job Control for Managed Systems [page 228].

To request that a new job be scheduled, you have the following options:

● You can submit a job request using a simplified user interface, which you can integrate with an external
ticketing system. Before the job can be scheduled, the job request document has to be copied over to a job
document.
● You can submit a job request using a detailed user interface, which is tightly integrated with ITSM. Before
the job can be scheduled, the job request document has to be copied over to a job document.

Business Process Operations

168 PUBLIC Job Management
 ● You can submit a job document using a simplified user interface, which you can integrate with an external
ticketing system. The job document can then be used to schedule the job.

Overview

You can view job requests and job documents in the Job Requests and Job Documentation apps respectively. To
display the requests or documents, you submit a query, which you can customize as required. You can use
Quick Criteria Maintenance to further restrict the display.

Each job request is linked to an external ticket or CRM document, which is linked in the IT Ticket column. The
ticket details are shown on the Linked External Ticket tab in the details area for the selected job.

From the list of job requests, you can also activate or deactivate change control. Change control allows or
prevents users from editing job requests depending on the status of the linked CRM document. For more
information, see Change Control for Job Requests and Job Documentation [page 193].

You can also print a job request in PDF format. If you want to create your own form for printing, see SAP Note
1225976 .

Related Information

Requesting Jobs via a Job Request [page 170]

Requesting Jobs via a Job Document [page 177]
Processing Job Requests [page 180]

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 169
6.3.1 Requesting Jobs via a Job Request

You create job requests when you want to schedule a new job, change a job, or delete a job. Each job request is
linked to either an incident in IT Service Management or a request for change in Change Request Management.
The job request stores the job data, and the incident or request for change handles the approval and
implementation workflow.

 Note

You may have integrated your own, external ticketing system to manage the job requests. However, for the
sake of clarity, we will assume that you use either IT Service Management or Change Request
Management.

Job Management provides two user interfaces (UIs) with which you can create a job request: a simplified UI or
a detailed UI. The simplified UI focuses on data that can be provided by a requester. It offers in-built validation
checks, which you can add to using the BAdI for Simple Job Definition Validation
(BADI_AGS_SJR_VALIDATOR). You can also integrate your own, external ticketing system by using the BAdI for
External Service Desk (BADI_AGS_SJR_EXTSDK). If you don't need to integrate an external ticketing system,
you can use the (legacy) detailed UI to create a job request. To reflect the different UIs, your launchpad
contains two versions of the app Request Batch Job - Job Request + WF: one version with a simple UI and one
with a detailed UI.

Regardless of which UI you use, a job request document is created when you submit the job request. The job
request document is then converted into a job document, based on which the job can be scheduled (that is,
handed over to the managed system or to an external, SMSE-certified scheduler).

Related Information

Requesting a New Job via a Job Request [page 171]

Requesting a Job Change via a Job Request [page 173]
Requesting a Job Deletion via a Job Request [page 175]
Creating a Custom Macro [page 177]

Business Process Operations

170 PUBLIC Job Management
6.3.1.1 Requesting a New Job via a Job Request

To request a new job, you can submit a job request. You can submit either a simple job request or a detailed
one.

Creating a Simple Job Request for a New Job

1. Open the Request Batch Job - Job Request + WF app with the simple UI, or open the Job Requests app and
choose Create Simple Job Request .
2. Choose the request type Request: Create New Job.
3. Enter a name for your job. You can use the Check feature to ensure that the name follows the suggested
naming convention.

 Note

To base your job request on the data from existing job documentation, click Fill from other Job Request
and use the input help to find the required job documentation. The system will load its details into the
current form, which you can then edit.

4. Optional: Enter a tag or select a tag that has been used already. Tags provide a simple way to label job
requests and job documentation. You can search for tagged objects using Quick Criteria Maintenance and
the Quick Search box in the Job Requests and Job Documentation apps.
5. Select a system and a client. You can use the input help or make the entries directly.

 Note

If you have selected existing job documentation, the input help only displays the corresponding
systems and clients.

6. Specify the review date to which the job request is to be valid.

7. Under Business Context, enter your business area, region, and country. The other entries are optional.
The value help is populated from the organizational structure for job management in Solution Manager
Configuration, although you can also fetch the organizational structure from an external scheduler via a
BAdI.
8. Describe the business requirements (for example, why you are scheduling a job) and the business process.
9. Specify the job steps. For each step, enter a description and a command or report.
10. Click Job Start Condition and enter the job scheduling and execution information:
○ Specify the frequency with which the job is to run.
○ Specify the date and time on which the job is to start. For SMSE jobs, the time zones available are the
CPS time zones.
○ Specify the maximum runtime for the job, its priority, and the target server/group.

 Example

To define a job that runs every 6 hours, you can set the job frequency to “Periodic”, the period to
“Hour”, and the value to “6”.

11. Submit the job request.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 171
Creating a Detailed Job Request for a New Job

1. Open the Request Batch Job - Job Request + WF app with the detailed UI, or open the Job Requests app
and choose Create Detailed Job Request .
2. Choose the request type Request: Create New Job.
3. The following table explains what information you can provide on each of the tab pages of the detailed job
request form. The job request form has a structure similar to the job documentation, so when the job
request is approved, the information you provide in the job request can be copied to the job
documentation.

Tab Page Description

General ○ Job request name

○ Product system and client
○ Date until which the job request is to be valid
○ The transaction type, categories, priority, and other information for processing the job request

Business ○ Business Context

Enter text descriptions of the business requirements (for example, why you are scheduling a job) and
the business process. The other entries (Region, Country Code, Organization, Business Area, and
Business Priority) are optional.
○ Additional Context Entries
Optionally, you can assign a logical component group, technical scenario, and solution documentation
context to your job request. Use the value help to select your entries.
You can only assign one solution documentation element to a job request.

Scheduli Choose a scheduler and specify detailed job scheduling information and calendar-based scheduling restric­
ng tions. Enter the job steps.

Organizat Document which organizations are responsible for a background job, which business priority the back­
ions ground job has, and for which purpose it is required.

Errors Document error handling procedures for the job.

Contacts Add the user and business partner data, for example the person responsible for job documentation.

Restrictio Document scheduling restrictions, such as other jobs that must not be scheduled at the same time as this
ns job.

Authoriza Document the authorizations required to schedule the job in the managed system.
tions

Tasks Create tasks for job documentation. You can then allocate these tasks to employees for processing.

Attachme Attach or link to documentation regarding the job request.

nts

4. Submit the job request.

Business Process Operations

172 PUBLIC Job Management
Result

A job request is created and linked with a corresponding incident or request for change.

6.3.1.2 Requesting a Job Change via a Job Request

To request a change to a job, you can submit a job request. You can submit either a simple job request or a
detailed one.

Creating a Simple Job Request for a Job Change

1. Open the Request Batch Job - Job Request + WF app with the simple UI, or open the Job Requests app and
choose Create Simple Job Request .
2. Choose the request type Request: Edit Existing Job.
3. In the Name field, use the input help to choose the job documentation for the job that you want to change.
You can only select the latest version of the job documentation, so that you don't change an older version
of the documentation by mistake. If your job documentation is linked with solution documentation, you can
only select job documentation that has been released to the production branch. Otherwise, you can only
select the highest version of the job documentation.
When you have selected the job documentation, the system automatically loads its detailed information for
you to edit.
4. Optional: Enter a tag or select a tag that has been used already. Tags provide a simple way to label job
requests and job documentation. You can search for tagged objects using Quick Criteria Maintenance and
the Quick Search box in the Job Requests and Job Documentation apps.
5. Make the required changes to the job.
6. Submit the job request.

Creating a Detailed Job Request for a Job Change

1. Open the Request Batch Job - Job Request + WF app with the detailed UI, or open the Job Requests app
and choose Create Detailed Job Request .
2. Choose the request type Request: Edit Existing Job.
3. In the Name field, use the input help to choose the job documentation for the job that you want to change.
You can only select the latest version of the job documentation, so that you don't change an older version
of the documentation by mistake. If your job documentation is linked with solution documentation, you can
only select job documentation that has been released to the production branch. Otherwise, you can only
select the highest version of the job documentation.
4. Make the required changes.
The following table explains what information you can provide on each of the tab pages of the detailed job
request form. The job request form has a structure similar to the job documentation, so when the job

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 173
 request is approved, the information you provide in the job request can be copied to the job
documentation.

Tab Page Description

General ○ Job request name

○ Product system and client
○ Date until which the job request is to be valid
○ The transaction type, categories, priority, and other information for processing the job request

Business ○ Business Context

Enter text descriptions of the business requirements (for example, why you are scheduling a job) and
the business process. The other entries (Region, Country Code, Organization, Business Area, and
Business Priority) are optional.
○ Additional Context Entries
Optionally, you can assign a logical component group, technical scenario, and solution documentation
context to your job request. Use the value help to select your entries.
You can only assign one solution documentation element to a job request.

Scheduli Choose a scheduler and specify detailed job scheduling information and calendar-based scheduling restric­
ng tions. Enter the job steps.

Organizat Document which organizations are responsible for a background job, which business priority the back­
ions ground job has, and for which purpose it is required.

Errors Document error handling procedures for the job.

Contacts Add the user and business partner data, for example the person responsible for job documentation.

Restrictio Document scheduling restrictions, such as other jobs that must not be scheduled at the same time as this
ns job.

Authoriza Document the authorizations required to schedule the job in the managed system.
tions

Tasks Create tasks for job documentation. You can then allocate these tasks to employees for processing.

Attachme Attach or link to documentation regarding the job request.

nts

5. Submit your job request.

Result

A job request is created and linked with a corresponding incident or request for change.

Business Process Operations

174 PUBLIC Job Management
6.3.1.3 Requesting a Job Deletion via a Job Request

To request the deletion of a job, you can submit a job request.

Creating a Simple Job Request for a Job Deletion

1. Open the Request Batch Job - Job Request + WF app with the simple UI, or open the Job Requests app and
choose Create Simple Job Request .
2. Choose the request type Request: Delete Existing Job.
3. In the Name field, use the input help to find the job that you want to delete. The system automatically loads
its information into the job request form.
4. Under Business Context, enter your business area, region, and country. The other entries are optional.
The value help is populated from the organizational structure for job management in Solution Manager
Configuration, although you can also fetch the organizational structure from an external scheduler via a
BAdI.
5. Click Job Start Condition and enter the job scheduling and execution information:
○ Specify the frequency with which the job is to run.
○ Specify the date and time on which the job is to start. For SMSE jobs, the time zones available are the
CPS time zones.
○ Specify the maximum runtime for the job, its priority, and the target server/group.
6. Submit the job request and specify the processor and system.

Creating a Detailed Job Request for a Job Deletion

1. Open the Request Batch Job - Job Request + WF app with the detailed UI, or open the Job Requests app
and choose Create Detailed Job Request .
2. Choose the request type Request: Delete Existing Job.
3. In the Name field, use the input help to find the job that you want to delete. The system automatically loads
its information into the job request form.
4. Complete any of the required information for the job that may be missing.
The following table explains what information you can provide on each of the tab pages of the detailed job
request form. The job request form has a structure similar to the job documentation, so when the job
request is approved, the information you provide in the job request can be copied to the job
documentation.

Tab Page Description

General ○ Job request name

○ Product system and client
○ Date until which the job request is to be valid
○ The transaction type, categories, priority, and other information for processing the job request

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 175
 Tab Page Description

Business ○ Business Context

Enter text descriptions of the business requirements (for example, why you are scheduling a job) and
the business process. The other entries (Region, Country Code, Organization, Business Area, and
Business Priority) are optional.
○ Additional Context Entries
Optionally, you can assign a logical component group, technical scenario, and solution documentation
context to your job request. Use the value help to select your entries.
You can only assign one solution documentation element to a job request.

Scheduli Choose a scheduler and specify detailed job scheduling information and calendar-based scheduling restric­
ng tions. Enter the job steps.

Organizat Document which organizations are responsible for a background job, which business priority the back­
ions ground job has, and for which purpose it is required.

Errors Document error handling procedures for the job.

Contacts Add the user and business partner data, for example the person responsible for job documentation.

Restrictio Document scheduling restrictions, such as other jobs that must not be scheduled at the same time as this
ns job.

Authoriza Document the authorizations required to schedule the job in the managed system.
tions

Tasks Create tasks for job documentation. You can then allocate these tasks to employees for processing.

Attachme Attach or link to documentation regarding the job request.

nts

5. Submit the job request.

Result

A job request is created and linked with a corresponding incident or request for change.

Business Process Operations

176 PUBLIC Job Management
6.3.1.4 Creating a Custom Macro

If you have to create a lot of job requests or job documentation, you can simplify the process by using macros.
For example, you can use macros to automatically enter contact persons, organizations, and systems (via a
logical component).

Procedure

1. In transaction SA38, start report RAGS_CREATE_JOBDOC_MACRO.

2. Provide a unique ID and description for your macro.
3. Enter the required parameters for business priority, logical component, region, country, contact person,
and so on.
4. Assign the macro to your user only or to all users in the SAP Solution Manager system.
5. Execute the report.

6.3.2 Requesting Jobs via a Job Document

You can schedule a new job, a change to a job, or a job deletion using the job document directly, which means
that a job request is not required.

In this case, the job document is linked to an incident in IT Service Management, a request for change in
Change Request Management, or an external ticketing system. The job document stores the job data, and the
incident or request for change handles the approval and implementation workflow.

 Note

You may have integrated your own, external ticketing system to manage the job documents. However, for
the sake of clarity, we assume that you use either IT Service Management or Change Request
Management.

When you request that a job be scheduled via a job document, you can run in-built validation checks on the job
data. You can also add your own checks via the BAdI for Simple Job Definition Validation
(BADI_AGS_SJR_VALIDATOR), and integrate an external ticketing system into the simplified process by using
the BAdI for External Service Desk (BADI_AGS_SJR_EXTSDK).

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 177
Related Information

Requesting a New Job via a Job Document [page 178]

Requesting a Job Change via a Job Document [page 179]
Requesting a Job Deletion via a Job Document [page 179]
Creating a Custom Macro [page 177]

6.3.2.1 Requesting a New Job via a Job Document

To request a new job, you can submit a job document.

Procedure

1. Open the Request Batch Job - Job Document + WF app with the simplified UI.
2. Choose the request type Request: Create New Job.
3. Enter a name for your job. You can use the Check feature to ensure that the name follows the suggested
naming convention.
4. Optional: Enter a tag or select a tag that has been used already. Tags provide a simple way to label job
requests and job documentation. You can search for tagged objects using Quick Criteria Maintenance and
the Quick Search box in the Job Requests and Job Documentation apps.
5. Select a system and a client. You can use the input help or make the entries directly.
6. Specify the review date to which the job request is to be valid.
7. Under Business Context, enter your business area, region, and country. The other entries are optional.
The value help is populated from the organizational structure for job management in Solution Manager
Configuration, although you can also fetch the organizational structure from an external scheduler via a
BAdI.
8. Describe the business requirements (for example, why you want the job to be scheduled) and the business
process.
9. Specify the job steps. For each step, enter a description and a command or report.
10. Click Job Start Condition and enter the job scheduling and execution information:
○ Specify the frequency with which the job is to run.
○ Specify the date and time on which the job is to start. For SMSE jobs, the time zones available are the
CPS time zones.
○ Specify the maximum runtime for the job, its priority, and the target server/group.
11. Submit the job request.

Results

A job document is created and linked with a corresponding incident or request for change.

Business Process Operations

178 PUBLIC Job Management
6.3.2.2 Requesting a Job Change via a Job Document

To request a change to a job, you can submit a job document.

Procedure

1. Open the Request Batch Job - Job Document + WF app with the simplified UI.
2. Choose the request type Request: Edit Existing Job.
3. In the Name field, use the input help to find the job that you want to change. Only the productive version
can be selected.
4. Optional: Enter a tag or select a tag that has been used already. Tags provide a simple way to label job
requests and job documentation. You can search for tagged objects using Quick Criteria Maintenance and
the Quick Search box in the Job Requests and Job Documentation apps.
5. Make the required changes to the job.
6. Submit the job request.

Results

A job document is created and linked with a corresponding incident or request for change.

6.3.2.3 Requesting a Job Deletion via a Job Document

To request the deletion of a job, you can submit a job document.

Procedure

1. Open the Request Batch Job - Job Document + WF app with the simplified UI.
2. Choose the request type Request: Delete Existing Job.
3. In the Name field, use the input help to find the job that you want to delete.
4. Click Job Start Condition and specify an end date for the job.
5. Submit the job request and specify the processor and system.

Results

A job request is created and linked with a corresponding incident or request for change.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 179
6.3.3 Processing Job Requests

Use

Once a job request has been created, it must undergo an approval and implementation process.

Each job request is linked to either an incident or service request in IT Service Management, or a request for
change in Change Request Management. The job request stores the job data, and the incident, or request for
change handles the approval and implementation work flow.

Job requests can be handled with IT Service Management, Change Request Management, or a combination of
the two:

● Processing Job Requests with IT Service Management [page 180]

● Processing Job Requests with Change Request Management [page 183]

Job Management provides a change control functionality that can allow or prohibit editing of job requests and
job documentation, depending on the status of the linked CRM document.

More Information

● Change Control for Job Requests and Job Documentation [page 193]
● IT Service Management
● Change Request Management

6.3.3.1 Processing Job Requests with IT Service

Management

Job Management is integrated with IT Service Management to process job requests from end users. A job
request can be created with the transaction types Incident or Service Request.

Prerequisites

In SAP Solution Manager Configuration (transaction SOLMAN_SETUP), administration has configured the IT
Service Management scenario and the Job Management scenario, including the required steps for integrating
IT Service Management with Job Management.

Business Process Operations

180 PUBLIC Job Management
Process

The following figure illustrates the integration of Job Management with IT Service Management for processing
job requests:

1. The end user creates a job request with the transaction type Incident or Service Request thus generating an
incident or a service request in IT Service Management.
For more information, see Creating Job Requests [page 170].
2. The service employee forwards the incident or the service request to a processor, generally the person
responsible for the business process operation related to the requested job.
3. If the job request is for a new job, the processor either creates new job documentation or assigns existing
job documentation to the job.
○ Creating new job documentation:
The system copies the data from the job request directly into the job documentation, which can then
be edited.
○ Assigning existing job documentation:
The processor updates existing job documentation with the new job request data.
For more information, see Editing Job Scheduling Incidents [page 182].
4. The processor forwards the incident or the service request to the technical operator, who is responsible for
managing the background job. The operator implements the job according to the request and updates the
job documentation, if necessary. The operator sets the incident message or the service to Complete, and
the requester is notified.

Result

The job documentation is updated. The service employee can make further changes to the job documentation,
such as copying job parameters from the production system to a test system or a development system.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 181
6.3.3.1.1 Editing Job Scheduling Incidents

Context

In an incident that is linked to a job request, you create new job documentation or assign existing job
documentation so that the new job can be scheduled from the job documentation.

Procedure

1. Open the incident in the WebClient UI.

○ From the Job Management - Administration app:
1. Choose the Job Requests view.
2. Find the job request you want to edit.
3. Click the link in the CRM Document column of the job request.
○ From the WebClient UI:
1. Choose IT Service Management Incidents .
2. Search for and open the relevant incident.
2. Set the status and processor.
1. Choose Edit, and then set the status to In Process.
2. Make sure that your business partner is entered in the Processor field.
3. Save your entries.
3. Scroll down to the Job Management assignment block, and choose Edit.

 Note

If the Job Management assignment block is not displayed, choose Personalize to add it.

4. Create new job documentation or assign existing job documentation to the incident.
○ To create new job documentation for the job request, choose Create Job Documentation.
The system automatically copies the data from the job request to the job documentation, and the job
documentation appears in the list, together with the job request.
○ To assign existing job documentation, choose Assign Job Documentation, and then select the job
documentation.
The selected job documentation appears in the list, together with the job request.
5. To compare the job request with the assigned job documentation, choose Compare.
6. To copy data from the job request to the job documentation, choose Copy Data.
7. Edit the job documentation further, if necessary.

You can open the job documentation for editing by clicking the link in the ID column.

Business Process Operations

182 PUBLIC Job Management
Results

The job documentation is assigned to the job request, and has the correct job data. The requested job can now
be scheduled from the job documentation. For more information, see Scheduling Jobs with Job Documentation
[page 219].

6.3.3.2 Processing Job Requests with Change Request

Management

Job Management is integrated with Change Request Management to process job requests from end users.
Change Request Management centrally tracks all job requests and enables you to easily access and update the
associated job documentation. You can accept or reject the requested changes in Change Request
Management and document the background processing and change phases, such as development and testing.

 Note

Different organizations may have different approval and implementation processes in Change Request
Management. Job Scheduling Management can be fully integrated into your existing Change Request
Management processes without having any impact on them.

Prerequisites

In SAP Solution Manager Configuration (transaction SOLMAN_SETUP), administration has configured the
Change Request Management scenario and the Job Management scenario, including the required steps for
integrating Change Request Management with Job Management.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 183
Process

The following figures illustrate the integration of Job Management with Change Request Management for
processing job requests:

Integration with Change Request Management

Business Process Operations

184 PUBLIC Job Management
 Integration with IT Service Management and Change Request Management

1. The end user creates a job request, and selects one of the following transaction types:
○ Request for change (SMCR)
A request for change is generated in Change Request Management. The service employee assigns a
change manager to it.
○ Incident (SMIN)
An incident is generated in IT Service Management. The service employee creates an associated
request for change and assigns a change manager to it.
For more information, see Creating Job Requests [page 170]
2. The change manager either approves or rejects the change request.
3. If the change manager approves the change request, the system creates the associated change
document.
From the change document, you can create and edit the job documentation. For more information, see
Editing Job Scheduling Change Documents [page 186].

 Recommendation

Although Job Management supports all Change Request Management change document types
(depending on the Customizing settings), SAP recommends that you use the Administrative Change
(SMAD) change document type for job changes. Changes based on this type do not have to be
transported with a transport request.

4. The implementation team processes the change document as follows:

1. Make the change according to the request.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 185
 2. Check whether job documentation exists for the changed job:
○ If not, create job documentation. For more information, see Creating Job Documentation [page
187].
○ If yes, assign the job documentation to this change document (if it has not already been assigned)
in the Job Scheduling assignment block. For more information, see Assigning Job Documentation
[page 188].
3. Display and check the changes that have been made to the job documentation. For more information,
see Comparing Job Documentation with Job Requests [page 189].
4. Update the job documentation with the parameters in the job request. For more information, see
Copying Job Request Data to Job Documentation [page 190].
5. Make further changes to the job documentation, if required. For more information, see Changing Job
Documentation [page 191].

6.3.3.2.1 Editing Job Scheduling Change Documents

Use

You want to edit a request to change or create job documentation using Change Request Management.

Prerequisites

● The change manager has approved a request for change based on a job request, and created a change
document.
● The Job Management assignment block is configured in the WebClient UI.
● You have opened the job request in change mode.

Features

You can edit change documents for job scheduling in the Job Management assignment block of the WebClient
UI.

You can use this assignment block for all change document types.

By default, the system uses the Administrative Change change document for job scheduling.

Business Process Operations

186 PUBLIC Job Management
Activities

You find the relevant administrative change in one of the following ways:

● In the WebClient UI:

1. Choose Change Request Management Change Document .
2. Select transaction type SMAD, for example, as the search criterion (for the Administrative Change).
● In the Job Management launchpad group:
1. Choose the Job Requests.
Your personal object worklist (POWL) is displayed. For more information, see Job Requests [page 168].
2. Click an entry in the CRM Document column. The system starts the WebClient UI.

More Information

● Processing Requests for Change

● Request for Change
● Change Document
● For more information about using the WebClient UI, see SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/crm
SAP CRM 7.0 Application Help SAP Customer Relationship Management Getting Started with the
WebClient UI .

6.3.3.2.1.1 Creating Job Documentation

Prerequisites

● You are currently editing the change document in the WebClient UI.
● The change document has the status In Process and contains no errors.
● You have not yet assigned job documentation to the change document.

Context

You want to create new job documentation and assign it to a change document.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 187
Procedure

1. Navigate to the Job Scheduling Management assignment block.

2. Choose Edit.
3. Choose Create Job Documentation.
4. Save the change document.

Results

You have created new job documentation as a copy of the job request. The system has assigned the job
documentation automatically to the change document. The job documentation appears in the Job Scheduling
Management assignment block and in the document flow.

6.3.3.2.1.2 Assigning Job Documentation

Prerequisites

● You are currently editing the change document in the WebClient UI.
● The change document has the status In Process and contains no errors.
● You have not yet assigned job documentation to the change document.

Context

You want to assign existing job documentation to a change document.

Procedure

1. Navigate to the Job Scheduling Management assignment block.

2. Choose Edit.
3. Choose Assign Job Documentation.

A dialog box appears.

4. Use the search (with the job name, for example) to determine the relevant job documentation for the job
request.

Business Process Operations

188 PUBLIC Job Management
 5. Select the job documentation.

The system copies the job documentation to the assignment block.

6. Save your entries.

Results

You have assigned job documentation to the change document. The job documentation appears in the
document flow and in the Job Scheduling Management assignment block.

6.3.3.2.1.3 Comparing Job Documentation with Job Requests

Prerequisites

● You are currently editing the change document in the WebClient UI.
● Job documentation is assigned to the change document.
● The change document has the status In Process.

Context

You want to display and check the changes made to the job documentation by the job request before you
update the job documentation. The system compares the relevant parameters of the job request with the
parameters of the assigned job documentation.

Procedure

1. Navigate to the Job Scheduling Management assignment block.

2. Choose Compare.

A dialog box appears in which the job documentation and job request are compared. The system indicates
whether and which values are different in the job request.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 189
Results

You have displayed the parameters for the job request and job documentation and can check for differences
between the job documentation and job request.

6.3.3.2.1.4 Copying Job Request Data to Job Documentation

Prerequisites

● You are currently editing the change document in the WebClient UI.
● You have assigned job documentation to the change document.
● The change document has the status In Process.

Context

After you have checked for changes, you want to update the job documentation with the job request
parameters. You can also create new job documentation with the job request parameters.

Procedure

1. Navigate to the Job Scheduling Management assignment block.

2. Choose Edit.
3. Choose Copy Data.

Results

You have created a new version of the job documentation using the data from the job request.

Business Process Operations

190 PUBLIC Job Management
6.3.3.2.1.5 Changing Job Documentation

Prerequisites

● The change document has the status In Process and you have assigned job documentation to the change
document.
● You are currently editing the change document in the WebClient UI.
● Your user is entered as the Current Processor in the Parties Involved assignment block.
● You are authorized to change the job documentation.

 Note

The administrator defines the authorization of actions for editing job documentation in SAP Solution
Manger Configuration (transaction solman_setup), Job Management scenario, in the step Integrate
ChaRM.

Context

In addition to updating the job documentation, you also want to make changes to it.

Procedure

1. Navigate to the Job Scheduling Management assignment block.

2. In the ID column of the table, click a job documentation entry.
3. Change the job documentation.

For more information, see Job Documentation [page 193].

Results

You have changed the job documentation assigned to the change document.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 191
6.3.3.3 Processing Job Requests with an External Ticketing
System

You can integrate Job Management with your own, external ticketing system by implementing Business Add-In
(BAdI) BADI_AGS_SJR_EXTSDK. A requester can create a ticket in the external system or can submit a job
document in the SAP Solution Manager system.

Prerequisites

You have created your own implementation of BAdI for External Service Desk (BADI_AGS_SJR_EXTSDK).

Process

The following figure illustrates how an external ticketing system can be integrated with SAP Solution Manager.

1. If the process starts in the external ticketing tool, the requester creates a ticket there and the data is
transferred to a job request in SAP Solution Manager. Alternatively, the requester can create a job request
directly in SAP Solution Manager.
2. When the request is submitted, the reviewer validates and completes the job information before setting the
status of the job request to “Approved”.
Alternatively, the reviewer can process the ticket in the external ticketing tool.
3. In SAP Solution Manager, the job scheduler completes the scheduling details by assigning a time window
and time frame for submission. A job is also defined in central process scheduling. The status of the
request is then set to “Completed” and the status of the job document is set to “Production”.
Alternatively, the job scheduler can process and complete the ticket in the external ticketing tool.

Business Process Operations

192 PUBLIC Job Management
6.3.3.4 Change Control for Job Requests and Job
Documentation

Each job request is linked to a ticket, such as an incident, request for change, or external ticket. If you use the
simplified workflow to schedule a job directly from job documentation, the job document is linked to these
tickets.

In job management, you can use change control to allow or prohibit actions on job requests or job
documentation, depending on the status of the linked transaction.

 Example

Job documentation is created from a change document, and is therefore linked with this change document.
The job documentation owner activates change control so that the job documentation can only be edited if
the change document has the status In Process.

Prerequisites

Administration has configured change control for job requests and job documentation in SAP Solution
Manager Configuration, Job Management scenario.

Activities

To activate change control, locate and select the job request or job documentation in the list, and choose
Change Control Activate .

6.4 Job Documentation

Job documentation is the central object of the Job Management standard. It allows you to centrally manage,
schedule, and document in detail the background processing of your entire system landscape.

The Job Documentation is the central access point to most activities related to job documentation. It provides
the following functions:

● Displaying job documentation

Job documentation is displayed in a list. You can choose a standard query or define your own queries. You
can use Quick Criteria Maintenance to restrict the query results list by various criteria, including the
technical system description, role, priority, lifecycle status, and business partner.
It is also possible to query the job documentation based on Solution Documentation ID and Solution
Documentation Description.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 193
  Note

The relevant queries enable you to view job documentation that was created at the same time as the
monitoring objects, provided that the job documentation was edited after it was created.

When you select job documentation in the list, its details are displayed below.
● Creating and editing job and job chain documentation
You can use job documentation templates to ensure consistency.
● Copying job documentation
When you copy job documentation, the copy gets the name Copy from <name of source
documentation>.
● Creating a new version
To save the current version of the job documentation before making changes, you can create a new version.
You can later view the saved versions by opening the job documentation and choosing Versions. When you
set the higher version as active version, the status of the lower version automatically changes to Obsolete.
● Activating or deactivating job monitoring
If job monitoring is configured for the job documentation, you can activate or deactivate the job monitoring
directly in the overview. You do not need to open the job documentation to do so.
For more information, see Job Monitoring.
● Activating or deactivating change control
The change control functionality can allow or prohibit editing of job documentation, depending on the
status of the linked CRM document. For more information, see Change Control for Job Requests and Job
Documentation [page 193].
● Creating a print view of job documentation as a PDF document

 Note

You can use the default form delivered by SAP or a custom form. For information on how to create and
use a custom form, see SAP Note 1225976 .

● Exporting the overview list to Microsoft Excel

● Opening the linked CRM document
Every job document is linked to an external ticket or CRM document. The IT Ticket column refers to the
external or CRM document. The details can be viewed on the Linked CRM Ticket tab in the Detailed
Documentation of the Job section.

Related Information

Creating and Editing Job Documentation [page 196]

Importing Job Data into Job Documentation [page 208]
Working with Job Documentation Templates [page 212]
Scheduling Jobs with Job Documentation [page 219]

Business Process Operations

194 PUBLIC Job Management
6.4.1 Integration with Solution Documentation

Job Management is integrated with Solution Documentation.

From Solution Administration (transaction SLAN), you can create new job documentation (or choose existing
job documentation) and assign it to a solution documentation library context as an external object. The job
documentation must be created in the library of a specified branch; then it can refer to other places (library
steps or E2E elements). You can also display job documentation attributes, change job documentation, and
create new versions.

You can also assign solution documentation and process elements on the Systems Tab Page [page 201] of job
documentation.

Prerequisites

Solution documentation has been implemented for your process landscape.

Procedure

Creating/Assigning Job Documentation from Solution Administration

For the create case, fill in all mandatory fields and some important but optional fields to create simple, basic job
documentation.

For the assign case, you assign existing job documentation that is not linked with any other solution
documentation context. (Job documentation that is linked to another branch is not selectable.)

1. From Solution Administration (transaction SLAN), open the solution documentation of a branch.
2. Select an ACH (Application Component Hierarchy) folder from the Executable library.
3. Use the context menu (right-click) to create or assign job documentation.
4. A dialog appears for creating and assigning cases. Note that there is a read-only Logical Component Group
field in the window whose value comes from the parent ACH folder element.
In the create case, complete all mandatory fields and save.
In the assign case, select an existing job documentation using the value help, and save.

The job documentation is assigned to the specified solution documentation element.

Displaying Job Documentation Attributes from Solution Administration

You can view job documentation attributes in solution documentation. The attribute list is predefined in the
solution documentation model.

When you select a job documentation in solution documentation, an attribute panel is displayed on the right.
Read-only fields display attributes maintained in job management. Editable fields display attributes maintained
in solution documentation (from the Executable library).

Changing Job Documentation in Solution Administration

You can display or change existing job documentation from solution documentation.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 195
When you edit job documentation, depending on the solution documentation lifecycle mechanism, you may be
asked whether to create a new version for further modifications. If yes, the newly created job documentation
version is linked with the corresponding solution documentation element. If no, changes are made on current
opened job documentation version.

1. In solution documentation, right-click on the job documentation and choose Display or Change.
2. In the confirmation dialog, choose OK to create a new version and replace the current job documentation
of the solution documentation element. Choose cancel to make changes on the current job
documentation.

Assigning the Process Landscape in Job Documentation

In the Job Management - Administration app, you can assign a solution documentation context on the Systems
tab page of job documentation.

You can only assign one solution documentation library context, but multiple process elements. Assign the job
documentation to a specific element in the library first, then assign the relevant process elements.

After the solution documentation context is assigned to the job documentation, you can access the job
documentation from the solution documentation as well as from the Job Management - Administration app.

6.4.2 Creating and Editing Job Documentation

The job documentation view is displayed when you create new job or job chain documentation or open existing
job documentation.

The job documentation view has the following tab pages:

● General Tab Page [page 197]

Enter general information about the job documentation, such as the name and job steps.
● Job Chain Structure Tab Page [page 199] (only available in job chain documentation)
Link the documentation of the jobs in a job chain to the job chain documentation.
● Organization Tab Page [page 200]
Document the responsible organization, reason for the job, and priority.
● Systems Tab Page [page 201]
Assign logical components and specify in which systems the job is scheduled or for which systems the job
is documented.
● Error Tab Page [page 202]
Document error handling procedures.
● Contact Person Tab Page [page 203]
Specify the contact persons for areas such as job documentation, job development, job scheduling or job
monitoring.
● Restrictions Tab Page [page 204]
Document restrictions that have to be taken into account in scheduling the job, for example, whether
another job has to run before or after this job.
● Authorizations Tab Page [page 204]
Document the authorizations required for scheduling jobs.
● Tasks Tab Page [page 205]
Specify the tasks required for the job documentation. You can then assign the tasks to employees.
● Documents Tab Page [page 206]

Business Process Operations

196 PUBLIC Job Management
 Add documents or references to documents.
● Changes Tab Page [page 207]
Document the change requests that the employees have submitted for the job as well as all changes to the
job documentation.
● Job-Doc Relationship Graph [page 208]
Graphical representation of the relationship between the job documentation, job request, logical
component group, Incident, Request for Change, and Change Document.

Additional Features

● Displaying job documentation versions

● Creating a print view as a PDF document
● Creating a job request
If you want to change a job, you can create a job request. When you create a job request from the job
documentation, the system copies the job documentation data into the job request form and assigns the
job documentation to the job request via the associated CRM object.
For more information, see Creating Job Requests [page 170].
● Running a macro
If you have to create several job documentations, you can simplify the process by using macros. For
example, you can use macros to automatically enter contact persons, organizations, and systems (via a
logical component). For more information, see Creating a Custom Macro [page 177].
● Adding to favorites
This can be useful, for example, when you want quick access to job documentation so you can compare it
with other job documentation.

6.4.2.1 General Tab Page

Use

The General tab page contains descriptive information about the job and its steps.

Procedure

1. Enter a unique name for your job documentation.

2. Optionally, you can enter a tag or select a tag that has been used already. Tags provide a simple way to
label job requests and job documentation. You can search for tagged objects using Quick Criteria
Maintenance and the Quick Search box.
3. Select the job type.
The job type selection enables the system to launch the right applications for scheduling and configuring
monitoring for the job from the Systems Tab Page [page 201].
If the scheduling is managed with an SMSE-certified external job scheduler, choose the External Scheduler
check box.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 197
  Note

The SAP Scheduler only supports scheduling of ABAP jobs and BW Process Chains.

If you use an external scheduler, you can schedule other types of jobs from job documentation,
including SAP BusinessObjects jobs and SAP Data Services jobs.

4. Choose a documentation status.

5. For Valid until, you can specify a date after which the job documentation (and its jobs) should be checked.
The date is displayed in the Expiration Date column of the job documentation list. It does not cause any
automatic activities to occur, such as stopping a job.
6. Describe the job. Specify the tasks which the job performs. You can also provide text descriptions of the
scheduling and monitoring requirements.
7. To add a step, choose Add.
A dialog box appears.
1. Enter a description of the job step.
2. Select the type. The types you can choose depend on the scheduler selected.
3. Enter the program name (for example the name of the ABAP report) under Command.
4. You can specify, for example, the ABAP report variant under Parameter.

 Note

The Client-Dependent check box is for documentation purposes only. You can use it to indicate if a
job works on client-specific or on client-independent data.

5. Save your entries.

The step appears in the table, with your data.
8. Create further steps, if required.

 Note

If you have selected the BC-XBP scheduler, you can document more than one step per job.

9. You can edit the steps in the table as follows:

○ If you have created a step that executes an ABAP report and have created a variant of the report, you
can display the parameters of the variant. To do so, follow these steps:
1. Choose a link in the Parameter/Variant column.
2. Choose Find.
○ To change the order of the steps to be performed:
1. Select the step in the table.
2. Select Up or Down in the context menu.
○ To edit a step:
1. Select the step in the table.
2. Choose Edit.
You go to a dialog box in which you can make your changes.
3. Save your entries.
○ To remove a step:
1. Select the step.
2. Choose Remove.
You go to a dialog box.

Business Process Operations

198 PUBLIC Job Management
 3. Confirm with Remove.
10. Save your entries.

 Note

To schedule the job or configure job monitoring, use the Systems Tab Page [page 201].

6.4.2.2 Job Chain Structure Tab Page

Prerequisites

You have created job chain documentation.

Context

When you edit the documentation of a job chain, you document the job chain structure by linking the job chain
to its job documentation.

 Note

The steps of a job chain are performed sequentially, whereas the jobs within each step are performed in
parallel.

Procedure

1. Switch to edit mode.

2. Choose jobs in the table.
3. Choose the documentation for each job from the value help.

Example

Row Step 1 Step 2 Step 3

Row 1 Job 1 Job 3 Job 5

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 199
Row Step 1 Step 2 Step 3

Row 2 Job 2

1. Click in row 1 on the field for step 1 and choose job documentation from the value help.
2. Click in row 1 and row 2 on the field for step 2 and choose job documentation from the value help.
3. Click in row 1 on the field for step 3 and choose job documentation from the value help.

6.4.2.3 Organization Tab Page

Use

On this tab page, you document which organizations are responsible for a background job, which business
priority the background job has, and for which purpose it is required.

Procedure

Assigning an Organization to the Job

1. Choose Add.
A dialog box appears.
2. Under Data Source, select the following:
○ Organizational Model: You can assign the organization using an organizational model, such as a
department in a company.
○ Direct Entry: You can assign the organization using the Region, Country Code, Organization, and
Business Area fields.

 Note

You specify the data proposed in the input help for these fields in Customizing.

Specifying Business Requirements for the Job

1. Select the business priority of the background job under Priority. You can choose the following:
○ Very High
○ High
○ Medium
○ Low
The priority is Medium by default.
2. Document the purpose of the background job under Business Requirements.

Business Process Operations

200 PUBLIC Job Management
6.4.2.4 Systems Tab Page

Use

On this tab page, you assign one or more systems to the job documentation. You can assign the systems via
the logical component group, solution documentation element, or technical scenario.

Assigning systems allows you to perform the following activities through the job documentation:

● Schedule jobs
Job Management supports scheduling of the following types of jobs:
○ ABAP jobs (BC-XBP interface)
○ External jobs managed by a SMSE-enabled external scheduler
○ For BW process chains (BW-SCH interface), you can view but not change the scheduling.
○ Custom job types that have been configured in the Extended Configuration step of the Job
Management scenario in SAP Solution Manager Configuration .
For more information, see Scheduling Jobs with Job Documentation [page 219].
● Configure monitoring
Job Management supports the configuration of monitoring for all types of jobs via job documentation.
Once monitoring is configured and activated, you can launch the Job Monitor from the job documentation.
For more information, see Job Monitoring.

 Note

The scheduling interface and job type selected on the General tab page enable the system to launch the
right scheduling and monitoring applications for the job.

Procedure

To add a system, proceed as follows:

1. Open the job documentation and choose the Systems tab page.
2. Switch to edit mode.
3. Choose Add, and then choose one of the following contexts:
○ Logical Component Group
○ Solution Documentation
○ Technical Scenario
A dialog box appears.
4. Use the value help to select the relevant context.
5. Choose Assign.
The selected context appears in the table.
6. Select the row for the context you added.
A list of technical systems is displayed in the table below.
7. Select the system on which the job is running. The list may show several rows corresponding to the
different clients of the same system. Select the row with the correct client.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 201
  Note

If the job documentation is opened from solution documentation on the Systems tab page, the upper
table containing the Logical Component group and Solution Branch Information is hidden and in the
lower table the system according to the system role and site selection is preselected. You can select
other systems also as per your requirement.

8. Save the job documentation.

6.4.2.5 Error Tab Page

Context

On this tab page, you document error handling procedures.

Procedure

1. Document how to restart background processing under Restart in the input fields Prerequisites and
Preparation, Procedure, and Post-Processing and Check.
2. Document the conditions under which the system should cancel a running background job, under Cancel,
in the input fields Prerequisites and Preparation, Procedure, and Post-Processing and Check.
3. Document the prerequisites and procedure for continuing background processing after a crash, under
Continue, in the input fields Prerequisites and Preparation, Procedure, and Post-Processing and Check.
4. Document how to reschedule background processing, under Repeat, in the input fields Prerequisites and
Preparation, Procedure, and Post-Processing and Check.
5. Enter the contact persons responsible in case of an error or unexpected behavior, under Communication.
You can add business partners, users, or an email address.

Enter the ten-character business partner number of the contact person you want to add.

Enter the user name of the contact person you want to add.

 Note

You add and edit business partners in the WebClient UI. You add and edit users in transaction SU01.

6. Document other relevant notes, conditions, and instructions, as free text in the input field, under Notes.
7. Save your entries.

Business Process Operations

202 PUBLIC Job Management
6.4.2.6 Contact Person Tab Page

Use

You can specify the contact persons and their area of responsibility on this tab. You can add contacts by their e-
mail address, business partner, or user.

You can assign the contact persons to the following areas:

● Background Processing, for example the job administrator

● Business Process
● Development, for example, the software developer
● Job Documentation, the person responsible for this job documentation
● Monitoring
● System Landscape, for example the system administrator

Procedure

Adding a Business Partner

1. Choose Add Business Partner .

A dialog box appears.
2. Enter the business partner number of the contact person you want to add.
You can use the input help.
3. Choose an area.
4. Confirm your entries.

Adding a User

1. Choose Add User .

A dialog box appears.
2. Enter the user name of the contact person you want to add.
You can use the input help.
3. Choose an area.
4. Confirm your entries.

Removing a Contact

1. Select the contact person you want to remove.

2. Choose Remove.
3. Save your entries.

Result

The contact appears in the list. When you select a contact, the available contact data appears below the list.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 203
6.4.2.7 Restrictions Tab Page

Context

You document job scheduling restrictions on this tab page.

Procedure

1. Choose Add.
2. Enter a name for the scheduling restriction.
3. Choose a type. By default, there are four possible types of scheduling restrictions:

Scheduling Restriction Description

Conflict Use this type if your job can cause conflicts. A conflict can,
for example, occur when two particular jobs run in parallel.

Dependency Use this type if the job depends on other factors or jobs.

Predecessor Use this type if another job must run before this one.

Successor Use this type if another job must run after this one.

 Note

If required, the administrator can specify additional types of scheduling restrictions. These are defined
in SAP Solution Manager Configuration, under Job Management Extended Configuration Setup
Organization Model Scheduling Restriction .

4. In the Job Name field, use the value help to select the job documentation for the job with which there is a
conflict, dependency, or predecessor/successor relationship. This will create a link that allows you to
quickly open the corresponding job documentation.
5. Describe the scheduling restriction.
6. Confirm with OK and save your entries.

To view the details of the scheduling restriction, select it in the list. Its details appear below.

6.4.2.8 Authorizations Tab Page

Use

On this tab page, you document the authorizations required for job scheduling.

Business Process Operations

204 PUBLIC Job Management
Procedure

Adding an Authorization

1. Under Add, choose whether to add the authorization in the form of an SAP role, an authorization object or
a custom object.
A dialog box appears.
2. In the dialog box, enter the authorization and a description of the authorization.
3. Save your entries.

The authorization you just created appears in the Authorizations list.

Changing an Authorization

1. In the Authorizations list, select the authorization that you wish to change.
2. Choose Change.
A dialog box appears.
3. Edit the authorization.
4. Save your entries.

You have changed the authorization.

Removing an Authorization

1. In the Authorization list, select the authorization that you wish to remove.
2. Choose Remove.
The system removes the task from the Authorizations list.

 Note

You have not yet removed the authorization from the system. To remove it, you have to save the job
documentation.

3. Save the job documentation.

You have removed the authorization.

6.4.2.9 Tasks Tab Page

Use

On this tab page, you create tasks for job documentation. You can then allocate these tasks to employees for
processing.

Procedure

Adding a Task

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 205
1. Choose Create.
A dialog box appears.
2. Enter task details on the tabs of the dialog box.
3. Save your entries and close the dialog box.
4. Update the task list for the job documentation.

The task you just created appears in the task list.

Changing a Task

1. In the task list, select the task that you wish to change.
2. Choose Change.
A dialog box appears.
3. Edit the task details.
4. Save your entries and close the dialog box.
5. Update the task list for the job documentation.

Removing a Task

1. In the task list, select the task that you wish to remove.
2. Choose Remove.
The system removes the task from the task list.

 Note

The task has not yet been removed from the system. To remove it, you have to save the job
documentation.

3. Save the job documentation.

6.4.2.10 Documents Tab Page

Use

You can add a document or a reference to a job document on this tab page.

 Example

You have created your job documentation with a word-processing program. You can now assign this
existing document to the job documentation.

Procedure

To import a document:

1. Choose Browse to search for the document in your local file system.
2. Choose Upload to transfer the document to the SAP Solution Manager system and to assign it to the job
documentation.

Business Process Operations

206 PUBLIC Job Management
To create a URL as a reference to a document:

1. Specify the URL to the document.

2. You can enter a document description.
3. Choose Create to implement the URL as a reference to the job documentation.

To display a document:

1. Choose the document in the Documents list.

2. Choose Display.

To remove a document:

1. Choose the document in the Documents list.

2. Choose Remove.

6.4.2.11 Changes Tab Page

Use

The Changes tab page provides an overview of CRM transactions linked to the job documentation and a change
log.

Under Job Requests, you can view the job requests assigned to the job documentation via an incident or a
request for change. You can also assign transactions here.

The Change Log displays a log of changes made to the job documentation.

Procedure

Job Requests

To assign a transaction:

1. Choose Assign.
A dialog box appears.
2. Specify the transaction type, for example:
○ SMCR for a request for change
○ SMIN for an incident
○ SLFI for an issue
3. Enter your transaction number. You can use the input help.

 Note

You cannot assign a completed transaction. You can only assign an open transaction.

4. Save your entries.

Change Log

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 207
This tab displays the log of changes made to job documentation. Choose from:

● New entries
Changes not yet saved.
● Existing entries
Changes have been made.

6.4.2.12 Job-Doc Relationship Graph

The Job-Doc Relationship Graph tab page provides a graphical presentation of the relationship among the
following objects:

● Job documentation
● Job request
● Logical component group
● Linked CRM Order (External Ticket)

6.4.3 Importing Job Data into Job Documentation

With the Import Jobs application, you can automatically create job documentation for one or more jobs in a
system and copy the job steps and scheduling data. You can import data from ABAP jobs and BW process
chains managed with the SAP scheduler, and you can import data from jobs managed with an SMSE-certified
external scheduler. You can also import data from MS Excel.

Importing Externally Scheduled Jobs [page 208]

Importing Jobs from SAP Scheduler [page 209]

Importing BW Process Chains [page 210]

Importing Job Data from Microsoft Excel [page 211]

6.4.3.1 Importing Externally Scheduled Jobs

Context

Create job documentation for one or more externally scheduled jobs and copy the data for job scheduling
automatically. You can launch the Job Import application from the External Scheduler Management view or
choose the link under Common Tasks.

Business Process Operations

208 PUBLIC Job Management
Procedure

1. In the Job Management - Administration app, choose the External Scheduler Management view.
2. Use Quick Criteria Maintenance to search for jobs to import.
3. Select one or more jobs in the list, and choose Import.
4. Confirm your selection and choose Import Jobs.

Results

The system creates job documentation for the selected jobs. A list of the new job documentation is displayed.
Click the job documentation name link to check the new created job documentation.

6.4.3.2 Importing Jobs from SAP Scheduler

Context

Create job documentation for one or more ABAP jobs in a system and copy the data for job scheduling
automatically. You can launch the Job Import application from the SAP Scheduler Management view or choose
the link under Common Tasks.

Procedure

1. Open the Job Management - Administration app and choose the SAP Scheduler Management view.
2. Use Quick Criteria Maintenance to search for jobs to import.
3. Select one or more jobs in the list, and choose Import
4. Confirm your selection and choose Import Jobs.

Results

The system creates job documentation for the selected jobs. A list of the new job documentation is displayed.
Click the job documentation name link to check the new created job documentation.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 209
6.4.3.3 Importing BW Process Chains

Context

Create job documentation for one or more BW jobs in a system and copy the data for job scheduling
automatically.

Procedure

1. Open the Job Management - Administration app and under Common Tasks, choose Import Jobs.

The Import Jobs guided procedure appears.

2. Choose the job type BW Process Chain.
3. Select the system landscape context. You can specify systems via the logical component group, technical
scenario, or solution documentation element to which the system is assigned. Use the value help to make
your selections.
4. Choose Next.
5. Search for process chains to import:
○ Select a technical system in the systems list.
○ Choose an RFC connection. You can check if the connection works well.
○ Use select criteria to search for the process chain. The chain ID is mandatory.

The BW process chains that meet the search criteria are displayed. You can filter and sort the results list.
6. Select one or more chains in the table, and then choose Add to Selection.

Choose Display Selection to view the currently selected chains.

You can edit the target job documentation name manually. Otherwise, it will be set automatically to the
chain description. Note that you cannot have duplicate job documentation names.
7. If desired, repeat the search and selection to choose more process chains to import.
8. When the list contains all desired chains and job doc names, choose Complete to begin the import.

Results

The system creates job documentation for the selected process chains. A list of the new job documentation is
displayed.

● Click the job documentation name link to check the new created job documentation.
● Click the chain id link to open the BW system to check the chain details.

Business Process Operations

210 PUBLIC Job Management
6.4.3.4 Importing Job Data from Microsoft Excel

Context

You can import job scheduling data that is maintained in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet into job documentation
using report AC_JSM_JOBDOC_MASS_MAINTENANCE.

 Caution

As with SP11, an additional column (Job Documentation tag) was added to the MS Excel template. Excel
files that you have downloaded before SP11 cannot be processed anymore.

If you need to process such an Excel file anyway, download the new template (see Step 1 in the procedure
below) and add the missing column to your Excel file.

Procedure

1. Download the MS Excel template in one of the following ways:

Option Description

Download a blank template Click Download Template

Download a template that already contains job docu­ 1. Enter the job documentation numbers that you want
mentation to include in the template.
2. Enter the system ID and client.
3. Execute the report and click Download Excel (*.XLSX).

A Microsoft Excel file containing the specified job documentation (if any) is downloaded to your local
machine.

2. Open the Excel file and enter the data for the job documentation that you want to import.
3. In report AC_JSM_JOBDOC_MASS_MAINTENANCE, select the Read Mass Maintenance Excel radio button,
enter the path to the Excel file on your local machine, and execute the report.

The results screen appears, showing the content from your Excel template.
4. Optional: Choose Validate to check, for example, whether the job name exceeds the maximum permitted
length.
5. Click Read data from Managed System or Read data from Scheduler to add actual job data to the list (that
is, the current schedule and executables).

Doing so may overwrite the list from your Excel, but no changes are written to the database at this point.
6. Click Create / Update Job Documentation to add the content in your Excel template to the database.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 211
6.4.4 Working with Job Documentation Templates

You can create templates to help you create job documentation and ensure consistency.

For example, you can use a template to ensure that the job documentation contains the recommended
scheduling data.

You can assign templates to the following:

● Standard business processes delivered by SAP

● Standard logical components delivered by SAP
● SAP products

Prerequisites

● If you want to assign templates to SAP products, the Product and Production Management System
(PPMS) data must be up to date in SAP Solution Manager.
● If you want to assign templates to standard processes of the Business Process Repository (BPR), the data
of the ST-ICO add-on must be up to date in SAP Solution Manager.

Procedure

Opening the Template Directory

1. Ope the Job Management - Administration app and under Common Tasks, choose Access Template.
2. The Template Directory appears. With this application, you can create, view, and manage all of your job
documentation templates and their versions.

Creating New Templates

1. Open the Template Directory.
2. Choose Template Create .
The Create Job Documentation Template form appears.
3. General tab page
Enter the name of the job documentation template.
Also enter general data. The system takes over this general data for the job documentation created from
the template.
For more information about this tab for the job documentation, see General Tab Page [page 197].
4. Organization tab page
Assign organizations and enter the business information. The system takes over this data for the job
documentation created from the template.
For more information about this tab for the job documentation, see Organization Tab Page [page 200].
5. Systems tab page
Assign logical components. When you have assigned your systems to these logical components, these
systems are automatically assigned to the job documentation created from the template.
For more information about this tab for the job documentation, see Systems Tab Page [page 201].

Business Process Operations

212 PUBLIC Job Management
 6. Scheduling tab page
Enter scheduling data. You can:
○ Link scheduling data
○ You can link to the standard jobs from transaction SM36.
To do this, you choose Assign Standard Job .
A dialog box appears.
Select an RFC connection and a report name.
○ You can link to SAP Solution Manager jobs.
To do this, you choose Assign Solution Manager Job .
A dialog box appears.
Select a report.
The system shows the corresponding variant and the job.
○ You can link to job definitions from an external scheduler.
To do this, you choose Assign Job Definition .
A dialog box appears.
Select the job.
○ Enter scheduling data manually
○ You can assign an SAP job.
To do this, you choose Assign ABAP: Freely Definable Job Definition .
A dialog box appears.
Define the job.
○ You can assign a job which you define with an external scheduler.
To do this, you choose Assign Freely Definable SMSE Job Definition .
A dialog box appears.
Define the job.

 Note

You can assign multiple jobs, linking scheduling data or entering scheduling data manually.

7. Errors tab page

Enter error-handling procedures.
The system takes over this data for the job documentation created from the template.
For more information about this tab for the job documentation, see Error Tab Page [page 202].
8. Restrictions tab page
Enter the restrictions to be considered for the job scheduling. The system takes over this data for the job
documentation created from the template.
For more information about this tab for the job documentation, see Restrictions Tab Page [page 204].
9. Authorizations tab page
Enter the authorizations required for the job scheduling. The system takes over this data for the job
documentation created from the template.
For more information about this tab for the job documentation, see Authorizations Tab Page [page 204].
10. Save your entries.

Editing Templates
Select a job template in the Template Directory.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 213
You have the following options for editing the template selected:

● Template
○ Delete: You can delete the template selected.
○ Edit: You can edit the data of the template selected.
○ Copy: You can create a copy of the template selected. The system adds the copy to the list of
templates.
● Refresh: You can refresh the template selected.

 Note

There is no automatic update, because you compile the data for the job documentation template in a
separate window.

● Export
○ Active Version: You can export the current version of the template selected to an XML file.
○ All Versions: You can export all versions of the template selected to an XML file.
● Import: You can import a template to the template directory in the form of an XML file.
● Communication
○ Check for New Data: You can check whether new templates have been made available by SAP which
are not in your template directory yet.
○ Download Data: You can download the templates made available by SAP and copy them to your
template directory.

Editing a Version of a Selected Job Template

Select a job template in the Template Directory. The versions of the template selected appear in the Versions of
the Selected Job Template screen area.

Select a version.

You have the following options for editing the version:

● Edit: You can edit the data of the template version selected.
● Create New Version: You can create a new version as a copy of the template version selected. The system
then adds the new version to the list of versions.
● Refresh: You can refresh the versions of the template selected.

 Note

There is no automatic update, because you compile the data for the job documentation template in a
separate window.

● Delete: You can delete the template version selected.

● Create Job Documentation: You can create a job documentation from a template version selected. The
system then copies all data from the template to the corresponding areas of the job documentation, saves
it under the name of the template, and stores a reference to the template in the job documentation.
● Attributes Display : You can display the attributes of the template version selected.
A dialog box then appears. When you select an attribute in the attribute structure, the system shows
detailed information on the attribute.
● Attributes Change : You can change the attributes of a selected version.

Business Process Operations

214 PUBLIC Job Management
 A dialog box appears in which you can add attributes to the template or delete them. To add an attribute,
select one of the following object types for the new attribute under Add:
○ Category
○ Product assignment
When you add an attribute with this object type, you enter the product, the product version, and the
instance in the Attribute Maintenance screen area.
○ Required
When you add an attribute with this object type, the template is considered for the automatic creation
of job documentation.
For more information, see Creating Job Documentation from Templates [page 215].
○ Business process assignment
When you add an attribute with this object type, you enter the business object in the Attribute
Maintenance screen area.

6.4.4.1 Creating Job Documentation from Templates

Context

In SAP Solution Manager, you can create new job documentation easily and efficiently from templates.

Procedure

1. Choose Recommended Jobs.

2. Select a system.

3. Choose Job Documentation Template Create Job Documentation .

A dialog box appears.

4. Procedure

Select the procedure for creating job documentation from a template.

 Note

A procedure specifies the steps to be processed by the system for a task. Procedures include, for
example, creating job documentation from a template or scheduling jobs in the production system.

Under Description, the system shows a description of the procedure selected. Under Other Details of
Selected Procedure, you can choose additional information.

Choose Next to select a template.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 215
  Note

If you want to carry out the selected procedure immediately, do not select Next, but choose Complete
instead. The system then specifies the suitable templates (recommended templates; see step 5 [page
216]) and creates the job documentation based on them.

5. Template selection

Select one or more templates in the following lists, then choose Next Step to copy the templates:

○ Recommended Templates: This list shows all the templates flagged as Recommended.
○ All Templates for Selection: This list shows all the templates suitable for the procedure.
○ All Templates: This list shows all available templates.
6. Check

Check whether the list of the selected templates is complete.

 Note

You can add other templates to the list of selected templates by choosing Previous and going back to
the template selection.

Results

The system creates job documentation from the templates selected. As soon as the system has created job
documentation, you see the following:

● An entry in the Log screen area stating that the job documentation was created.
● Information on the job documentation in the Objects Created screen area.

6.4.5 Managing Job Documents According to Validity

Use

You can use report RAGS_MANAGE_EXPIRED_JOBDOC to send email reminders automatically to the job owner.
It serves to remind the job owner that the review date maintained in the job documents is coming up, by
sending an email containing a report about the current job document validity status.

Prerequisites

● You are using job documentation.

● The function for sending emails has been set up.

Business Process Operations

216 PUBLIC Job Management
Features

The report reviews the validity of the job documents and sends reminder emails automatically to the respective
job owners.

You can check whether a job document is still up to date, whether it must be changed, rescheduled or no longer
scheduled.

In the settings, you can enter a specific date and define which job types you want to check for validity.

 Recommendation

To check the validity of all job documents that need reviewing, we recommend using the report on a weekly
basis. In this way, you can distribute the workload for changing job documents more evenly than using the
report on a monthly or quarterly basis.

Job Log

The details of identified job documents reaching the end of validity are written to the job log. The job log
includes the following information:

● Job Name
● Job Document Number
● Version Number
● End Date of Validity: review date
● Notification Counter: how many reminders have already been sent

Reminder Emails

Reminder emails are sent automatically to the email addresses of the contact persons or job owners
maintained in the respective job documents that have review dates earlier than the date you have entered.

Depending on the email recipient and how often the email reminder has been sent, there are different emails
with relevant content for each case:

● If the email addresses of the job owners are available, reminder emails will be sent to the job owners.
● If the email address of the job owner is not available, reminder emails will be sent to the escalation
recipient.
● If the job owners have already received three or more reminder emails and have not responded, the matter
must be escalated to the escalation recipient. For this reason, reminder emails for escalation cases will be
send to the escalation recipient and the job owners.
● If the email address of the job owner is not available, and the escalation recipient has not responded, the
matter must be escalated. Reminder emails for escalation will be sent to the escalation recipient.

Activities

Settings

Scheduler Type: If required, choose the scheduler type depending on the job types that you want to check for
validity. If you leave this field empty, all jobs will be included.

Check Date for Job Validity: Here you enter the date by when the job documents should be reviewed to check,
for example, whether they are still up to date, need to be changed or no longer scheduled. For example, if you

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 217
are running the report on a weekly basis, you can enter a date one week later than today's date. In this way, you
give the job owners enough time to react before the review date.

Sender Email Address: The address from which the reminder email is sent. The email address can come from
the team responsible for the job management, for example, the central job management team, the team that
schedules and executes the report.

You can also use a no-reply address for a system-generated email, for example, because the job owner must
comply with the job request or change request management process.

Email Recipient Escalation Cases: You need this email address in the following cases:

● The email address of the contact person or job owner is missing because it is not a mandatory field in the
job documentation. In this case, the email should be sent directly to the job management team.
● An email reminder has been sent to the job owner three times in succession, but the owner has never
responded. In this case, a new email reminder will be sent to the job management team and to the job
owner at the same time. Either the job owner contacts the job management team directly or if not, the
overdue review is escalated to the job management team, which then acts according to defined guided
procedures.

Reset the Generic Data Store: This serves as a reminder counter and indicates how often a reminder email has
been sent to the job owner. You can reset the data store manually, for example, if you are testing the application
for the first time or if the job owner could not respond to the reminder email for some particular reason. In this
case, the relevant records in the generic data store will be deleted.

Test Run: When this is selected, no data is written to the database, no changes are made to the generic data
store, and no emails are sent. It only records which jobs have been found, which are already overdue, and how
often a reminder email has been sent.

Both Reset Generic Data Store and Test Run are generally intended for test purposes.

Email Texts

To define email texts freely, you can use Business Add-In (BAdI) JSM_EAMIL_MESSAGE_BODY. The default
templates (in plain text format) are defined in the fallback class implementation of the BAdI.

In the reminder email, the job owner can click a URL to create a job request. A job can be created to update or
cancel the job schedule.

6.5 Job Scheduling

Use

With SAP Solution Manager, you can schedule jobs in your managed systems from job documentation via the
SAP scheduler (BC-XBP interface) or an external scheduler (SMSE interface). You can also schedule jobs
directly, without job documentation.

The job scheduling assistant allows you to optimize your background job scheduling using data obtained from
System and Application Monitoring.

In addition, you can use job control to redirect users to SAP Solution Manager when they try to schedule or
reschedule jobs in the managed systems using job scheduling transactions such as SM36 or SM37. Job control

Business Process Operations

218 PUBLIC Job Management
ensures that new jobs or scheduling changes go through the job request and approval process, and helps you
maintain consistent job documentation.

The Recommended Jobs tool identifies standard jobs in your systems and provides functions to schedule these
jobs easily.

Activities

● Scheduling Jobs with Job Documentation [page 219]

● Using the Job Scheduling Assistant [page 227]
● Scheduling Jobs Directly [page 226]
● Job Control for Managed Systems [page 228]
● Scheduling Recommended Jobs [page 235]

6.5.1 Scheduling Jobs with Job Documentation

If you have created job documentation in SAP Solution Manager, you can schedule its job in the managed
system from the SAP Solution Manager system in one of the following ways:

● Scheduling Jobs with the SAP Scheduler [page 219]

Schedule ABAP jobs and change the start conditions for BW process chains.
● Scheduling Jobs with an External Scheduler [page 222]
Edit the scheduling for any type of externally scheduled job.

6.5.1.1 Scheduling Jobs with the SAP Scheduler (BC-XBP)

This procedure schedules a job from the SAP Solution Manager system, in a managed system, via the BC-XBP
interface.

Prerequisites

● Administration has set up a trusted RFC connection between SAP Solution Manager and the target system.
● You are authorized to call the BC-XBP interface and schedule jobs in the target system.
For more information, see the Application-Specific Security Guide at http://help.sap.com/solutionmanager.
● You have created job documentation and assigned it to a system. For more information, see Systems Tab
Page [page 201].
● You have selected the BC-XBP scheduler in the job documentation and have added at least one step. For
more information, see General Tab Page [page 197].

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 219
Procedure

Starting the Job Scheduling Application

1. Open the job documentation:

 Note

The job documentation opens in the user interface in which it was created (either the simplified or the
detailed user interface).

2. Navigate to the scheduling application in one of the following ways:.

○ From the simplified user interface, choose Scheduling <Managed System> (<Client>) .
○ From the detailed user interface, choose Systems Scheduling .
3. Switch to edit mode to start scheduling a job.

Copying a Job

You can copy data from an existing job in the current system.

1. Choose an RFC connection.

2. Specify the selection criteria, for example, job name, user name, or job status, and choose Find.
The system lists the jobs for the search criteria.
3. To copy the job configuration, select a job and confirm with Copy.
The system copies the job configuration.

Scheduling a Job

1. Choose an RFC connection.

2. Enter a job name and choose a job class.
3. Choose the start method, and provide values for the corresponding subelements.
4. You can add step parameters.
5. Choose Schedule.
The job count appears in the display field.

Changing a Job

You can change the scheduling of a job as long as it has not been completed. Proceed as follows:

1. Make changes.

 Note

When you change a periodic job, the system searches for the changeable successor and only changes
this successor.

If there is more than one changeable job with the same name, the system does not change any of these
jobs.

2. Choose Change.

Business Process Operations

220 PUBLIC Job Management
Deleting a Job
You can delete a scheduled job, as long as it has not yet been released. Proceed as follows:

1. Select an RFC connection.

2. Choose Delete.
3. Save your entries.

Displaying Job Status

To display the current status of the job, choose Status.

Displaying Job Logs

When a job has the status Finished, you can display the job log.

Selecting a Job in the Target System

You can view the scheduled jobs by their status in the target system.

● Choose Job Selection.

You go to the transaction SM37 in the target system. You can, for example, release a job scheduled with the
job documentation.

Analyzing Runtime Errors

To analyze runtime errors, choose Runtime Errors.

You go to the job analysis of transaction ST22 in the target system.

Analyzing Jobs
Prerequisite: You have implemented the current version of the ST-PI plug-in in the SAP Solution Manager
system and in the connected managed systems.

To analyze a job in the target system, select Job Analysis.

You go to the transaction ST13 in the target system.

Subsequent Jobs Tab Page

This tab page documents all jobs that follow periodic jobs already scheduled.

 Note

For the documentation of subsequent jobs, the SAP Solution Manager has to evaluate the parent-child
relationship between jobs. For this purpose, you need to activate the Parent-Child Relationship function in
the target system using program INITXBP2.

To display the subsequent jobs, proceed as follows:

1. Search for subsequent jobs. Enter the selection criteria and then choose Search.
2. Choose the subsequent job from the search results. If more information has been specified for the job, you
will see this in the following lists under the search results:
1. List Jobs Created by the Selected Job
If the selected job has further scheduled jobs, then this list displays these jobs.
2. List Successor Jobs of the Selected Job
If the selected job is part of a job chain, this list displays the job that follows on directly.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 221
Description Tab Page
On this tab page, you can provide a text description of the job scheduling.

6.5.1.2 Scheduling Jobs with an External Scheduler (SMSE)

Use

You have created job documentation and want to manage the job scheduling using a SMSE-enabled external
scheduler such as SAP Central Process Scheduling by Redwood.

Prerequisites

● The external scheduler is connected to SAP Solution Manager and the target systems and is configured.
● You have created job documentation and assigned it to a system. For more information, see Systems Tab
Page [page 201].
● You have selected the SAP Solution Manager Scheduling Enabler (SMSE) interface in the job
documentation. For more information, see General Tab Page [page 197].

Procedure

Scheduling an External Job

1. Open the job documentation:

 Note

The job documentation opens in the user interface in which it was created (either the simplified or the
detailed user interface).

2. Navigate to the scheduling application in one of the following ways:.

○ From the simplified user interface, choose Scheduling <Managed System> (<Client>) .
○ From the detailed user interface, choose Systems Scheduling .
3. Complete the mandatory fields and specify the start conditions.

 Note

Required entry fields are indicated by *.

4. Choose Schedule/Change Externally.

The system transfers the job configuration to the external scheduler and schedules the job.
When the job has been scheduled, you get a status message with the job number.
The system imports the remaining data automatically from the external scheduler.

Business Process Operations

222 PUBLIC Job Management
 5. Save the imported data.

 Note

Depending on your authorizations, you can only schedule a job in status Paused. The administrator
responsible for the external scheduler must release this job manually.

 Caution

You cannot change a job that has already been scheduled. If you change a job that has already been
scheduled and then select Schedule Externally again, the system creates a new job and does not
change the existing job.

Copying an External Job Configuration

1. On the Scheduling user interface, choose Copy.

2. Specify the selection criteria, for example, job name, user name, or job status, and choose Find.
The system lists the jobs for the search criteria.
3. To copy the job configuration, select a job and confirm with OK.
The system copies the job configuration.

 Note

The system cannot copy start conditions.

Canceling a Scheduled Job

On the Scheduling user interface, choose Cancel Job.

The system cancels the job and all its subsequent jobs.

 Note

The job you want to cancel must not have started.

Changing a Scheduled Job

1. Select a logical component in the job documentation, under System Landscape, select the target system,
and choose Scheduling.
2. Change the start options or parameters.
3. Choose Schedule/Change Externally again to change an already scheduled job.

Rescheduling a Scheduled Job

1. Select a logical component in the job documentation, under System Landscape, select the target system,
and choose Scheduling.
2. Change only the start options.
3. Choose Reschedule.
4. A new job is scheduled and the old job is canceled. If the old job was periodic, all associated follow-on jobs
are also canceled.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 223
Adding Notes or Business Cards to a Scheduled Job
To add notes as free text, or business cards of business partners, to a scheduled job, or to display those already
added:

1. Select a logical component in the job documentation, under System Landscape, select the target system,
and choose Scheduling.
2. Choose External Notes.
A dialog box appears.
3. To add notes or business cards:
○ Note (free text):
1. Write your note. You can enter up to 1000 characters for each entry.
2. Choose Add.
You can add any number of entries.
○ Business cards: You can add the business cards of business partners that are entered in the job
documentation under Partners with the role Background Processing.
1. Choose a business partner.
2. Choose Add.
After adding a note or business card, the system puts this in an outbound queue.
4. Choose OK to export all notes.

 Caution

You cannot edit or delete exported notes.

Displaying Job Output Information

1. Select a logical component in the job documentation, under System Landscape, select the target system,
and choose Scheduling.
2. To display the job output information for a job that has already been scheduled, choose External Log.
A dialog box appears.
3. Choose a log.
The system displays the log.

 Note

Job output information depends on the job status.

External Scheduler Management

There are two ways to access the administration of an external scheduler:

● In the Job Management - Administration app, choose the Administration view.

● In the job documentation, go to the Systems tab page and open the scheduling application. Choose
Scheduler Management.

Selecting a Job in the Target System

To see scheduled jobs, depending on the status in the target system:

1. Select a logical component in the job documentation, under System Landscape, select the target system,
and choose Scheduling.
2. Choose Job Selection.

Business Process Operations

224 PUBLIC Job Management
 You go to the transaction SM37 in the target system. You can, for example, release a job scheduled with the
job documentation.

Analyzing Runtime Errors in the Target System

1. Select a logical component in the job documentation, under System Landscape, select the target system,
and choose Scheduling.
2. To analyze runtime errors, choose Runtime Errors.
You go to the transaction ST22 in the target system.

Analyzing Jobs in the Target System

 Note

To be able to run the analysis in the target system, you have implemented the current version of the ST-PI
plug-in in the SAP Solution Manager system and the connected managed systems. You have set up a
trusted RFC connection to the target system.

1. Select a logical component in the job documentation, under System Landscape, select the target system,
and choose Scheduling.
2. To analyze a job in the target system, select Job Analysis.
You go to the transaction ST13 in the target system.

Defining Subsequent Jobs

As a prerequisite, you need a previously scheduled, periodic job in the external scheduler.

1. Select a logical component in the job documentation, under System Landscape, select the target system,
and choose Scheduling.
2. Choose the Subsequent Jobs tab.
3. Enter the selection criteria and then choose Search.
4. The results list is displayed. The list also contains previously unscheduled jobs. A maximum of 200 result
entries are displayed.

More Information

You can also schedule a job directly in a system connected to the external scheduler, without having to create
job documentation in advance. For more information, see Scheduling Jobs Directly [page 226].

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 225
6.5.2 Scheduling Jobs Directly

Context

You can schedule a job directly, that is, without creating job documentation for it in advance, in a system
connected to SAP Solution Manager.

Procedure

1. Open the Job Management - Administration app and under Common Tasks, choose Schedule Jobs.
2. Specify the following:
○ System for the scheduling
○ Client (optional)
○ Scheduling method
○ To schedule the job with an external scheduler, select the SMSE interface.
○ To schedule the job directly using an SAP Solution Manager system RFC connection, choose the
BC-XBP interface.
3. Choose Start.

A dialog box appears.

4. To enter the parameters and scheduling data, you can:
○ Enter the job information in the dialog box.

 Note

You can enter up to five job steps directly.

○ To import an existing job and adjust the data, choose Import.

5. To schedule the job, choose Schedule.

The number of the job is displayed in the job number field.

6. To change the job data for an existing or imported job, choose Change.

 Note

To avoid data inconsistencies, you can only change jobs that you created in the job documentation
directly in the job documentation.

Business Process Operations

226 PUBLIC Job Management
6.5.3 Using the Job Scheduling Assistant

Prerequisites

● System monitoring has been setup for the managed system in which you want to schedule the job.
● You are authorized to run Job Management and schedule jobs.
● Your browser supports HTML5.

Context

The job scheduling assistant supports the job planning process. It helps you fulfill business requirements while
ensuring optimal utilization of system resources. You can use it to plan new jobs and to optimize scheduling of
existing background jobs.

You can analyze background jobs in the system context, taking under consideration not only requirements
coming from the business/functional needs, but also other activities happening on the system (for example,
non-essential background jobs should not be scheduled during peak hours). Therefore the schedule needs to
be optimized not only based on the number and logic of jobs, but also based on available system resources.

The job scheduling assistant provides the following metrics for your scheduling analysis:

● CPU load on the application server/host

● How many CPUs are available at a given point of time for the system
● How much memory is utilized / How much memory is free
● Number of dialog work processes that can be used in RFC call (used in parallel processing)
● How many update requests are waiting in the queue
● Number of background work processes available

Procedure

1. Open the Job Management - Administration app and under Common Tasks, choose Schedule Jobs.
2. Choose the Schedule with Help of Assistant radio button.
3. Select a technical system client and scheduler, and then choose Next.
4. Follow the guided procedure.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 227
6.5.4 Job Control for Managed Systems

Use

This process automatically redirects users to SAP Solution Manager when they try to schedule or change jobs
in a managed system. Job control integrates the job scheduling transactions in your managed systems with
SAP Solution Manager job scheduling. This means the following:

1. The system automatically redirects users who try to schedule or change a periodic or ad hoc job using a
scheduling transaction such as SM36 or SM37 to the SAP Solution Manager Job Control Web Dynpro
application.
2. To schedule or change a periodic job, the user must submit a job request.
3. When the job request is approved, the changes are carried out and documented in job documentation.

The job request, job documentation, and job scheduling can now be managed centrally with SAP Solution
Manager.

Prerequisites

You have configured job control. For more information, see Configuring Job Control [page 229].

Process

1. When the user starts the transaction SM36 to create a job in the managed system, the system starts a
guided procedure for creating a job request in SAP Solution Manager.
2. Depending on the job type (periodic or ad hoc), the user proceeds as follows:
○ Periodic jobs must be approved before they can be scheduled. The approval process requires the user
to create a job request.
The user plans and requests periodic jobs in the Job Control Web Dynpro application, attaching any
necessary documents to the request.
○ Depending on the ad hoc job configuration settings, ad hoc jobs either need approval, or can be
scheduled directly. For more information, see Ad Hoc Jobs [page 232]. If ad hoc jobs can be scheduled
directly, the user schedules the job using Job Control Web Dynpro application, without creating a job
request.

 Note

By default, ad hoc jobs can be scheduled directly in the managed systems.

3. If there is a job request, it goes through the approval process. For more information, see Job Requests
[page 168].
4. The data in any change document is copied automatically into the job documentation that the job
scheduling is based on.
5. The job is scheduled on the basis of the job documentation.

Business Process Operations

228 PUBLIC Job Management
The following figure illustrates the job control process:

Job Control Process

6.5.4.1 Configuring Job Control

Use

To use job control, configure the following:

● RFC destinations for RFC connections

During the job control process, SAP systems communicate in both directions via RFC connections. The
managed system receives the information to call the Job Control Web Dynpro application from SAP
Solution Manager. In SAP Solution Manager, the Job Control Web Dynpro application receives the job and
user information from the managed system.
The following RFC connections are required for these communication paths:
○ From SAP Solution Manager to the managed system
○ From the managed system back to SAP Solution Manager
For RFC connections to work, you must set up RFC destinations in your managed systems and in SAP
Solution Manager.
● User-specific assignment of business partners
To authorize users of your managed systems to create job requests, you must assign business partners to
them in SAP Solution Manager.
● User-specific activation or deactivation of job control
To specify which users job control is active for, you must set up criteria profiles in Criteria Management.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 229
Prerequisites

● You have activated the Job Management Web Dynpro applications in Customizing for SAP Solution
Manager under Capabilities (Optional) Job Management .
● The user who accesses SAP Solution Manager from the managed system is authorized for Job
Management.
● The user who accesses the managed system from SAP Solution Manager is authorized to access job data.

Procedure

Setting up RFC Destinations in the Managed Systems

To be able to establish RFC connections from SAP Solution Manager to your managed systems, you must first
set up RFC destinations in your managed systems. For more information, see Managed Systems Configuration.

Setting Up RFC Destinations in SAP Solution Manager

To be able to establish RFC connections from your managed systems back to SAP Solution Manager, you must
first set up RFC BACK destinations in SAP Solution Manager.

 Note

Before you can set up RFC destinations in SAP Solution Manager, you must already have created a (back)
RFC connection to SAP Solution Manager. You do this in SAP Solution Manager Configuration (transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP) in the Basic Configuration scenario under Technical Systems.

Proceed as follows:

1. Open the Job Management - Administration app and choose the Administration view.
2. To check whether an RFC BACK destination is set up for a managed system:
1. Under BACK Destination, choose Check Back Destination.
A dialog box appears.
2. Select the managed system and client (optional), and then choose Check.
A message at the top of the Administration view shows whether an RFC BACK destination is already set
up.
3. To set up a new RFC BACK destination:
1. Under BACK Destination, choose Define Back Destination.
A dialog box appears.
2. Select the managed system and client (optional).
3. In the Destination field, select a name for the RFC BACK destination.
4. Save your entries.
An RFC destination for a communication connection from the managed system to the currently open
system (SAP Solution Manager) is now defined and can be used by the transactions SM36 and SM37 to
communicate with SAP Solution Manager.

Assigning Business Partners to Users

To authorize users of your managed systems to create job requests, you must assign business partners to
them in SAP Solution Manager.

Business Process Operations

230 PUBLIC Job Management
Proceed as follows to do this automatically, using the report BP_GEN:

1. Open the Job Management - Administration app and choose the Administration view.
2. Under Business Partner, choose Generate Business Partner.

For information about how to execute the report, see Create Users or Business Partners Automatically.

Activating or Deactivating Job Control for Users

 Note

Before you can activate or deactivate job control for users, you have to complete the following configuration
steps:

● Setting Up RFC BACK Destinations

● Assigning Business Partners to Users

To specify which users job control is active for, you set up criteria profiles for your managed systems in the SAP
Solution Manager Criteria Management application, and then assign users to these profiles.

 Note

Criteria Management can only be called by background processing administrators (S_BTCH_ADM role).

Proceed as follows:

1. Open the Job Management - Administration app and choose the Administration view.
2. Under Criteria Management, choose Maintain Criteria Profiles and Users.
A dialog box appears.
3. Select the managed system and client (optional).
4. Save your entries.
The ABAP Program Execution application starts.
5. Start the transaction for Criteria Management (CRIT).
The Criteria Management dialog box appears.
6. To create a new profile, choose the Criteria Profile and then choose the GUI icon with the quick info Add.
A dialog box appears.
7. Select the criteria type for creating (or requesting) jobs using SAP Solution Manager and enter a
meaningful name for the profile, for example, Job Control Activation.
8. Confirm with OK.
The criteria profile is created, and appears in the list.
9. Double-click the entry for the new criteria profile.
The criteria for the criteria profile are displayed on the right side of the screen.
10. To assign clients and users to the criteria profile, choose the GUI icon with the quick info Add.
A dialog box appears.
11. Enter a description for the criterion. Choose the client, and specify the users the criteria profile should
apply to.

 Note

You can use wildcards (*) in the User field to add multiple users to a criteria profile.

12. Save your entries.

The criterion is created for the criteria profile.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 231
  Note

To create more profiles with the same criteria type, repeat steps 6 to 12. In this way, you can create
several profiles for the same criteria type for different clients or user groups.

13. To activate the profiles created for job control, select the profiles in the list, and choose .
Job control is active for all users assigned to the active profile. When these users start the transaction
SM36, they are automatically forwarded to SAP Solution Manager job control.
Job control is inactive for all other users.

More Information

For more information about job control, see SAP Note 1383398 .

6.5.4.2 Ad Hoc Jobs

Use

Ad hoc jobs are jobs that run only once. By default, ad hoc jobs can be scheduled directly. To require the use of
job requests for ad hoc jobs, you have to configure it explicitly.

Prerequisites

You have configured job control. For more information, see Configuring Job Control [page 229].

Procedure

To require job requests for ad hoc jobs, proceed as follows:

1. Start the transaction SM30 in your managed system.

2. In the Table/View field, enter AGS_JOB_CONFIG, and then choose Maintain.
3. Choose New Entries.
4. Enter the parameter JSM_GAF_ADHOC_FLAG with the value X in the table.
5. Save your entries.

Business Process Operations

232 PUBLIC Job Management
Result

Ad hoc jobs can no longer be scheduled directly. Users must submit job requests for ad hoc jobs, and an
approval process is initiated.

6.5.4.3 Creating a Job with Job Control

Prerequisites

You have configured job control. For more information, see Configuring Job Control [page 229].

Context

If job control is activated, you must create a job request in SAP Solution Manager before a new job can be
scheduled in your managed system from the job documentation.

You can create the following types of jobs with job control:

● Periodic: You must create job requests when you create periodic jobs, because these are required to go
through an approval process.
● Ad hoc: Your configuration settings determine whether you must create job requests for ad hoc jobs. For
more information, see Ad Hoc Jobs [page 232].

Procedure

1. Start the transaction SM36 in your managed system.

A dialog box appears, telling you that you can only create or change jobs in SAP Solution Manager.
2. Confirm the dialog box

You go to the SAP Solution Manager Job Control Web Dynpro application.

Job control gets the job data from your managed system and displays it in the SAP Solution Manager Job
Control Web Dynpro application.
3. In the Planning step of the Job Control Web Dynpro application, make the following entries, and then
choose Next:
○ Specify the RFC connection from the SAP Solution Manager to your managed system.

 Note

The system proposes a default RFC connection, which you can change.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 233
 ○ Enter a name for the job you want to create.
○ Choose the type of scheduler you want to use: SAP Scheduler or External Scheduler.
○ Specify the date and time until which the job request is to be valid.
○ Add new job steps.
4. In the Request Job step, make the following entries, and then choose Next:

 Note

This step is not shown for ad hoc jobs unless you have configured them to require approval.

○ Reason for the job request and priority

○ Business requirements information
○ Business process information

 Note

The business partner, managed system, and a predefined request short text are automatically provided
by the application.

5. In the Add Attachments step, you can upload documents to provide more information about the job you
want to create. When you are finished, choose Next.
6. Save your entries.

6.5.4.4 Using Job Control to Change the Job Scheduling

Prerequisites

● You have configured job control. For more information, see Configuring Job Control [page 229] and Ad Hoc
Jobs [page 232]
● You have created a request for a new job, for which there is already documentation, in job control.
● The job that you want to change has a changeable status. It must not, for example, have one of the
following statuses:
○ Canceled
○ Completed

Context

You want to use job control to change a job that has already been created.

Business Process Operations

234 PUBLIC Job Management
Procedure

1. Start the transaction SM37 in your managed system.

2. To search for the job to be changed, enter the job data and choose Execute.

3. Select the job and choose Job Change .

A dialog box appears, telling you that you can only create or change jobs in SAP Solution Manager.
4. Confirm the dialog box.

You go to the SAP Solution Manager Job Control Web Dynpro application, where the job creation data is
displayed.
5. You can change the job creation data in the Web Dynpro application steps.
6. Save your entries.

6.5.5 Scheduling Recommended Jobs

The Recommended Jobs view in the Job Management - Administration app provides an overview of background
jobs in your system landscape, organized by system. You can monitor various job types system-specifically
and, if necessary, create job documentation using existing templates.

Integration

You can schedule and monitor standard jobs with the Define Background Job transaction (SM36). For more
information about standard jobs, see SAP Note 16083 .

 Recommendation

Run the standard jobs regularly.

Features

The standard view shows a table of data for the systems connected to SAP Solution Manager, such as the
system status and product version.

You can display job details for the following job types:

● ABAP jobs
● SMSE jobs
● Standard jobs

You can also determine which job documentation templates are available, across product versions, and create
job documentation with a selected template.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 235
Activities

Display Data of ABAP Jobs and SMSE Jobs

1. Select a system in the table.

2. Select ABAP Jobs or SMSE Jobs.
3. The system checks whether a job documentation template exists in SAP Solution Manager for the selected
product version.
If so, SAP Solution Manager proceeds as follows:
1. The system reads the job definition and status information for the selected job type, from the managed
system.
2. The system shows the job status, for example, Scheduled or Canceled.

 Note

For ABAP jobs, you can display job detail information by clicking the job name link.

The job detail view contains basic information such as the job count and status. You can also view the job
log and step information.

Display Data of Standard Jobs

1. Select a system in the table.

2. Choose Standard Jobs.
3. SAP Solution Manager reads the standard job definition from the managed system, and displays the job
status.

Get Job Template, and Create Job Documentation

1. Select a system in the table.

2. Choose Job Templates.
3. The system displays all job documentation templates for the selected product version that exist in SAP
Solution Manager.
4. You can select a template, and create job documentation with it.

6.6 Job Overview

The Job Management - Administration app provides access to several applications for viewing jobs:

● Central Job Overview [page 237]

● Simple Job Selection [page 238]
● SAP Scheduler Management [page 239]
● External Scheduler Management [page 240]

Business Process Operations

236 PUBLIC Job Management
6.6.1 Central Job Overview

Use

The Central Job Overview enables you to view detailed information about ABAP jobs and externally scheduled
jobs. You can select and view job data over the complete lifecycle, similar to the Job Overview (transaction
SM37). If the externally scheduled job is part of a job chain, hierarchical job chain information is also displayed.
To provide this overview, data is collected directly from the managed system and the external scheduler.

The Central Job Overview can be launched from the Job Management Administration tile, under Common
Tasks.

Prerequisites

● You use SAP Central Process Scheduling (SAP CPS) 8.0 or later. Only SAP CPS/SAP BPA is supported by
default. Other external schedulers may be connected on a project basis.

 Note

The latest version of SAP CPS was renamed SAP Business Process Automation by Redwood 9.0 (SAP
BPA) in March 2015. For more information, see SAP Note 2005087 .

● The administrator has performed the managed system configuration in SAP Solution Manager
Configuration.
● The administrator has configured the Central Job Overview and the remote database connection to the
external scheduler. For more information, see the Configuration Guide for Central Job Overview.
● Your browser supports SAPUI5.

 Note

To make the application UI refresh correctly with Internet Explorer 9 and above, adjust the browser
cache settings as follows:

1. Go to Tools Internet Options

2. On the General tab, under Browsing History, choose Settings.
3. Under Check for newer versions of stored pages:, choose Every time I visit the web page.

Features

Selecting Jobs

Select jobs using the filter area at the top of the screen.

● Select jobs using Central Job Overview selection criteria. Specify the managed systems and then filter jobs
by name, user, status, scheduled time, after event, and program. It is possible to select multiple Job Names
and multiple System IDs.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 237
  Note

If you enter a user name or after event, the search will only return ABAP jobs.

● Save and reuse filter variants for frequently viewed jobs. The date and time are not persisted for any saved
variant.

Viewing Results

Search results are displayed below the filter area.

● If a found job is part of a job chain, the job chain is displayed in the results area. You can drill down to see
the job chain hierarchy.
● Click on the job ID to view detailed information, including basic information, job log, job steps with variant
details, spool list number (click to start an ITS session and view the spool list), child jobs, scheduling
details, and the job documentations realted to the job.
● At the chain header level, you can view CPS-specific scheduling parameters, such as the requested start
time, end date, submit frame, and event information (wait event, raise event).
● Sort and filter the results list.
● Export the results list to a CSV file.
● In the hierarchy view of job chains, you can toggle the display between all jobs or ABAP jobs only.

6.6.2 Simple Job Selection

Context

You can search for BC-XBP jobs in a managed system.

Procedure

1. Under Common Tasks, choose Select Job.

2. Specify the product system and client to search, and then choose Start.
3. Choose an RFC connection.
4. Enter your search criteria, and then choose Find.

The system displays the jobs that meet your criteria, as well as the subjobs (jobs created by the selected
job).

You can do the following:

○ Select a job and display its job log or status.
○ Click the job name to display more job details.
○ Open the job documentation for the job by clicking the icon in the Job Documentation column.

Business Process Operations

238 PUBLIC Job Management
6.6.3 SAP Scheduler Management

Use

The SAP Scheduler Management view in the Job Management - Administration app provides an overview of jobs
scheduled with the SAP scheduler via the BC-XBP interface. It has two sub-views. They are as follows:

● Job Monitor
Display jobs scheduled with the SAP Scheduler.
Access functions for analyzing and scheduling selected jobs.
Create new job definitions and new job and job chain documentation and request new jobs or job changes.
● Own Jobs
Queries are limited to jobs owned by you.

Prerequisites

You have scheduled jobs.

Features

You can display an overview of scheduled jobs. Use the standard queries or define your own queries for
displaying jobs. The jobs are displayed in a list.

You can do the following for a selected job:

● Display the job logs

● Create a job request
For more information, see Job Requests [page 168].
● Display job documentation
For more information, see Job Documentation [page 193].
● Import a job with its scheduling parameters into job documentation
● Go to the following applications:
○ Job Analysis
○ Job Scheduling
○ Job Diagram

Activities

Displaying Jobs

1. In the Active Queries area, select the appropriate query.

2. To specify the systems and other search criteria, choose Show Quick Criteria Maintenance.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 239
 The System Category determines the strategy for including systems in the query. In other words, it
determines which fields will be evaluated when you run the query:
○ Manual
Systems you enter manually in the System:Client field are to be evaluated. You use the syntax
<system>:<client>.
○ Solution
Systems in the solutions that you select in Solution field are to be evaluated.
○ Project
Systems for the projects that you select in the Project field are to be evaluated.
○ IBase
Systems in the projects assigned to the business partner of the scheduling user are to be evaluated.
3. Select additional relevant search criteria, for example:
○ One or more explicit statuses, such as Scheduled or Released
○ Start and end date
○ Jobs without documentation

 Note

Use this parameter to find jobs without job documentation so you can create job documentation
for them or identify users who create jobs without job requests.

4. Using the input help for the Job Name field, define one or more standard jobs.

 Example

SAP_REORG_ABAPDUMPS

SAP_REORG_JOBS

5. Run the query.

The system displays the search results in the table.
For standard jobs, the evaluation result displays a table with the start time, status, duration and start delay,
among other information. When you select a standard job, job log information is displayed below.

 Note

For ABAP jobs, you can display job detail information by clicking the job name link.

The job detail view contains basic information such as the job count and status. You can also view the job
log and step information.

6.6.4 External Scheduler Management

Use

In the External Scheduler Management view, you can manage jobs scheduled with a connected, SMSE-certified
external job scheduler. The External Scheduler Management view has the following subviews:

● Job Monitor

Business Process Operations

240 PUBLIC Job Management
 Display a list of jobs scheduled with an external scheduler. You can define queries and apply externally
defined filters to select data.
Access functions for analyzing, monitoring, and scheduling selected jobs.
Create new job definitions and new job and job chain documentation and request new jobs or job changes.
Import jobs, with their scheduling parameters, into job documentation.
● Own Jobs
Queries are limited to jobs owned by you.
● Operator Messages
Display operator messages from your external scheduler.

Prerequisites

● You have scheduled jobs with an external scheduler.

● You have created a connection to an external scheduler as follows:
1. In the Active Queries area, select the appropriate query.
2. Choose Show Quick Criteria Maintenance.
3. Specify the destination and at least one isolation group. You can select multiple isolation groups to get
data from several systems.
● If you want to use filters in your queries, you have defined these in your external scheduler. You can apply,
but not change, the filters in SAP Solution Manager.

Features

You can perform the following activities in the External Scheduler Management view:

● Display an overview of jobs scheduled with an external scheduler

Use the standard queries or define your own queries for displaying jobs. You can use individual search
criteria or apply an external filter in your query.

 Note

You can use the Queue field to indirectly specify which systems to get data from. You can choose
queues from several managed systems by using the multiple selection dialog box.

For example, choose the following queues for the systems ABC and XYZ:

GLOBAL.ABC_QUEUE

GLOBAL.XYZ_QUEUE

● Go to the following applications:

○ Job Analysis
○ Job Scheduling
○ Job Monitor
○ Job Diagram
● Import a selected job with its scheduling parameters into job documentation

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 241
● Create a job request
● Create job or job chain documentation
● Display a list of operator messages from your external scheduler

6.7 Job Analysis

Job Management provides access to the following graphical applications for analyzing the workload caused by
background jobs:

● Job Gantt Chart [page 242]

● Background Job Analysis [page 244]

6.7.1 Job Schedule Gantt Chart

The Gantt chart provides a convenient graphical overview of scheduling information for selected jobs over a
period of time. It allows you to analyze the workload caused by background jobs, so you can avoid bottlenecks
and optimize system resources when scheduling jobs.

Starting the Application

To start the application, you have the following options:

● On the SAP Solution Manager launchpad, open the Job Schedule Gantt Chart app.
● In the Job Management - Administration app, choose Analyze Jobs (Gantt) under Common Tasks.

Setting the Time Zone

At the top of the application screen, you have the option to select a time zone. This setting determines whether
any time period that you enter as part of your search criteria should refer to a specific time zone, or simply the
time zone of the selected target system. The time zone setting also determines how the current time is labeled
on the Gantt graph.

● If you select a time zone, any time period you enter for the search refers to the selected time zone. When
you execute the search, the application converts your time period entries to the target system time zone
when searching for jobs on the target system.
● If you choose to ignore the time zone, any time period you enter for the job search refers to the time zone
of the target system.

Business Process Operations

242 PUBLIC Job Management
Searching for Jobs

In order to display a Gantt chart, you have search for jobs to display. You can perform a standard search or a
solution search:

● Standard search
Find jobs in one or more managed systems based on standard criteria such as the job name, user, or time
period.

Search Criteria Description

Target system information Choose one or more managed systems to search.

Job Limit the search to jobs with a certain name, or a naming

pattern using wildcards (*).

Limit the search to jobs run by a specific user.

Job-steps Limit the search to a certain program or variant.

Job-options Limit the search to jobs of a certain minimum duration or

status. The search always returns jobs with the status
Released.

Note that the lowest possible minimum duration is 5 mi­

nutes, which means that you cannot display jobs with a
runtime of less than 5 minutes in the Gantt chart.

Job-start conditions Limit the search to jobs scheduled within a certain time
period, or within a certain number of hours in the past or
future.

Note that the time zone setting at the top of the applica­
tion window applies to the time period specified here.

Time scale level Choose the layout of the Gantt chart. Note that you can
change the time scale after executing a search.

● Solution search
Find jobs that have been assigned (via job documentation) to a specific solution and scenario, business
process, or step.
If you only specify a solution, it will be searched hierarchically to see if there is any job documentation
linked with it. If there is, then the name of the job documentation will be used as the job name for the
search on the target systems. The target systems are determined by the logical components assigned to
the specified solution. The time zone and other search fields work the same way as the standard search.

 Note

You can save the current job selection criteria by choosing Save Current Criteria and entering a name for
your search.

To select a previously saved search, choose Select Criteria. Here you can also specify a search to be the
default when the application starts.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 243
Viewing the Chart

If the search returns jobs, a Gantt graph is displayed.

On the left, the jobs that meet your search criteria are displayed in a table list, grouped by server and work
process. You can expand and collapse the nodes representing the servers and work processes.

The time scale is displayed above the graph.

The current time is indicated by a vertical line that divides the main graph display into two zones: On the left are
past jobs which have been scheduled and run. On the right are future jobs that are scheduled but have not run
yet.

Each job is represented by a horizontal bar on the graph. The position and length of the bar reflects the start
time, end time, and duration of the job. You can hover over a bar with your mouse to display the job details. The
color of the bar indicates the job status:

● Red: canceled
● Yellow: active / running
● Blue: released
● Green: finished

Past jobs may be marked with a black triangle, which indicates that the job ran with a delay.

Navigating the Chart

The tool bar above the chart provides some options for the display. You can do the following:

● Hide the search area to make more room for the chart display
● Define the chart height in pixels (default = 700 px)
● Display a navigation window to move to a difference section of the chart
● Display the jobs in a sortable, filterable list

6.7.2 Background Job Analysis

Background job analysis (BACKGROUND_JOB_ANALYSIS) is a standalone tool that graphically displays data
from transaction SM37. It is part of the Service Tools for Applications Plug-In ST-A/PI, and is locally available in
every SAP back-end system with a recent ST-A/PI plug-in.

The tool was designed to identify system bottlenecks caused by background jobs. It can be used, for example,
if you encountered a performance issue at a specific time, and you want to find out what was running at that
time on your system. The tool can help you identify whether the jobs can be rescheduled to run at another
time, or whether workload can be shifted to another server.

Business Process Operations

244 PUBLIC Job Management
Launching the Tool

Open the Job Management - Administration app and under Common Tasks, choose Analyze Jobs.

 Note

You can also call the BACKGROUND_JOB_ANALYSIS tool in transaction ST13, or by executing the ABAP
report /SSA/BTC in transaction SA38/SE38/SE80.

Performing an Analysis

The entry screen is similar to transaction SM37, but you can only select the statuses Active, Finished, and
Canceled (but not Released or Scheduled).

The output screen contains the following three sections:

● The first shows the selection criteria and provides information about how many job executions had a
runtime of more than 5 minutes and how many with less than 5 minutes.
● The second is a job list similar to transaction SM37, but it shows only the long-running jobs (longer than 5
minutes). It shows the variant, executing server, and work process. The duration is shown in a hh:mm:ss
format instead of seconds.
● The third is a graphical representation of all the long-running jobs. The length of a bar represents the job
runtime. The jobs are arranged so that you can read which application server and which work process was
utilized at which point in time. Additionally, you see the average CPU idleness of the respective host server
per clock hour (similar to transaction ST06). The color scheme is the same as in SM37: green jobs finished
successfully, red jobs canceled, and blue jobs are still active.
From within the graphic, you can navigate to transaction SM37 or STAD to view job details.

6.8 Reports

You can access the following reports from the Reports view of the Job Management - Administration app:

● ABAP reports that contain information about job requests and job documentation
● BW reports that contain information about health checks in job scheduling management

Related Information

ABAP Reports [page 246]

Job Management Health Check Reports [page 247]

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 245
6.8.1 ABAP Reports

Use

The following ABAP reports are available:

● Job requests (CRM Web UI)

Searches job requests (linked to incidents or requests for change)
● Job documentation
Searches job documentation so you can monitor it and avoid duplication.

Procedure

To run a report, proceed as follows:

1. Open the Job Management - Administration app and choose Reports.

2. Select the ABAP Reports radio button.
3. Click the Report link for the report you want to run.
The section screen for the ABAP report opens.
4. Specify the desired selection criteria.

 Note

For the job documentation report, under Due Date, you can enter a date range in the Exact Date fields.
The due date is the date after which the user should check if the job is still required.

Under Time Frame, in the From <n> Days before Today and To <n> Days after Today fields, you can
specify within what period the due date must lie for the jobs of the job documentation to be selected.
These fields are evaluated independently of the Exact Date fields. If you specify a due date range and a
time frame, the system will return all job documentation for the jobs whose due date either matches
the due date specified or lies within the specified period.

5. Execute the report.

Result

All the documents that match your selection criteria are displayed in the results list. You can open the job
request, job documentation, or CRM document from the results list by clicking its ID.

Business Process Operations

246 PUBLIC Job Management
6.8.2 Job Management Health Check Reports

Use

You can run reports in SAP Business Warehouse (SAP BW) to monitor job processing. The reports are part of
the health checks for Job Management. You use data from business process monitoring and from the managed
systems.

Integration

The Job Management analyses contain further reports, including an SAP BW report for job alerts with trend
analysis. With this report, you can examine the data for a positive or negative trend. For more information, see
Reports: Business Processes Operations [page 249]

Prerequisites

● Activities to set up SAP BW reports in Customizing for SAP Solution Manager, under Capabilities :
○ You have activated the BI content
This activates all SAP BW objects in the BI content which are relevant for the JSM health check.
○ You have set up data aggregation.
You have specified the periods (for example, week or month) over which the system report data is
summed.

 Note

You only need to set up SAP BW reporting once, before the first reports are created.

● Your system administrator has set up job management analysis in the Administration view of the Job
Management - Administration app:
○ Assign data collections
You must activate the following extractors:

Extractor Description

F86_JSMHC_EXTRACTOR_JOBS JSM Health Check at job level

The system extracts this data into the table TBTCO.

F87_JSMHC_EXTRACTOR_STEPS JSM Health Check at job step level

The system extracts this data into the tables TBTCO and
TBTCP.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 247
  Note

Activation of the extractors for the managed systems requires the latest version of the solution tool
plug-in (ST-PI) and the application service tool (ST-A/ PI, type M), in the managed system. You can
download ST-PI and ST-A/PI from the software download center at http://support.sap.com/swdc
. Call the program RTCCTOOL in the managed system, after installation, in the ABAP editor
(transaction SE38). It checks whether certain transports or SAP notes are missing in your system.

○ Configure the JSM health check

You have specified which reports the system is to run, to inform you about the duration and delays in
job processing, using job and business process monitoring data.

Features

You can call the following Job Management health check reports:

Report Data Source Template ID

Daily job view Managed system 0SM_JSM_HC_XBP_DAILY_JOBS

Daily view of steps Managed system 0SM_JSM_HC_XBP_DAILY_STEPS

Weekly view of jobs (aggregated) Managed system 0SM_JSM_HC_XBP_WEEKLY_JOBS

Weekly view of steps (aggregated) Managed system 0SM_JSM_HC_XBP_WEEKLY_STEPS

Monthly view of jobs (aggregated) Managed system 0SM_JSM_HC_XBP_MONTHLY_JOBS

Monthly view of steps (aggregated) Managed system 0SM_JSM_HC_XBP_MONTHLY_STEPS

Weekly view of business process manage­ Business Process Moni­ 0SM_JSM_HC_BPMON

ment toring

Weekly view of business process manage­ Business Process Moni­ 0SM_JSM_HC_BPMON_CHAIN

ment (job chains) toring

 Note

For further information about running a health check report, see Monitoring Process Chains [page 252].

Business Process Operations

248 PUBLIC Job Management
Example

You can, for example, analyze the following key figures for job management:

Key Figure Analysis Object Value Range or Interval

Runtime distribution All jobs ● Less than five seconds

● between five seconds and five minutes
● More than five minutes

Runtime distribution Long jobs ● Between five and 15 minutes

● Between 15 and 30 minutes
● Between 30 and 60 minutes
● More than 60 minutes

Job status: Canceled or Job comparison by number ● Canceled

Completed of jobs ● Completed

Job status: Canceled or Job comparison by job run­ ● Canceled

Completed time ● Completed

Workload distribution User comparison by num­ ● The ten users with the highest load
ber of jobs ● Other users

Workload distribution User comparison by accu­ ● The ten users with the highest load
mulated job runtime ● Other users

Workload distribution Server comparison by num­ All servers on which the system runs jobs in the background
ber of jobs

Workload distribution Server comparison by accu­ All servers on which the system runs jobs in the background
mulated job runtime

6.8.2.1 Reports: Business Process Operations

Use

You can extract the data entered in Business Process Monitoring to an SAP BW system. In this system, the data
for the past weeks and months can be used to determine trends. You can identify problem situations early, and
take appropriate measures.

You can add new reports in this view, and specify basic information and parameters for them. You can also
open, change or delete existing reports (SAP BW templates).

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 249
Prerequisites

● You are authorized for this application.

● You are authorized to display and create a report.
● You have configured an SAP BW system and configured the settings to:
○ Set up the BW system
○ Set up communication between BW and the SAP Solution Manager system
○ Activate the BI Content
○ Edit Web templates
○ Specify data extraction from the SAP Solution Manager system
For more information about configuring reports, see the setup guide at https://wiki.scn.sap.com/wiki/x/
Y4DSFw .

Procedure

Displaying Reports

To open a report, click on the URL in the table. Assuming you have the required authorizations, the system
opens the report in a browser window.

Adding a New Report

To add a new report, choose Add. The Add New Report dialog box appears, with the following tab pages:

● Basic Information tab page

Enter the basic report information here. Entries are required in the fields marked with an asterisk.
1. Enter a template ID. The template must already exist. SAP has supplied the standard template with the
ID 0SM_BPM_WT0001.
2. Enter a description.
3. Enter the server in the format server:port.
4. Select the server type: ABAP or JAVA.
● Variables tab page
Variables are predefined selection criteria for queries.
Users should fill out the parameter ID and default values to add variables to the query.
By selecting the Dynamic checkbox, you can select a function which determines this default value, with
Assign Function. You can create functions using a Customizing activity.
○ Parameter ID
Enter the ID.
○ Parameter Description
You can describe the parameter here.
○ Parameter Type
You can choose between Individual Value, Interval, and Selection Option, depending on the variable
definition.
○ Value
Specify a value.
● Filters tab page

Business Process Operations

250 PUBLIC Job Management
 Filters are freely-definable selection criteria. You can specify additional filters to specify your query:
○ Data Provider
Specify a data provider.
○ Attribute ID
Specify the ID of your search.
○ Description
Describe your filter.
○ Sign
Choose between Include and Exclude.
○ Operator
Choose an operator.
○ Low and High
Enter the extreme values.
● Text Parameters tab page
A BW template contains elements such as tables or diagrams. You can adjust the labeling of these
elements.
○ Language
Choose a language. Users who log on in this language see what you enter in this language.
○ Web Item
Choose a Web item. The Web item must have been specified and exist in the template.
○ Text Type
Choose a text type.
○ Text
Enter the new text.

 Example

Choose the language German, the text type Title, and the Web ID of a table. Enter German - Title in
the Text field, and choose Add. Then choose the language English, the text type Title, and the Web ID.
Enter English - Title in the Text field, and choose Add.

Users who log on in German, see the text German - Title above the table in the BW report. Users who
log on in English, see the text English - Title above the table in the BW report.

● Users' Authorization tab page

If you specify user names here, only these users are permitted to use the SAP BW reports in the Business
Process Operations section.

Changing or Deleting an Existing Report

To change a report, select it in the list and choose Change.

To delete a report, select it in the list and choose Delete.

Business Process Operations

Job Management PUBLIC 251
6.8.2.2 Monitoring Process Chains

Prerequisites

● You use business process monitoring and have activated job monitoring for process chains.
● You have fulfilled the prerequisites for SAP BW reports in Job Management. For more information, see Job
Scheduling Management Health Check Reports [page 247].

Context

You use this procedure to run a report that informs you of the daily duration and start delays of SAP BW
process chains. The system gets the job data from business process monitoring.

Procedure

1. Open the Job Management - Administration app and choose Reports.

2. Select the BW Reports radio button.
3. In the table of reports, navigate to the row for the process chain-specific weekly view in business process
management.

In the detail area below the table, the system displays further information, such as the template ID.
4. Choose Report.

A dialog box appears.

 Note

You can also execute the report within the open report dialog. In this case, enter the variable selection
criteria on the Preview tab.

5. Enter a solution name.

1. The system selects all jobs that ran for this solution.
2. To further restrict the search results, you must specify the calendar week.
6. Choose Execute.

The system opens a report with the evaluation results. The report contains the selection criteria, the
selected processes and process steps as well as the following information in table and graphic form:

○ Maximum duration of the process chain per day

○ Maximum start delay of the process chain per day

Business Process Operations

252 PUBLIC Job Management
Important Disclaimers and Legal Information

Hyperlinks
Some links are classified by an icon and/or a mouseover text. These links provide additional information.
About the icons:

● Links with the icon : You are entering a Web site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, you agree (unless expressly stated otherwise in your
agreements with SAP) to this:

● The content of the linked-to site is not SAP documentation. You may not infer any product claims against SAP based on this information.
● SAP does not agree or disagree with the content on the linked-to site, nor does SAP warrant the availability and correctness. SAP shall not be liable for any
damages caused by the use of such content unless damages have been caused by SAP's gross negligence or willful misconduct.

● Links with the icon : You are leaving the documentation for that particular SAP product or service and are entering a SAP-hosted Web site. By using such
links, you agree that (unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP) you may not infer any product claims against SAP based on this
information.

Beta and Other Experimental Features

Experimental features are not part of the officially delivered scope that SAP guarantees for future releases. This means that experimental features may be changed by
SAP at any time for any reason without notice. Experimental features are not for productive use. You may not demonstrate, test, examine, evaluate or otherwise use
the experimental features in a live operating environment or with data that has not been sufficiently backed up.
The purpose of experimental features is to get feedback early on, allowing customers and partners to influence the future product accordingly. By providing your
feedback (e.g. in the SAP Community), you accept that intellectual property rights of the contributions or derivative works shall remain the exclusive property of SAP.

Example Code
Any software coding and/or code snippets are examples. They are not for productive use. The example code is only intended to better explain and visualize the syntax
and phrasing rules. SAP does not warrant the correctness and completeness of the example code. SAP shall not be liable for errors or damages caused by the use of
example code unless damages have been caused by SAP's gross negligence or willful misconduct.

Gender-Related Language
We try not to use gender-specific word forms and formulations. As appropriate for context and readability, SAP may use masculine word forms to refer to all genders.

Videos Hosted on External Platforms

Some videos may point to third-party video hosting platforms. SAP cannot guarantee the future availability of videos stored on these platforms. Furthermore, any
advertisements or other content hosted on these platforms (for example, suggested videos or by navigating to other videos hosted on the same site), are not within
the control or responsibility of SAP.

Business Process Operations

Important Disclaimers and Legal Information PUBLIC 253
www.sap.com/contactsap

© 2020 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form

or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP
affiliate company. The information contained herein may be changed
without prior notice.

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors

contain proprietary software components of other software vendors.
National product specifications may vary.

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for

informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of any
kind, and SAP or its affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or
omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP or
SAP affiliate company products and services are those that are set forth
in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and
services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an
additional warranty.

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as
their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP
SE (or an SAP affiliate company) in Germany and other countries. All
other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their
respective companies.

Please see https://www.sap.com/about/legal/trademark.html for

additional trademark information and notices.

THE BEST RUN